Home

Siemens FUS1010 User's Manual

image

Contents

1. Flow gt dah qa Reference Pin E Shown Inserted i Track Rail N en Al Number Index Pin moles Assembly Shown Inserted Chain Loop Chain over tension screw hook Chain Tension A g Screw Sj INSTALLATION REFLECT MOUNT WITH MOUNTING TRACK 2 Place the track rail assembly on the top surface of the pipe at the location where you have deter mined it would be mounted Ensure that it is a smooth area without any raised spots or seams Holding the assembly in place loop one of the roller chains under the pipe pull it around and main tain tension while slipping a link over the tension screw hook Tighten the tension screw enough to hold the assembly on the pipe but still allow rotation Repeat for the other roller chain Rotate the track rail assembly to the intended nine o clock mounting position on the pipe then tighten both tension screws just enough to prevent rotation Do not overtighten 3 Mark a generous area around the transducers 1 2 inch on either side and half again the length front and back with a pencil or chalk Loosen and move the assembly away from marked area Prepare the two areas you marked by de greasing the surface if needed and removing any grit corrosion rust loose paint or surface irregularities wi
2. 4 12 PRS 252 SQ 4 13 RS 232 21g 0 Boil d 1 011 2 nee nmm 4 13 Baud Pate 4 13 ai 4 14 Datta BIS e 4 14 Line Feed m 4 14 Network ID 4 15 RTS Aie 4 15 Backlight eem 4 16 Systemi UNE eec 4 16 The 1010 Graphic Display Screens eere 4 16 System 1010 Application Notes ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeenenn nennen 5 1 To Obtain Technical Assistance cccsseeccesseeeeeeseneeeeeeeeneeeesseeeesesseneeeensenes 5 1 Considerations For Critical Applications ecce 5 1 Pipe Considerations For Clamp On Transducers 5 2 Pipe Dimensions 5 2 Picking The Appropriate Transducer eeeeeeerereneee 5 2 Flow Velocity R ge oni rentur ne ranae any sae eru erit Rus nuu a nE adaini 5 2 Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 5 3 7 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 6 5 4 7 5 4 8 5 4 9 5 4 10 5 5 5 6 5 7 Section 6 6 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 1 4 6 2 Overview O
3. 2 44 MR OW et terr uH nS 2 44 Max VS M S ninss e LS DT SETTE 2 45 MIN YSIS aean ar a Mvaedeceeebeiaectecrneeee 2 45 MENSI S a ea E eee re E rete a 2 45 MiA EUM a E 2 45 VIC scr Mmm 2 45 MINS Ge a A ER 2 45 Max VISCOSITY CS ckssssstuctisastusxauitanckagetu sanis E um e sux ba s a tu pu A FH QUEM OBS 2 45 Min USC OG CSod a etie un det hansorpas tust dus Date IUE AiR 2 45 Max Euer rupe a 2 45 Miri Temperat ul B eee ere eee ner Oey a dete e o Sn bec ue Dose ton Te 2 45 Set gt 2 45 lu epu PP E 2 46 Node POr 2 46 Homo Ge C C Xo rrr 2 46 LOWS Gi 2 46 High VISBOSILY CS misrit araeir en Ma von A Un epu 2 46 LOW VISCOSILY CS et 2 46 Hion Temperaturo erien E 2 46 Low Temperature P enne eee 2 46 Interface Vs m s meters per second ssessssssssssssss 2 47 Aeration p MEET 2 47 Makeup Late p m 2 47 Calibrate Flow Pate iscsi oiii rid ratua inpr nns era tesiesnidsieasusnnacsundiocacecsssineke 2 48 K Calibrati i sranna rnn OTT 2 48 MUP ORE CalibratlON sss eeren ese ie e ERER 2 48 The StripChart Setup Menu ssssnnssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanne nnn 2 50 The StripChart Setup Menu Structure eeessseees 2 50 ciego m
4. 5 8 Vps Values in sec For some Common Metals sesssssss 5 8 Recommended Sonic Coupling Compounds sseesssss 5 9 System 1010 Reynolds Compensation Factor ssesssss 5 10 Terminology C ft RII UT 5 11 The Nema Dual Channel Menu Chart eene 5 13 The Meter Ty pe WG Re 5 13 The Meter Facilities Menu c ccceessceeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeees 5 13 The Clamp On Meter Menu nro niter rin ope kn Rene 5 14 Operating System 1010N With Flow Tubes eene 6 1 General Installation Guidelines eere 6 1 Liquid Applicability And Compatibility eere 6 1 Selecting The Right Flow Tube iena tinet noticie one tnn nus a Conus nier aate nuss 6 2 Flow Tube Pressure And Temperature Ratings ssessss 6 2 Flow Tube Material Size amp Flow Range Ratings 6 2 Flow Tube Mounting Location cccsssccssseeeecesseeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeensenenees 6 2 Flow Data Scatter And Damping cccsseseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeeeeenseneeees 6 3 Considerations For Critical Applications c sceccceseeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeneenenes 6 3 To COD TaI Technical ONAN ceci etui ce La oeaurue ee a E 6 3 How To Set Up System 1010N
5. 1eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee enne nnn 4 6 Display Datalodqdt 1 urere one than nu rena ae acitn an ieu Ex unn E sa Ea ana InRXR pue rEeA 4 6 O utp t Dat al OG Gi RE EO o 0 oo TREE 4 7 erg 4 7 Est Ew AE c 4 8 Clear Datalogger e 4 8 The Memory Control Menu sssssssunsenennnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnmn 4 8 Data Memory dM E 4 8 Memor MBs elcatolte tein deni ouptirtt ness binas Lbs dE RD Are menlis tEdsad ted duut 4 8 B rger 4 8 The Analog Output Trim Menu eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenen nennen nnn 4 9 Current Output Trim lo1 amp 102 nancccucr ioannis ra cen tna yuan annu coa uEx ERE nnmnnn 4 9 Voltage Output Trim VGT amp VOo2 eiecit cutn inae da tuin erac k erai inantea nee 4 9 Pgen Output Trim Pgen 1 amp Pgen 2 eene 4 10 The RTD Calibrate Menu optional eeeeeeeeee esee 4 10 RTD Calibrate Menu Structure osi tetendit aset o t cu tias 4 11 The RTD Calibrate by Data Entry eernereo ener ctr b aei tt ninn n ri se 4 11 Ice Bath RTD Callbratlon nonne etant nana n ux ansaa uEk eura cie 4 11 The Glock Set MOM X 4 12 DS 4 12 TONG
6. 2 50 Data DISD 2 51 MMC BASSO 2 51 StripCGhart Clear 2 52 The Datalogger Setup Menu auis ce no ciae tura annuens raa cae uae uo Gun tpa aene usn nna 2 52 The Datalogger Setup Menu Structure seeessesseess 2 53 Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J 2g 2 9 2 2 9 3 2 9 4 2 9 5 2 10 2 10 1 2 10 2 2 10 3 2 11 2 11 1 2 11 2 2 11 3 2 11 4 2 11 5 2 11 5 Datalogger MOOG 2 54 prin raacme 2 54 Alarm Letter Codes and Descriptions seeeeeseeeese 2 55 Log Time InterVal 2 t bikini cas beri aac a eia ree ecl Cac i bone d 2 55 Perinde 2 55 Display Datalogger sssiiecicisiiccsccestccaceisnsncceneenetcnndinessutennnscenedniensnauseccenseinerecueuce 2 56 The WO Data Control Menu cuero acce ene erre ina nara Ens aeta un ta taa 2 57 The I O Data Control Menu Structure seeeeeeeeseese 2 58 PAUL OUT SONG D 2 58 System 1010 Analog Outputs cee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeneeees 2 59 Analog Output Data Categories sssen 2 59 Table to Determine Proper I O installation Drawings 2 59 Assign
7. 1 406 1 593 1 781 1 968 2 125 The above sizes are produced by pipe mills but dimensions do not conform to any regular stan dard or schedule These materials are generally available in Schedules 40 and 80 only 9 wall thickness identical with thickness of Standard Weight pipe Wall Thickness of Schedule 5S amp 10S does not permit threading in Wall Thickness identical with thickness of Extra Heavy pipe accordance with the American Standard for Pipe Threads ASA No B2 1 These do not conform to American Standard B36 10 PIPE WEIGHT FORMULA FOR STEEL PIPE Ibs per foot 10 68 D t t where D Outside Diameter and t2 Wall Thickness Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 155 Plant Avenue Hauppauge New York 11788 3801 Tel 1 631 231 3600 Toll Free 1 800 275 8479 Fax 1 631 231 3334 Web www controlotron com E mail info ultrasonicflow siemens com
8. eeseseseeeeenee 2 11 How To Select A Liquid Class eere 2 13 How to Edit the Estimated Vs liquid sonic velocity 2 13 How to Edit the Viscosity cS Setting sssssssssss 2 14 How to Edit the Density SG Setting sessssesesesss 2 14 In Cr e 2 14 Application Data Menu Explanations for UniMass Table 2 15 How To Select A Pipe Temperature Range eene 2 18 li mesi M 2 19 Pipe Configuration Menu Structure eese 2 19 Additional Compensation Tables uscire Sie Feet geile uen rend 2 20 The Pick Install XDCR Menu currere rennen nnn nnnun ntn aun nenne 2 20 Piek Install Xdcr Menu Structure uenerit retenti delest enis 2 22 How To Select A Transducer Model eene 2 22 How To Select A Transducer Size eene 2 23 How To Select A Transducer Mount Mode e 2 23 Reviewing The Spacing Method eee 2 24 How To Use The Spacing Offset esee 2 24 The Number Index Menu CGell cnoaao trae itu tante ann itn eiaa te cane annis enn nnna 2 25 The Lin Men Gell e
9. 2 25 How To Use Install Completed esses 2 25 Force Transmit Procedure sjeccccsscscccssvseasctirasiedeadabedevedeandduendsbecdtedeanceeenten 2 27 The Empty Pipe Set Mellli onec ru acean uno er nsu na tuba Iani dean inn risa SaEueen 2 29 How to Use the Actual MTY Command sese 2 29 How to Use the MTYmatic Command eeseeeseeeenne 2 30 How to Use the Set Empty Command eesseeeeeeese 2 30 The Zero Flow Adjust Menu 122r crimina n sos Minn ERR E nta E ak EXP d ama S AES Cp RR PI MS 2 30 UA o PC EE 2 30 AciualiZGo sec eter ETE tesa pa eire rend terere ERR RRRM tcceastucveihansinderddasgevies 2 31 Reversa Matis sxcc cece iexabebocseuastes 2 31 STONING definition C E cate aed bute vetted 2 31 Using Actual Zero iccissacccessanedastescuddidaaue Mein bird idee cat vanidacindatsarlbeawesbenceneiues 2 31 Using PREV OTSA et 2 32 ZeroMatic optional JUDCUOED x esccvietscicteaisascanemedonennace cete P ERR Pu ELSE cb DAE RT EE 2 33 The Operation Adjust Menu eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereene nennen 2 34 Operation Adjust Menu Structure eeeseseeeeeeeeeee 2 35 D mping Contool eee 2 35 Deadband Comte ssvciscisccccccesncsveccencececsaneuvereanccrasucnteseesscuetactusnserenaccdeuscanteesne 2 35 Memory Fa lt SOU
10. 2 4 44 HOW TO SELECT A TRANSDUCER MODEL Use the Transducer Model menu cell to define the type of transducer for use with your application This allows the flow computer to adjust its transmit receive functions accordingly You can choose from either the 1011 Universal or 1011H High Precision transducer lists or from a list of 91 Univer sal models You should consider using high precision transducers for extremely critical applications We usually recommend these transducers for custody transfer leak detection or nuclear power applications The system default is 1011 Universal If this suits the application bypass this menu cell by pressing the Down Arrow 2 22 Section 2 1010NFM 3J To select a Transducer Type To access the Xdcr Type option list press To move the cursor to the required transducer model press IA To store your selection press enr 2 4 2 HOW TO SELECT A TRANSDUCER SIZE When you move the cursor to Transducer Size the highlighted prompt at the top of the display screen shows a list of recommended transducer sizes For example Recommended Xdcrs D3 D2 D1 C1 C3 The flow computer generates this list automatically based on your pipe and your application data entries The left most transducer size e g D3 is the primary most appropriate choice The right most transducer e g C3 is still acceptable but the least desirable choice Since these are simply recommendations not requiremen
11. PIPE B L Channel 2 Flow Pipe B Flow Rate Dual Path Dual Path uses two measurement channels to achieve a single output via a virtual third channel The resultant data is the average of the two channels Only clamp on or in line transit time operation al lowed Benefits include highest available precision and enhanced immunity to distorted flow profile conditions Channel 1 Flow Pipe Chi Ch2 Output 2 average of Ch 1 amp Ch 2 gt Channel 2 Flow Channel 1 2 and Channel 1 2 Arithmetic operation produces data output via a virtual Channel 3 proportional to sum or difference of the liquid and energy flow of two independent pipes This requires setting the two channels to operate independently Only clamp on or in line transit time operation is supported I Channel 1 PIPE A Output Ch1 Ch2 sum or difference PIPE B of Ch1 amp Ch2 TO E Channel 2 Channel 1 2 produces a data output via a virtual Channel 3 proportional to the difference of the liquid and energy flow of two independent pipes You have to set up the two channels independently Only clamp on or in line transit time operation is supported 1 9 Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 7 4 ESSENTIAL INFORMATION FOR USERS OF MULTI CHANNEL 1010 s Multi Ch
12. 0 2 of flow for rates above 0 6 GPM 2 3 LPM 0 2 of flow for rates above 1 5 GPM 5 7 LPM Zero Stability 0 0013 GPM 0 005 LPM 0 003 GPM 0 011 LPM Accuracy Intrinsic 1 of flow over 0 15 GPM 0 57 LPM to 5 GPM 20 LPM 1 of flow over 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM to 25 GPM 95 LPM Accuracy Flow Calibrated 0 5 of flow over 0 15 GPM 0 5 LPM to 5 GPM 20 LPM 0 5 of flow over 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM to 25 GPM 95 LPM Connection 34 FPT 34 FPT 65 SPECIFICATIONS KYNAR PVDF FLOW TUBE Typical values subject to change without notice Liquid Size 1 Must be compatible with PVDF under operating conditions and free of suspended gasses or solids Size 2 Must be compatible with PVDF under operating conditions and free of suspended gasses or solids Pressure Drop 0 28 psi 1 5 GPM 5 7 LPM flowing water at 68 F 0 24 psi 4 5 GPM 17 0 LPM flowing water at 68 F Sensitivity 0 0005 GPM 0 002 LPM 0 0015 GPM 0 006 LPM Linearity 1 of flow for rates above 0 09 GPM 0 34 LPM 1 of flow for rates above 0 27 GPM 1 0 LPM Repeatability 0 2 of flow for rates above 0 6 GPM 2 3 LPM 0 2 of flow for rates above 1 5 GPM 5 7 LPM Zero Stability 0 0013 GPM 0 005 LPM 0 003 GPM 0 011 LPM Accuracy Intrinsic 1 of flow over 0 15 GPM 0 57 LPM to 5 GPM 20 LPM 1 of flow over 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM to
13. 7 7 Installing Reflexor Operating Mode 7 8 Access The Install Xdcr Transducer Menu 79 The Spectra Display Screen Example of a Spectra Display Screen 7 10 Cursor Use On The Spectra Graph 7 11 How To Use Spectra Graph Data and Controls 7 12 Available Adjustments To Spectra Graph 7 13 Reflexor Diagnostic Data eene Bcogairidbcuatc E 7 14 Display of F At No Flow Conditions 7 15 Selection Of Liquid Composition 7 16 Other Menu Entries eoce creer tento dee coe eae ct creer uia nenccue APPENDICES Appendix A Couplant Installation Instructions if applicable Appendix B Site Setup Considerations for 1010N Blind Systems Appendix C Engineering Drawings INDEX Pipe Table viii Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 GETTING STARTED 1 1 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on your purchase of the Siemens SITRANS FUS1010 NEMA Permanent Flowmeter Intended for dedicated applications this versatile transit time flowmeter is easy to set up and operate The Model FUS1010 flowmeter represents the state of the art in computerized instrumentation We are confident that in a very short time you will appreciate its
14. System 1010 Damping and Slewing Controls System 1010 can detect and display minute flow fluctuations that are always present though not usually detectable by typical flowmeters This rapid response accommodates applications that require the tracking of fast flow transients Time Average is a filter that controls the output damping the number of samples averaged together to produce the instrument s primary rate output It allows you to enter a value in seconds that the flow computer uses to integrate its response to flow changes Do not confuse this with the update speed of analog outputs This occurs every 0 2 seconds regardless of the time average that you select One practical application is to set the time average damping so that the meter maintains a smooth output when it is installed downstream from devices e g a positive displacement pump that may cause regular surges in the liquid flow SmartSlew is a digital signal processing method that generates a variable time constant based on the real time assessment of collected data When the flow data exhibits a steady trend SmartSlew ex tends the time constant resulting in very smooth data output SmartSlew instantaneously reduces the time constant whenever the trend of flow changes even for a short duration The flow output quickly follows the slewing of actual flow SmartSlew thus provides excellent data without sacrificing the fast response required for precise flow control Feel free
15. Verify Liquid chemistry is as expected Ask about additives Pressure Temp Try 1 Cycle Vs Correction in Diagnostics if error remains for a liquid with well defined Vs data 2 86 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Low Valc LJ Clean and condition pipe surface D Use High Precision or first recommended Universal Transducer Use Direct Mount be sure of transducer 180 alignment Use larger size transducer Universal Only E LJ Use wider spacing Maximum or Letter D E Stop flow to check for Aeration Cavitation E Try another location L Perform an Initial Makeup after ANY of the above changes Detection Fault Low Signal E Perform all checks for Low Valc E Ensure pipe is full E Ensure cables are terminated at both ends Check continuity with Ohmmeter L Check operation on Pipe Simulator LJ Switch off any radiating electrical equipment in area Transmitters Variable Freq Drives etc High Vaer Avoid transducer mounting near flow obstructions Check for possible pressure drop sources Pipe Expansion Orifice Check Valve etc Check liquid Flash Point against application conditions Pinch downstream valve of Transducer to raise pressure Mount on suction side of pump Raise tank levels adjust Float switches DOUOUOUD Switch off any radiating electrical equipment in area Transmitters Variable Freq Drives etc Poor Signal E Check that actual pipe dimensions and material match
16. ing Invoke the ZeroMatic initial makeup procedure as previously described above While ZeroMatic initial makeup is running press function ei abort the process thereby disabling the The screen will return to the Dual Channel Flow menu and highlight the Operation Adjust menu cell 2 5 THE OPERATION ADJUST MENU This menu becomes available after picking a meter type and measurement channel We recom mend that you use it after the transducers are installed and operating to fine tune the meter s output characteristics Each application presents different data display and output requirements due to unique pipe and liquid conditions Use the Operation Adjust menu to match meter operation to the site You can set damping controls for the primary flow rate output You can define a Deadband usually a very low flow rate below which the flow output will be forced to zero You can also select the meter response to a continuous Fault condition Use this menu cell to select either SmartSlew or Time Average output damping Use this menu cell to enter a flowrate deadband threshold Flowrates below this level will be reported as zero flow Use this menu cell to change the Reflexor response to a Zero Fault indication by selecting Zero in the Zero Fault Set menu 2 Channel 1 BCD Determine Fault Memory Delay Damping Control Smart Slew Deadband Control 0 000 Memory Fault Set Memory Memory Delay lt sec gt
17. Chan Hot Setup Chan Hot Setup 1010NFM 3J Pick Install Xdcr NOTE You are allowed to override the transducer type and size mounting mode and spacing offset See paragraph 1 7 Now you have to mount the transducers in accordance with the data recommended on the screen Refer to the Section 3 for detailed instructions The pipe must be completely filled with a liquid for the initial installation of the meter Make sure that you do not install your transducers backwards or reverse the Upstream and Downstream cables Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 e Install after mounting transducers Transducer Model Zero Flow Adjust 1611 Universal Transducer Size B3 Xdcr Mount Hode Reflect Spacing Offset Hinimum Humber Index 7 Spacing Method Track 1612TP Ltn Value in 8 778 Install Completed Ho Empty Pipe Set Install Chan Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr Use the Install Completed menu cell to inform the meter that you have finished mounting the hardware Press or Move the cursor to Install Press lev The meter performs an Initial Makeup which conditions its operation to the selected transducer pipe and liquid and then sets the empty pipe and the zero flow levels automatically Be patient The Initial Makeup performs a number of operations including a frequency sweep of the pipe wall resonance which could take several minutes Channel 1 Transducer Hodel 1811 Universal Transducer Size B3 Xdcr Moun
18. Introduction to HF Menu Item All 1010 flowmeters with version 3 01 02 and later operating systems include a new Diagnostics Menu item that permits the entry of a flow registration correction parameter labeled HF This HF parameter is the input for a proprietary algorithm which automatically compensates for signal beam blowing in pipes utilizing either 1011 clamp on or insert transducers thereby extending the upper flow limit of all 1010 flowmeters This algorithm provides the most benefit for clamp on meters where high flow velocities and low sound velocities create the most challenging conditions for digital signal processing routines Using the HF Menu Item Two methods for adjusting this parameter are provided via the HF menu cell located within the Diagnostics Site Setup submenu The Manual method provides direct entry of this parameter and is primarily intended for the advanced user whereas the Automatic method allows the 1010 flowmeter to automatically measure the required correction and install the parameter Guidelines for using the HF menu item are described below e This menu is only accessible for the transducer channels not the virtual average flow channel of the flowmeter i e Diagnostics Path 1 or Path 2 but not Path 1 amp 2 e The 1010 flowmeter will inhibit the Automatic installation of the HF parameter if the flow rate is insufficient too low to accurately measure the required correction
19. To complete the Install process after mounting the transducers press lt ENT gt Immediately after you press ENT the computer starts an internal process called an Initial Makeup The current Initial Makeup activity for example DEERE YES appears at the top of the display screen During the Initial Makeup the flow computer verifies your site data records the sonic charac teristics of the pipe and liquid and then adjusts internal parameters to optimize flow measurement Please remain patient This process can take several seconds or several minutes to complete There is no relationship between the length of an Initial Makeup and the meter s subsequent performance An Initial Makeup for larger pipes and more demanding application conditions simply takes a little longer Upon sucessful completion of the initial makeup the 1010 will show you a pop up window with the measured Vs as shown below Measured Vs m s 1470 This means that the flow computer was able to complete the Initial Makeup and is now actively mea suring flow This pop up window allows you to fine tune the Measured Vs by pressing the lt Right Arrow gt to activate numeric entry You can then use the numeric keys to type a different value How ever only edit the Measured Vs when you are certain of your liquids actual sonic velocity If however there is a large discrepancy between the measured Vs and the actual Vs then consider that an accurate Vs meas
20. To store selection press ent PULSE OUTPUT Pgen Wirin 1010N amp 1010DN with 1010N 2 Modules TB2 Installation Drawing 1010N 2 7 Sheet 2 of 2 SIGNAL FUNCTION NOTES PGEN 1 FREQUENCY OUTPUT 1 0 5000 Hz 5 Volt Logic Square Waveform PGEN 1 REF GROUND PGEN 2 FREQUENCY OUTPUT 2 PGEN 2 REF GROUND 1010N amp 1010DN with Expanded 1010N 7 I O Modules Installation Drawing 1010N 7 7 Sheet 2 of 3 TB2 Standard High Performance and Enhanced Performance Flowmeters SIGNAL FUNCTION NOTES PG1 FREQUENCY OUTPUT 1 0 5000 Hz 5 Volt Logic Square Waveform PG2 REF GROUND PG3 FREQUENCY OUTPUT 2 PG4 REF GROUND 2 10 2 RELAY SETUP Use this menu to assign a function to channel relays System 1010 supports 2 types of relay outputs Alarm Relay and Pulse Relay Alarm Relay outputs operate in fail safe mode The relay s are ener gized under normal conditions an alarm condition causes the relay s to de energize until alarm clears The Pulse Relay output supports totalizer and batch relay functions Output is a pulse width approximately 200 ms maximum activation rate is 2 5 pulses per sec If totalizer pulses exceed this rate excess pulses are stored in an overflow register This allows the relay to catch up when flow decreases enough 2 60 Section 2 1010NFM 3J NOTE Using the F1 key Totalizer clear command also clears all channel totalizers plus the overfl
21. 2 9 1 DATALOGGER MODE The Datalogger Mode option list allows you to disable Datalogger transmit reports to an external target via RS 232 port or store selected data for later display The default setting is Off After enabling the Datalogger select a data format before generating a report To select a Datalogger Mode To access the Datalogger Mode option list press Move the cursor to the desired mode by pressing To store the selection press enr 2 9 2 DATALOGGER DATA Set the Datalogger to record any or all of the data offered on the Datalogger Data option list shown below However recording unneeded data wastes valuable system RAM We recommend that you always select Site ID name and Time to identify each line of data None Default Datalogging is disabled Site ID You entered this site name when you created the site Date The report date according to the meter s real time clock Format MM DD YYYY Time The report time according to the meter s real time clock Format HH MM Flow The instantaneous flow measured at the time of the report Average Flow The average flow rate measured since the last report Raw Flow The uncompensated flow rate in in sec2 only zeroed no Reynolds number curve applied Total The total flow accumulation measured at the time of the report Vs The average liquid sonic velocity since the last report Valc The signal strength measured at the time of
22. 4 12 Section 4 1010NFM 3J To set the clock To enable numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the time HH MM To store the time press ev This moves the cursor to RS 232 Setup 4 8 RS 232 SETUP Use the RS 232 Setup menu to set the operating parameters of the serial I O port Settings include baud rate parity data bits line feed network ID number and waiting period before a RTS time out Only activate the RS 232 output if you intend to transmit serial data This will avoid burdening the system with unnecessary data transferals while it is performing flow computations NOTE The RS 232 stop bit implementation is fixed If you are using a communication pro gram such as Windows 3 xx Terminal or Windows 95 98 NT 2000 XP HyperTerminal that includes a field for stop bits select 1 stop bit RS 232 SETUP MENU STRUCTURE RS 232 Setup cC Baud Rate m Data Bits 7 8 Line Feed gt No ji Yes Network ID xx numeric entry RTS Key Time gt 0 2 Sec 0 4 Sec 0 6 Sec f 0 8 Sec 1 0 Sec 2 0 Sec 3 0 Sec 4 0 Sec 4 8 1 BAUD RATE The Baud Rate menu cell sets the asynchronous serial transmission data transfer rate of the RS 232 port It provides a selection of standard baud rates up to 38 400 baud The selected baud rate must match the baud rate setting of the receiving external device The factory set baud rate is 9600 To change the Baud Rate To access the Baud Rate op
23. For applications that continuously have Deviations between 25 and 35 proper selection of either Liquid or Slurry can be confirmed by comparison to a known flow reference Siemens 2Channel 1 Channel 1 Choose Liquid or Slurry flow calibration Liquid Composition Liquid Density SG 1 00 Application Data 7 16 OTHER MENU ENTRIES All other menu entries will operate and be used in the same manner as the transit time flow measure ment mode 7 9 APPENDIX A Couplant Installation Instructions FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE Call 800 275 8480 631 231 3600 Fax 631 231 3334 E mail TSG ultrasonicflow siemens com FOR GENERAL INFORMATION Website www controlotron com E mail info ultrasonicflow siemens com Or sales ultrasonicflow siemens com Copyright 2006 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Made in the USA NOTE Currently there are no Couplant Installation Instructions included in this field manual for this unit Appendix 1010NFM 3J APPENDIX B SITE SETUP CONSIDERATIONS FOR 1010 1020N BLIND SYSTEMS Siemens offers an economical blind 1010 1020 NEMA system without a local keypad and graphic display screen This supplement describes the hardware and software requirements for program ming these models Site setup for a blind unit requires a PC connected to the RS 232 serial port These models include a serial interface cable for this purpose The serial interface cabl
24. Refers to a number you type into menu cell that stores numeric data Numeric Keys Use the Numeric keys to type a numeric value where appropriate OpSys ROM The read only memory that stores its basic operating instructions and per manent defaults Option List Lists of options presented at menu cells that allow you to select either a single item or multiple items depending on the function that the menu cell controls Parameter Refers to value either numeric or list selection stored in a menu cell POSFLOW Totalizer mode for positive flow total only Register Refers to a memory location used by the flow computer to store data such as the flow total etc RTD Temperature sensors used with energy flow of mass flow systems Site Name A user entered name that meter associates with a stored Site Setup You retreive a particular Site by selecting its name from a site name list Site Setup A collection of parameters used by the meter to service a specific site or location 1010 allows you to store several independent Site Setups Site Storage Memory Section of RAM allocated for permanent data storage This memory seg ment stores inactive site setups including a backup of active site The meter s Site Setup storage capacity depends on the dynamic memory allocation as dictated by each application In addition the meter uses Site Storage Memory to store configurable operating p
25. Spacing OMLICERIIITOMIERE PES Number In 1566 Spacing 2TP Ltn Ualue in 8 778 Install Completed Install Empty Pipe Set Chan Not Setup Zero Flow fidjust Chan Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr Section 1 1010NFM 3J Upon completion the meter reports the measured liquid sonic velocity Press aJ The flowmeter will then automatically perform an AutoZero operation where the meter measures any zero flow offset which is used to correct the flow reading This operation occurs only when the transducers are mounted in the reflect configuration and is independent of whether or not the liquid is flowing After the AutoZero operation is complete the meter may ask you to register the transducer used in this installation It is advisable that you register your transducers since the registration list is used to condition the transducer recommendation Press and select YES or NO if you do not want to register this transducer and then press e Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Transducer Hodel 1811 Universal Transducer Size B3 Xdcr Moun Spacing ORGII FEAT I oes Number Init Spacing 2TP Ltn Ualue in 8 778 Install Completed Install Empty Pipe Set Chan Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Chan Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr The meter is now ready to report flow Press e The meter will then ask you to save the Site Saving the Site is optional and will therefore be covered in paragraph 1 7 To abort this it
26. Spacing Offset Minimum Number Index 4 Spacing Method Track 1012TP Ltn Value in 0 217 Install Completed No Empty Pipe Set Channel Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Channel Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr Press lt ENT gt The Install Completed menu cell will indicate Yes after the 1010 is successfully installed Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Key Install after mounting transducers Transducer Model 1011 Universal Transducer Size B3 Xdcr Mount Mode Direct Spacing Offset Minimum Number Index 4 Spacing Method Track 1012TP Ltn Value in 0 217 Install Completed Yes Empty Pipe Set Channel Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Channel Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr To complete the Install process proceed to page 2 27 and disregard the following paragraphs explaining the Force Transmit and Force Frequency diagnostic software routines NOTE If the transducers have been installed successfully but the Estimated Vs sonic veloc ity has been changed the Pick Install Xdcr menu cell Install Completed option list will also display the Transfer Install function selection The Transfer Install function allows the transducers to be optimally positioned for a different fluid without the need for a new Initial Makeup procedure see the Water Calibration addendum in this manual for details 2 26 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Force Transmit Procedure This diagnostic software routine allows the user to force a
27. Typical Applications include Controls and Refrigerants Fuel Flow Measurement Water and Wastewater treatment chemical feed Chemical and Pharmaceutical Batching Food Processing Juice Wine Beer Hydraulic Oil Leak Detection Measurement of Additives Automobile Assembly and Testing Typical Industries Serviced include HVAC Hotels Airports Government Power Generation Nuclear Fossil and Hydro Chemical Processing Food and Pharmaceutical Aircraft Avionics and Ground Support Water and Wastewater Aerospace Automobile Manufacturing 6 1 GENERAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Installing Flow Tubes is a simple operation but to assure proper installation refer to both the instruc tions in this section and the Installation Outline drawings that came with your specific Flow Tube They both contain important information that you will need for a successful installation 6 1 1 LIQUID APPLICABILITY AND COMPATIBILITY Successful flow measurement using a transit time Flow Tube depends on the sonic transmit signal traveling through the liquid and arriving at the receive transducer without excessive attenuation Most liquids are excellent sonic conductors regardless of their electric or optical properties Although highly viscous liquids exhibit a greater degree of sonic attenuation the 992 and 1011 series Flow Tubes operate successfully with most of these liquids The usual cause of low liquid sonic co
28. 5 GPM 95 LPM Accuracy Flow Calibrated 0 5 of flow over 0 15 GPM 0 57 LPM to 5 GPM 20 LPM 0 5 of flow over 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM to 25 GPM 95 LPM Connection 3 FPT s FPT Section 6 1010NFM 3J 6 6 SPECIFICATIONS TEFLON PFA FLOW TUBE Typical values subject to change without notice Liquid Size 1 Must be compatible with PFA under operating conditions and free of sus pended gasses or solids Size 2 Must be compatible with PFA under operating conditions and free of suspended gasses or solids Pressure Drop 0 23 psi 1 0 GPM 3 8 LPM flowing water at 68 F 0 23 psi 3 0 GPM 11 4 LPM flowing water at 68 F Sensitivity 0 0004 GPM 0 0015 LPM 0 001 GPM 0 004 LPM Linearity 1 of flow for rates above 0 07 GPM 0 26 LPM 1 of flow for rates above 0 27 GPM 1 00 LPM Repeatability 0 2 of flow for rates above 0 6 GPM 2 3 LPM 0 2 of flow for rates above 1 5 GPM 5 7 LPM Zero Stability 0 001 GPM 0 0038 LPM 0 003 GPM 0 012 LPM Accuracy Intrinsic 1 of flow over 0 15 GPM 0 57 LPM to 5 GPM 20 LPM 1 of flow over 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM to 16 GPM 60 LPM Accuracy Flow Calibrated 0 5 of flow over 0 15 GPM 0 57 LPM to 5 GPM 20 LPM 0 5 of flow over 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM to 16 GPM 60 LPM Connection Flaretek Ultrapure PFA Tube Fitting 3 7 Flaretek Ultrapure PFA Tube Fit
29. If necessary enter the Xdcr Size option list and pick the transducer under test 8 Check the Xdcr Mount Mode menu cell Adjust to match the simulator chart above 9 Move the highlight down to Install Completed by pressing D Access the option list To move the cursor to Install press Q A Press to start the transducer install routine NOTE Since Sizes A and C transducers are installed in Reflect Mode you will see a pop up window that prompts you to Use Actual Zero You can ignore this by pressing the lt Down Arrow gt Upon the completion of the Install procedure the flow computer should report a sonic velocity within the range of approximately 1350m s to 1700 m s depending on the transducer size under test Next check Diagnostic Data menu The Valc 96 item must be gt 35 for dependable operation In addition note the reading then compare it to the Vfmax item in the Diagnostic Data Site Setup Data menu The value of the reading should be less than 2 of the published Vf max Confirming these values certifies that the entire system computer transducers cables is operating correctly The investigation should proceed to a review of all site conditions to locate the operating problem 2 82 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 11 10 USING THE 996PSP PIPE SIMULATOR Using the proper coupling compound mount the transducers on the pipe simulator as shown below Slide each transducer until it presses against a pin sto
30. Reflexor Zero Fault Set Operation Adjust 2 34 Use this menu cell to select meter response to a fault condition Fault drops outputs to zero Memory retains last valid reading for duration of Memory delay Use this menu cell to enter the duration in sec that you want the meter to maintain its last reading for during a fault condition The hidden cell only appears if you select Memory Mode Section 2 1010NFM 3J OPERATION ADJUST MENU STRUCTURE Operation Adjust gt Damping Control f Smart Slew x numeric selection TimeAverage xx x numeric entry Deadband Control x xx numeric entry Memory Fault Set m Memory Fault Memory Delay sec xxx numeric entry hidden in Fault Mode Reflexor Zero Fault Set Fault Zero Heflexor Mode only 2 5 1 DAMPING CONTROL System 1010 provides two different data output filter types SmartSlew and Time Average recom mended SmartSlew provides the best combination of data smoothing and quick response to sudden rate changes It performs data scatter damping during steady flow periods while maintaining the ability to respond instantaneously to changing flow rates SmartSlew values range from 1 to 9 The default is 6 Pick a higher number to slow meter response to a rate change Time Average integrates the instantaneous flow rate over a selectable time period You enter a value in seconds which sets the time it takes the meter to respond to a rate
31. TEMP PLASTIC 3 1 2 SELECTING A LOCATION FOR CLAMP ON TRANSDUCERS Locate the transducers downstream from the center of the longest available straight run Alocation ten pipe diameters or greater downstream from the nearest bend will provide the best flow profile condi tions Do not if possible install the transducers downstream from a throttling valve a mixing tank the dis charge of a positive displacement pump or any other equipment that could possibly aerate the liquid The best location will be as free as possible from flow disturbances vibration sources of heat noise or radiated energy Section 3 1010NFM 3J e Avoid mounting the transducers on a section of pipe with any external scale Remove all scale rust loose paint etc from the location e Do not mount the transducers on a surface aberration pipe seam etc e Do not mount transducers from different ultrasonic flowmeters on the same pipe Also do not run the transducer cables in common bundles with cables from communication equipment other Con trolotron systems or any type of ultrasonic equipment You can run these cables through a com mon conduit ONLY if they originate at the same flowmeter e Never mount transducers under water unless you order submersible units and you install them in accordance with factory instructions e Never mount transducers on the top or bottom of a horizontal pipe The best placement on a horizontal pipe is either the nine
32. The schematic below shows the configuration of the cable The wire ends for the flow computer termination are tinned for easy insertion into TB1 on the flow computer Each wire is labeled to identify the correct terminal pin on TB1 In addition both connectors have their CTS pin shorted to the RTS pin pins 4 5 on 25 pin connector and pins 7 8 on 9 pin connector This eliminates the need for hardware handshaking Solder side shown Solder side shown 6 4 GND RX TX 1015CPC N SERIAL INTERFACE CABLE B 1 Appendix 1010NFM 3J Due to the different System 1010 1020 meter configurations there are 3 types of RS 232 communica tion cables employed You can determine which cable is required for the your model flowmeter from the table below Be sure you have the appropriate cable available for use Meter Type Cable Type Controlotron Part Number Notes Weatherproof Portable DB 9F Amphenol 1015CPC WP Except Energy 1010P 1020N DB 9F DB 9F 1015CPC P Use for Energy WP All NEMA4X DB 9F 3 Wire 1015CPC N NEMA 4X with Expanded DB 9F DB 9F 1015CPC P For 1010N with A1 I O Module option 1010N 7 module All 1010X DB 9F 3 Wire 1015CPC N For those who would prefer to make the cables themselves the required parts except for the RS 232 connector for the 1010WP meter types should be available at most computer or electronics stores You will find drawings of the terminations for these cables wit
33. To select a different configuration move the cursor to the desired Meter Type and then press to select it Make sure that the keypad enable switch is in the Enable Up position Turn on power and press to access the Meter Type screen Refer to the figure below Note that on the left hand column Meter Type is highlighted as are all the available meter types on the right hand column Press el This places a cursor next to Dual Channel Flow Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Select Meter Type Meter Type gt Dual Channel Flow Meter Facilities B JTE M Ema ly Ch 1 2 Flow Ch 1 2 Flow Pipe Data Section 1 1010NFM 3J Press tele twice This selects Dual Channel Flow and then places the cursor next to Clamp on for Channel 1 Note that some models do not support all flow sensor types Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Choose Channel 1 Flowmeter Type Channel 1 gt Clamp on Channel 2 FlowTube Reflexor Dual Channel Flow To select Clamp On press This selects the Clamp On Installation Menu for Measure ment Channel 1 Note that the first menu Channel Setup is highlighted Creating a New Site Setup See paragraph 2 1 1 The Channel Setup section of this manual provides detailed instructions on how to use all the Channel Setup menu commands This section provides an example of how to use the Create Rename Site command to create a new site setup Always begin a new installation
34. To store the corrected Vs press enr The flow computer may recommend a new Number Index and prompt you to press enr Remount the transducer at the new Number Index To repeat the Initial Makeup process press ev After the flow computer completes its Initial Makeup command the Install Completed option list changes to Install Completed Yes New Makeup If you want to redo the Initial Makeup move cursor to New Makeup then press ENT This resets the option list You can now repeat the install routine described previously 2 4 9 THE EMPTY PIPE SET MENU The flow computer performs the MTYmatic routine automatically during its Initial Make up to establish a standard setting for the Empty Pipe alarm The Empty Pipe Set option list allows you to re invoke MTY matic use an Actual MTY routine if application conditions allow you to empty and refill the pipe or use the Set Empty routine to set the empty pipe threshold by direct numeric entry How to Use the Actual MTY Command If application conditions allow you to empty and refill the pipe then you should perform the Actual Empty procedure This is the recommended way to define the empty pipe threshold NOTE NEVER perform this procedure when the pipe is full To perform the Actual MTY Procedure To access the Empty Pipe Set option list press To move the cursor to Actual MTY press Q then ev Empty Pipe IM asd appears on the menu prompt line Empty the pipe completel
35. Vfo There Spanned Absolute are no menu cells provided to span this output Vfab shares the Vfo Volumetric Flow Rate span entries The Vfab minimum span is always zero The maximum span for Vfab is the largest absolute value of either the min or the max flow rate Vfo entries For example a span between 10 GPM and 30 GPM spans the Vfab output from 0 GPM to 30 GPM Vs Vs is the sonic velocity in meters per second m s of the flowing liquid Spanned Liquid The min and max Vs entries establish the Vs span Max Vs m s Sonic Velocity defines 10096 of span The Min Vs m s defines 096 of span Maximum span values represent Minimum span values represent 100 of span 0 of span Current output of 20 mA Current output of 4 mA Voltage output of 10 Vdc Voltage output of 0 Vdc Pulse output of 5000 Hz Pulse output of 0 Hz Max Flow The Max Flow menu cell stores the maximum range for the flow rate output Vfo It can be a positive or negative value Enter the data using the flow rate units you selected This entry also spans the unsigned flow variable Vfab To enter the Max Flow Range Setting To activate numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the maximum flow rate 100 of range To store the data press ent Min Flow The Min Flow menu cell stores the minimum range for the flow rate output Vo It can be a positive or negative value to reflect bi directional flow However the minimum span for
36. a 1010DV flowmeter should be specified Note that the UniMass option will provide value to the extent that the table is accurately prepared for your particular liquid and installed correctly The table scanning routine can function with as few as two completely defined data points If the sensed variable s assume values beyond the table limits the routine does not extrapolate but rather produces flat or clipped data assuming the value of the last valid table entry 2 14 Section 2 1010NFM 3J The table is built by inputting a series of data points two inputs and two outputs each e Input data consists of sonic velocity Vs and temperature e Output data consists of specific gravity S G and viscosity cS at the specified Vs and tem perature Ideally each point contains four empirically derived values However when enough data exists to per mit it the table editing routine interpolates missing values based on prior user entered data The UniMass feature expands the basic utility of the flowmeter by synergistically combining its ability to measure sonic velocity and temperature with user provided data regarding the process liquid or family of liquids The resulting instrument is virtually a liquid analyzer in addition to measuring mass flowrate and automatically compensating for viscosity variation UniMass Table operations are most successfully employed when the application liquids or family of liquids are fairly well
37. as a function of density and temperature can also be performed in a laboratory environment und er conditions of controlled temperature and liquid properties Gasoline and Diesel fuel UniMass input file START 40 1625 0 8838 92 4 20 1579 0 8762 53 0 1533 0 8685 26 20 1487 0 8608 16 40 1441 0 8530 9 7 40 1445 0 7755 1 362 20 1393 0 7658 1 022 0 1341 0 7560 0 83 20 1289 0 7460 0 72 40 1237 0 7360 0 64 END The file must be in the form shown in the example above with a START and END keyword to denote the limits of the data The data does not have to be sorted in any particular order A description of the data can be included at the top of the file since this will be ignored by the 10x10 grid generating pro gram 2 17 Section 2 1010NFM 3J The four comma separated columns within the data should be formatted in the following order and with the units indicated Goums Parameter we Sound Velocity Vs meters second 3 Specific Gravity relative to water 20 C Viscosity kinematic Centistokes Once the input data is properly formatted it can then be processed using the PC based UniMass grid generating program Follow the instructions included with this program to generate the final grid data which can be directly downloaded to the 1010 flowmeter using HyperTerminal Send Text File com mand NOTE To properly download and direct the UniMass table to the appropriate flowm
38. ged transducer applications Extremely water resistant Consult Controlotron before using Long term and permanent couplant for Clamp on transducers Temp range 40 F to 450 F Long chain polymer grease Resists breakdown and thin ning at high temperatures Long term and permanent couplant for Clamp On transducers Temp range 40 F to 250 F Two part room temperature cure adhesive Temporary and long term couplant for all flow transducer types Temp range 40 F to 375 F High viscosity silicone grease Water resistant Adhesive backed Dry Damping couplant for all flow transducer types Viscoelastic polymer sheet Water resistant Notice Siemens holds US Patent Number 4 929 368 on the CC 122 Coupling Compound and all compounds of this type Its use is restricted to Siemens products only unless a special license has been obtained Licenses for use with other products are available through the Siemens Sales Department 5 9 Section 5 1010NFM 3J SYSTEM 1010 REYNOLDS COMPENSATION FACTOR Reynolds Positive Comp Negative Comp 0 0 7808 0 7808 1277 0 7869 0 7869 1566 0 7930 0 7930 1694 0 7991 0 7991 1830 0 8052 0 8052 1930 0 8113 0 8113 1986 0 8174 0 8174 2044 0 8234 0 8234 2104 0 8295 0 8295 2166 0 8356 0 8356 2227 0 8417 0 8417 2287 0 847
39. switch to the enable position before proceeding further If necessary see Drawings 1010N 7 1010DN 7 or 1010MN 7 for location details POWER IN DATA CONTROL CABLES lt 1010N PERMANENT CLAMP ON SYSTEM TYPICAL SYSTEM NE P e e p ERE RA na CHANNEL 3 TRANSDUCERS AND FRAMES CHANNEL 2 TRANSDUCERS AND FRAMES CHANNEL 4 TRANSDUCERS AND FRAMES 1 2 Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 5 THE 1010N KEYPAD The 1010N integral keypad provides 32 numeric and function keys see table below Use these keys to enter review or edit the site data Certain keys control the graphics display Datalogger and Totalizer Blind Models having no keypad or display must be setup by using their serial data port see Appen dix B KEYPAD FUNCTION CHART USAGE MENU Press to activate the Installation Menu ENT Press ENT to store numeric data select from option lists etc LEFT RIGHT ARROWS Menu navigation keys move cursor in respective directions UP DOWN ARROWS Same as Left and Right Also scrolls option list and graphic display screen CLR Clear Key for erasing data or selecting list options NUMBERS 0 9 Use to type numeric data DECIMAL POINT Use for decimal points in numeric data MATH OPERATORS Allows 4 function math operations in numeric entry cells F KEYS 1 3 Totalizer control and special function keys F4 KEY CAUTION SYSTEM RESET KEY during power up C
40. 1010NFM 3J Detection Mode System 1010 flowmeters Version 3 or higher are equipped with a Test Facilities Graph Screen The following paragraphs explain how the Test Facilities Graph Screen is used for troubleshooting System 1010 flowmeters The Test Facilities Graph Screen NOTE The following is intended for 1010 VFMT systems with Graphic Displays only For VFMT capable 1010X systems with or without digital displays or 1010N blind systems the digital receive signal can only be viewed as a text dump over the RS 232 output i e by pressing the F1 key and then the period key lt gt Access to the digital damping parameters can be found in the Site Setup menu cell of the Diagnostic Data menu Refer to the appropriate System 1010 field manual for details When operating in the transit time mode the Test Facilities Graph Screen is an exceptional diagnostic tool for troubleshooting problem applications or simply determining receive signal quality The primary function of this screen is the display of the digitized receive signal waveform with similar appearance and function of a digital oscilloscope This screen also allows the user to override some of the 1010 default settings by permitting adjustment to the measured transit time the digital averaging and the zero crossover used in the measurement of the up down transit time difference The figure shown below is a representation of the 1010 diagnostic graph NOTE The Test Facili
41. 2 50 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Valc and Vaer use the span settings from the Data Span Set Cal menu The following data Items are available for the Stripchart Display VIO sodes aereis spanned flow default Viabrea spanned unsigned flow magnitude VIS iubeo apis viscosity TOImpixensdeniseonitisisas temperature AE memo sonic velocity MR crm signal amplitude LEM gt aeration cavitation UE C t spanned unsigned flow magnitude To select a data item for the stripchart To access the Select Data option list press eS Move the cursor to the desired item by pressing To store your selection press ev 2 8 2 DATA DISPLAY The Data Display option list allows you to select a format for the stripchart plot It offers the choice of displaying data either in the current data rate units or as a percent of span defined in the Data Span Set Cal menu Data Rate Units is the default selection To select a format for the data display To access the Data Display option list press To move the cursor to the required scale unit press DID To store your selection press NT 2 8 3 TIME BASE The Time Base option list defines the stripchart x axis display interval The stripchart plots an average of readings obtained during the elapsed time between reports Stripchart resolution is 1 data point per pixel of which there are approximately 100 on the short strip chart plot and approximately 200
42. 2 67 Liguid Data Menu elis coeno erates Ete Rap tune a 2 67 The Site Setup Data Menu uocis er ino Ipae E Bac san iux tata ub uexpa aec Ee pacc puns 2 68 Site Setup Menu MENS otii abet bat ERR RE ERR cusaaniendencestetaateinehusucedany 2 68 Introduction HF Menu FBITIL eoo tcn ertt a 2 69 Using the HF Menu ltem eseuseeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeenenn 2 69 Manual Adjustment Procedure uiu sienten tun rtt eene centre e 2 70 Automatic Adjustment Procedure erret eterne 2 71 Th Test Facilities Menu iuuiisieisass innatis sni iri endxkieR aab FO Un raa Sei aad a s 2 72 Test Facilities Commands sicisscccissicccteescencevsseceasnsvarcdinesceseemeanecmens sastae 2 72 Makeup ee E P E a 2 72 Biel 2 73 The Test Facilities Graph Screen uei oie tr e n etait pet eros 2 73 Entering The Diagnostic Graph Screen ssssssssesse 2 74 Diagnostic TEXEBISDISV sssini Dri Ry d m ies oid end E ica iion iR ree Bue 2 74 TIME Base CONG P 2 74 C related ur er Em 2 74 Command Modes oscura attire S YU FUR Re rane lp Feu huie Ks 2 75 Digital Damping Control Hot Key 1 and 2 sssss 2 75 IV Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J 2 11 7 2 11 8 211 9 2 11 18 2 12 2 12 1 2 12 2 Section 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 3 1 7 3 1 8 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 32
43. 8 USING 1012T MOUNTING TRACKS The 1012TP and 1012THP Mounting Tracks provide a rigid mounting platform for Series 1011 universal or high precision size A or B transducers The mounting tracks service pipe sizes up to a maximum of 5 00 140 mm outer diameter Operating temperatures are supported up to 250 F 121 C The assembly consists of lightweight aluminum track rails with integral transducer clamping screws Attached index pins enable positive locating of the transducers at fixed spacing locations Roller chains and tension screws secure the assembly to the pipe The following instructions refer to 1011 universal transducers Please refer to Engineering Drawing 1012TP 7 for reflect mounting of high precision transducers and 1012THP 7 for direct mounting of high precision transducers The 1012T mounting tracks support both Direct and Reflect mounting modes The flow computer recommends the appropriate transducers mounting track and mounting mode based on the pipe data entries Refer to the instructions in paragraph 2 4 for details on the Transducer Installation proce dure If necessary review paragraphs 3 1 2 through 3 1 4 for details on how to select and prepare a mounting location on your pipe Installing a 1012T Mounting Track in Reflect Mode Paragraph 2 4 describes the Transducer Installation procedures that lead up to the automatic selection of transducers mounting mode and spacing method Examine the figure below which shows a ty
44. F S Linear fluid flow velocity in f s or m s depending on preferred units Total This is a real time updated flow total display in current total units e g KGAL Vs m s Current liquid sonic velocity Vs in m s The Vs value depends on the liquid and its temperature This menu cell allows fine tuning when highlighted Press the key coarse adjustment or the 1 key fine adjustment to increase the reading or the key coarse adjustment or the 2 key fine adjustment to decrease the reading CAUTION Incorrect usage will result in reduced accuracy Signal mV Xdcr signal strength in mV This is the amplitude of the transittime receive signals Improper coupling attenuative liquid or pipe could cause a low value Valc 96 Input Amplifier gain indication Larger 96 indicates a stronger liquid signal Vaer 96 This shows the current percent of aeration detected by the meter Alarm Status This letter code field shows the status of the meter s built in alarms A dash indicates an inactive alarm Letter codes reflect the following alarm conditions S Transducer Spacing Warning E Empty Alarm R Flow Rate Alarm High or Low rate threshold exceeded F Fault Alarm A Aeration Alarm M Memory Activated Fault Suppressed K Makeup Flag May be Latched Interface Alarm P Pig Alarm option Z ZeroMatic alarm Flow Rate Simulator for calibrating external devic
45. JE Procedure to clear Active Memory only Turn off power if it is currently on Press F4 and keep it pressed while you turn on power The prompt Clr Active Memory No appears at the top of the screen Press Right Arrow to access F4 Reset option list Press Down Arrow to switch the option list to Clr Active Memory Yes Press lt ENT gt to clear all Active Site Data but not saved Site Setups To restore operation press MENU to access the installation menu Create a new site setup or recall a stored site setup Re select any Meter Facilities items e g RS 232 setup parameters Procedure to clear ALL Dynamic Memory Turn off power if it is currently on Press Fa and keep it pressed while you turn on power The prompt Clr Active Memory No appears at the top of the screen Press D Note that the prompt switches to Clr Saved Data No To access the F4 Reset option list press el Press T to switch the option list to Clr Saved Data Yes CAUTION Before proceeding further it is essential to understand that this function elimi nates ALL data stored in RAM This means that all saved site setups including the site data of a flow calibrated site will be erased In addition the entire Data logger file plus any custom factory or user created pipe or transducer tables Will be eliminated The impact of this is such that we strongly recommend that you consult technical service before continuing
46. Kc Calibration 2 48 Multipoint Calibration 2 48 Cavitation 6 3 Channel 1 2 1 9 Channel 1 2 1 9 Channel Setup 1 12 6 4 Channel Setup Menu 2 2 Channel Setup Menu Structure 2 2 Character Entry Field 1 8 Choosing Pipe Class 2 8 4 2 Choosing Pipe Name 2 9 4 2 Circular Memory 4 7 Circular Memory Mode 4 7 Clamp on Menu 5 14 Clamp on Operation 1 1 6 4 Clamp on Transducer Mounting Modes 3 2 Direct Reflect 3 2 3 3 Selecting Location 3 1 Vertical Mounting 3 2 Clamp on Transit time 1 9 Clearing Active Memory Only 2 79 Clearing All Dynamic Memory 2 79 Clearing Datalogger 4 8 Clock Set Menu 4 12 Setting Date 4 13 Setting Time 4 13 Connectors see Appendix B Conventions Field Manual 2 1 Couplant see Sonic Couplant CPVC Flow Tube 6 9 Specifications 6 9 Create Edit Pipe Function 4 3 Create Name a Site Setup 1 12 New Site Setup 2 4 Create Name Site Command 1 12 Critical Applications Flow Tube Mounting 6 3 Cross flow 1 10 Current Output Trim lo1 amp lo2 4 9 Calibration 4 9 Custody Transfer 2 22 Custom Pipe Data 2 8 D Damping Control 2 35 Data Output Filter Types 2 35 SmartSlew 2 35 Time Average 2 35 Datalogger 1 3 Control 5 13 Data 2 54 Data Option 1 7 Index 2 Index 1010NFM 3J Events 2 55 Memory 5 7 Setup 5 15 Mode 2 54 Datalogger Control Menu 4 6 Datalogger Setup Menu 2 52 Menu Structure 2 53 Data Application 2 10 Data Pipe Entry 2 7 Data Bits 4 14 Setting The Data Word Length 4 14 Data Scatte
47. Max Viscosity cS 2 45 Max Vs m s 2 45 Measured Vs 2 28 Incorrect Value 2 85 To Accept To Edit 2 29 Measurement Channel 2 3 6 4 Enable Disable 2 3 Memory Control 5 13 Memory Control Menu 4 8 Memory Delay Sec 2 36 Specify 2 36 Memory Full Message 5 7 Memory Map 4 8 Memory Resources 5 6 ROM RAM 5 6 Memory Fault Set 2 36 Menu Screen Typical 1 3 Meter Facilities 1 5 Default Units 4 1 Meter Facilities Functions 4 1 Meter Facilities Menu 4 1 5 13 Meter Resources 1 10 Meter Type 1 5 Meter Type Menu 1 8 5 13 Min Flow 2 44 Range Setting 2 44 Min S G 2 45 Min Temperature 2 45 Min Viscosity cS 2 45 Min Vs m s 2 45 Model 1010AN 6 1 Model 1010FTN 6 1 Index 6 Index 1010NFM 3J Mounting Transducers 3 1 Identifying 1011 Transducers and Mounting Hardware 3 1 Underwater Mounting 3 1 Mounting Transducers Reflexor 7 2 7 3 Mounting Bracket Flow Tube 6 11 Mounting Track 2 21 3 11 Part Number Spacing Index 2 21 2 24 MTY Command Actual 2 29 MTYmatic Command 2 30 Multi Channel Meter Type 1 10 Multi Path Installation 1 10 Multi Path Operation 1 10 Multi Path Sites 1 10 Multiple Select Option Lists 1 7 Mylar Spacing Guide 3 7 Wrapping Guide Around Pipe 3 9 N Network ID 4 15 Assigning ID Number 4 15 RST Key Time 4 15 NEGFLOW 2 36 2 42 NEMA Flowmeters 1 1 6 3 NETFLOW 2 36 2 42 Non axial 1 10 New Site Setup Creating 1 12 Nuclear Power Applications 2 22 Number Index Menu Cell 2 25 Number Index 3 4 Numeric En
48. Messages 2 58 2 78 FFT Spectra Graphic Screen 7 5 Flow Calibration Effects of Pipe Material Selection 2 9 Flow Conditions 5 4 Flow Rates 5 4 Low Flow Rates Flow Data Scatter Data Damping 5 4 Selecting 6 2 Flow Data Menu 2 64 AnCal HiFlow LoFlow Vs m s 2 66 Flow Data Scatter and Damping 6 3 Flow Display 4 18 Flow Display Range 2 40 Autorange Default High Range 2 40 Flow Display Scale 2 40 Flow Profile Best 6 2 Flow Time Units 2 39 Selecting Time Units 2 39 Flow Tube 1 1 See also Section 6 Flow Tube Installation Parameters 6 4 Flow Tube Material Size and Flow Range Ratings 6 2 Flow Tube Mounting 6 2 Flow Tube Operation 6 4 Setup 6 4 Flow Tube Pressure and Temperature Ratings 6 2 Flow Tubes 6 1 Installing 6 1 Selecting Pressure And Temperature 6 2 Flow Velocity Range 5 2 Flow Volume Units 2 39 Selecting Volumetric or Mass 2 39 Flow Total Units 5 15 Flow Total Units Menu 2 36 Flowmeter Installation Steps 1 1 1 14 Full Site Setup 1 4 Four function Calculator 1 7 Force Transmit 2 27 Function Keys 1 3 G Getting Started 2 1 2 85 Graphs signal Ideal 2 89 Poor 2 88 Graphic Display Screens 4 1 4 16 Index 4 Index 1010NFM 3J H HF Menu Item 2 69 Automatic Adjustment Procedure 2 71 Manual Adjustment Procedure 2 70 Hardware Installation Guide 3 1 Hazardous Applications 1 1 High Limit Cursor 7 6 High S G 2 46 High Viscosity cS 2 46 High Temperature 2 46 How To Recall A Site Setup 2 2 How To Use Spectr
49. Mode Spacing Offset Number Index 1011 Universal B3 Reflect Minimum 7 Track 1012TP ReversaMatic ZeroMatic Auto Zero Actual Zero ZeroClr Spacing Method Ltn Value in Install Completed Empty Pipe Set Zero Flow Adjust Pick Install Xdcr Select the ZeroMatic menu cell by pressing De da then press e Siemens 2 Channel ZeroMatic Active Transducer Model Transducer Size Xdcr Mount Mode Spacing Offset Number Index Spacing Method Ltn Value in Install Completed 1011 Universal B3 Reflect Minimum 7 Track 1012TP 0 778 Yes Empty Pipe Set Channel Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust ZeroMatic Pick Install Xdcr When the initial makeup of ZeroMatic is complete the screen will return to the Pick Install Xdcr menu and automatically highlight Operation Adjust which is the next menu cell 2 33 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel SITE 1 Conforms operation to user Preferences Channel Path Setup Pipe Data Application Data Pick Install Xdcr Operation Adjust Flow Total Units Data Span Set Cal Stripchart Setup Datalogger Setup I O Data Control Diagnostic Data Dual Channel Flow To disable the ZeroMatic function Select the Pick Install Xdcr menu cell from the Dual Channel Flow menu Scroll down to the Zero Flow Adjust menu cell by pressing DIT NOTE The highlighted ZeroMatic menu item is the only indication that ZeroMatic is function
50. No Sites Channel Enable No Site Security Off Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site Channel Setup Press and hola KD Notice that the capitalized alphabet list begins to scroll downward through the alphabet from S Stop scrolling at letter I Press to move the block cursor to the third character position Scroll back up to letter T Move the cursor to the fourth character position Scroll down to letter E Move the cursor to the fifth character position Type 1 on the numeric keypad to complete the site name Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Right Arrow amp Enter Creates a new Site Recall Site Setup No Sites Channel Enable No Site Security ff Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site Channel Setup Press er to create the site setup named SITE1 Note that the name now appears in the Save Rename Site menu cell and on the upper right corner of the graphic screen 1 13 Section 1 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel 1 SITE1 Use with Care Turn Security On or Off Recall Site Setup Channel Enable Create Name Site Site Security Delete Site Setup Save Rename Site No Sites Channel Setup Flowmeter Installation Flowchart Flowmeter Installation l Collect Site Data Choose Mounting Location For Flowmeter and Transducers Prepare Pipe Surface Access Installation Menu Create a S
51. Norm Entry Header Inlet Intrusions Anomaly Diams xxxx numeric entry Must recognize degrees C degrees F selection Vs SG and Viscosity must be greater than 0 0 Enable permitted only after table contains at least two entries of correctly formatted data Pipe Configuration Default NOTE The currently active table will be shown highlighted next to the UniMass Table menu cell If no table is active then Disable will appear highlighted next to the UniMass Table menu cell NOTE The Changing Temp amp Vs lookup table must be serially loaded using the HyperTermi nal Send Text command This table can be generated using a utility provided by Controlotron which converts the Vs and temperature data into a uniform 10x10 grid array and formats it appropriately for serial download 2 12 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 3 1 HOW TO SELECT A LIQUID CLASS The liquids listed in the Liquid Class option list are representative samples of the class of liquids to which they belong Selecting a named liquid fills in the Estimated Vs m s Viscosity cS and Density SG parameters automatically However you have the option of editing these parameters individually to fine tune the liquid settings If you do not find a liquid that matches your application then you can select Other This selection will not provide a liquid name or automatic parameter entry Only Ethyl ene Glycol 20 amp 50 CaCl Brine 27 and all wa
52. Odd 7 settings To Clear Active Memory Using the RS 232 Interface 1 Turn off power if it is currently on Turn power on As soon as you apply power immediately type the character three times The prompt KedIi Ye 7 3 3 0 8 VI cell appears at the top of the screen 2 Press the Right Arrow and then the Down Arrow to switch the option list to iei Yen a us A 3 Press ENT to clear all Active Site Data but not saved site setups 3 To restore operation press MENU to access the Installation Menu Create a new site setup or recall a stored site setup Re select any Meter Facilities items e g RS 232 setup parameters To Clear All Dynamic Memory Using the RS 232 Interface CAUTION Before proceeding further it is essential to understand that this function eliminates all data stored in RAM This means that all saved site setups including the site data of a flow calibrated site will be erased Also the entire Datalogger file plus any custom factory or user created pipe or transducer tables will be eliminated The impact of this is such that we strongly recommend that you consult our technical service department before continuing with this procedure If you choose to con tinue be aware that you will have to create a new site setup re enter all site specific parameters including pipe or transducer tables plus all desired Meter Facilities entries 1 Turn off power if it is currently on 2 Turn the pow
53. SGP 20CS XS 20P XS 125A SGP 24CS STD 24P STD 150A SGP 24CS XS 24P XS 175A SGP 30CS STD 30P STD 200A SGP 30CS XS 30P XS 225A SGP 36CS STD 36P STD 250A SGP 36CS XS 36P XS 300A SGP C Cast Iron Table Copper Tube Table 350A SGP f 6 cls C 1 type M 400A SGP 10 cls C 1 type K 450A SGP 12 cls C 1 type L 500A SGP 16 cls C 2 type M 20 cls C 2 type K Ductile Iron Table 2 type L 6 cls 52 4 type M 8 cls 52 4 type K 10 cls 52 4 type L 12 cls 56 6 type M 16 cls 52 6 type K 24 cls 52 6 type L Outer Diameter in X Xxx numeric entry Wall Thickness X Xxx numeric entry Liner Material None Cement Coal Tar Enamel 2 Glass Plastic HDPE Teflon Rubber Liner Thickness X Xxx numeric entry Delete Pipe C Choose Pipe Class See Create Edit Pipe Choose Pipe Name See Create Edit Pipe 4 2 2 CREATE EDIT PIPE The Pipe Table provides the primary data that the system uses to operate with different classes of pipes This menu allows you to edit the pipe table by modifying any existing pipe or add an entirely new pipe An example of how to use the Create Edit Function To access the Create Edit menu press To access the Pipe Class option list press 4 3 Section 4 1010NFM 3J Scroll the option list to a class that provides the closest match to your pipe press DID To select the Pipe Class press e This moves the highlight to Choose Pipe Name
54. Size Xdcr Mount Mode Spacing Offset Number Index Spacing Method Ltn Value Install Completed Empty Pipe Set Zero Flow Adjust 1010NFM 3J C Operation Adjust Damping Control og Time Average SmartSlew Deadband Control e x xx numeric entry Memory Fault Set Fault Memory Memory Delay sec xxx numeric entry Zero Fault Set e c e o Fault Zero cC Flow Total Units Ot Flow Volume Units Flow Time Units Flow Display Range Flow Display Scale Total Volume Units Totalizer Scale Total Resolution Totalizer Mode Batch Sample Total c Data Span Set Cal C Span Data Max Flow Units Min Flow Units Max Vs m s Min Vs m s Max S G Min S G Max Viscosity cS Min Viscosity cS Max Temperature Min Temperature c Set Alarm Levels High Flow Units Low Flow Units High S G Low S G High Viscosity cS Low Viscosity cS High Temperature Low Temperature continued Section 5 THE CLAMP ON MENU continued gt Clamp On C Data Span Set Cal C Set Alarm Levels 1010NFM 3J cs Interface Vs m s Aeration 96 Makeup Latch Calibrate Flow Rate Intrinsic Kc MultiPoint gt g C Stripchart Setup cC Select Data Data Display Time Base Stripchart Clear c Application Data c Datalogger Setup Datalogger Mode Datalogger Data Log Time
55. Teflon PFA or CPVC Flow Tube please start the thread carefully to avoid cross threading Hand tighten only If necessary use Teflon tape manufac tured for plastic piping to effect a leak proof seal see Appendix C Engineering Drawings for de Whenever possible use the mounting brackets to support the weight of the flow tube Consult the supplied engineering drawing for important dimensional data 1011FT Series 316 Stainless Steel Flow Tube INLET Use Swagelok OUTLET Tube Fitting Use Swagelok Tube Fitting Flow Direction Mounting Indicator Bracket 6 11 Section 6 1010NFM 3J 992DFT Series CPVC or Kynar PDFA Flow Tube Flow Direction Inlet Mounting Indicator FPT Bracket Outlet FPT 9 O O SIEMENS PB a now l E v MC L3 e 3 Model Identification Calibration factor valid for indicated flow direction only 992DFT Series Teflon PEA Flow Tube Flow Direction ieee Indicator Flaretek Tube Fitting Use Flaretek 7 1 Tube Fitting ee 3 Pj g pem ge 31 2 h Pa SIEMENS Ek Cy LVM 3l O Mounting Bracket Calibration factor valid for indicated
56. The following information is intended to be used with the I O Data Control and Span Data sections and Analog Output Trim Menu in the field manual The System 1010 flowmeter provides an Analog Output Setup menu see below that allows the user to assign data functions for these output signals refer to Analog Output Setup in the appropriate 1010 field manual In addition refer to Installation Drawings 1010N 2 7 and 1010N 7 7 in the field manual appendices for additional connection information and terminal block numerical designators NOTE All meters in the System 1010N and DN product family can accept the Expanded I O Module Option except 4 Channel meters Use this menu to Siemens Dual Path SITE1 assign data functions gt SSE COM EROT STIL to analog outputs Relay Setup Analog Input Setup I O Data Control EXPANDED I O MODULE OPTION The Expanded I O Module Option provides expanded lo analog outputs It is implemented through the use of a 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module occupying the same position as the 1010N 2 I O Module This option allows users to drive up to four additional 4 20mA loop powered instrumentation outputs Note that the meter menu does not indicate that these supplementary outputs are present and available The outputs in addition to being loop powered are isolated from one another as well as the meter Expanded I O Module Option Identification To verify that your meter has the Expanded I O Module Opt
57. The Analog Input Setup function assigns an active analog input to a measurement channel path The meter provides four DC current input ports for single and Dual Channel units The DC current input ranges from a zero level of 4 mA to a full scale of 20 mA The Analog Input Setup menu cell allows you to enable this port and then span it to any desired scaling For example when using the analog input viscosity function the numeric variables might be spanned as follows 4mA 1 water and 20mA 100 more viscous liquid This spanning configuration allows the meter to use this constant numerical change to improve calibration in real time The various flow meter models allow you to associate the analog input to active system variables such as specific gravity viscosity and others see table on next page 2 61 Section 2 1010NFM 3J NOTE Refer to the Installation Drawings or I O Module markings for the locations of these inputs and wiring procedures I O Data Control gt Analog Inp Setup gt 4mA numeric entry 20 mA numeric entry lin2 lin3 lin4 See lin1 option list Note that the flowmeter recognizes the first analog input variable that is assigned to any given param eter and ignores any subsequent input with the same assignment For example if lin1 and lin2 are both assigned to represent Temperature Deg F the meter will only use the temperature input from lin1 Setting up the Analog Current Input The fir
58. To access the Pipe Name option list press 3 Scroll the option list press CDD a pipe name and press e to select it This loads Outer Diameter and Wall thickness for the Selected Pipe The highlight moves to Outer Diameter Press fe or enable numeric entry Type the actual pipe OD using the appropriate English or metric units Press Enr to store the OD The highlight moves to Wall Thickness Press to enable numeric entry Type the actual wall thickness using the appropriate English or metric units Press er to store the wall thickness Select a Liner Material and enter its thickness if required Press to leave the Create Edit Pipe menu This triggers the Save Pipe pop up Window Note that the second line lists the name of the selected pipe Press ze then press eur to use this name To use a new name presse and then use the appropriate arrow keys to rename the pipe 8 chars Max Press enr This adds the new pipe to the pipe class 4 2 3 DELETE PIPE This menu allows you to remove any of the pre loaded pipes within a class from a pipe table We recommend that you use this function only to delete pipes that you have added so as to preserve the factory presets To delete a Pipe from the Pipe Table 4 3 To access the Delete Pipe menu press To access the Pipe Class option list press Scroll the option list press OWE the class that contains the pipe to be deleted To select the Pipe Class press jer Thi
59. available Pipe Size selections All other Pipe Classes e g ASA Carbon Steel listed can be selected in the same manner 2 7 Section 2 1010NFM 3J THE PIPE DATA MENU STRUCTURE continued Pipe Data cont Pipe Material c f Steel ABS Aluminum Black Iron Brass Cast Iron CuNi 70 50 CuNi 90 10 Copper Ductile Iron FRP Glass Hastelloy Inconel Nickel Polyethylene PVC Plastic Silicone Teflon Titanium Wall Thickness c X Xxx numeric entry Liner Material ce None Cement Coal Tar Enamel f Glass Plastic HDPE Teflon Rubber Liner Thickness gt X Xxx numeric entry 2 2 1 HOW TO SELECT A PIPE CLASS The 1010N pipe tables are arranged by classes of common type and material The default selection is Manual Entry As its name infers you would use this selection to manually enter individual pipe pa rameters To select a Pipe Class To access the Pipe Class option list press To scroll through the available classes press DIA To select the class that fits your application press e When you pick a Pipe Class the Select Pipe Size menu cell see below presents the pipe size option list associated with the selected class By using the pipe class and pipe size option lists you automati cally load all the required pipe information You can also select a pipe class size then edit any of the associated defaults to fine tune the pipe data NOTE Create custom pipe data via the
60. by pressing the Right Arrow to access the menu cell entry field and then pressing ENT This creates a nameless Site Setup However if you intend to use the meter s multi site storage facility you must enter a unique site name for each site setup you want to retain in site storage memory To Create and Name a new Site Setup To access the first character position press To select a character press Dire to highlight to next character position To select the second character press DID Repeat this process to select all the characters 8 max you want to use to identify the new Site Setup To create the new Site Setup press enr NOTE If you decide to use numbers in the site name you can type these characters directly from the keypad 2 1 4 HOW TO ENABLE DISABLE SITE SECURITY With Site Security enabled the meter will require a password before it allows any activity that could interrupt or affect system operation You can still access the Installation Menu However Site Security limits access to the viewing of parameters only In other words you will still be able to review site data but you will not be able to make any changes Activate Site Security with care Once activated the only way to deactivate it is via the Site Security Off command However the cursor will not move to the Site Security option list until you enter the correct password Therefore it is essential that you never forget or mispla
61. command then press the lt gt key until the noise is no longer present in the receive waveform Press 0 to exit this command DESCRIPTION OF GRAPH SCREEN TEXT DISPLAY PARAMETERS Parameters Menu List item D Flow Measured flow rate in selected flow units Vs m s Sound Velocity in meters per second Display Metrics Represents the digital sample position of the receive window Correlated Plot Displays the receive waveform in its proper superposition or registra tion The true delta time will be displayed by NOT selecting Corre lated Plot Centroid Mark Indicates with a large vertical marker the peak energy of the receive waveform Damping Displays the minimum and maximum digital damping exponent along with the active damping exponent Tn usec Receive signal transit time in microseconds Delta T nsec Transit time delta difference in nanoseconds Signal Strength Displays Valc amplitude Vaer aeration factor and numeric ALC Signal to Noise Ratio Indicates the signal to noise ratio of the receive signal Increased damping will increase the S N ratio as the asynchronous noise re duces Envelope Signature Percentage change of the signal from Initial Makeup conditions HOT KEY SUMMARY Key lt gt Expands magnifies waveform to view more detail lt gt Contracts waveform to view more or the waveform lt Left Arrow gt Shifts receive window to the left waveform
62. controlled Basic table data can be obtained by a variety of means e From handbooks of physical or chemical data e Directly measured in the laboratory using your 1010 its RTD temperature sensor and a non flowing measurement cell standpipe e After installation on the process pipe if specific gravity and or viscosity data regarding the liquid can be locally obtained via samples or from on line instrumentation Although the UniMass Table is designed to permit both temperature and sonic velocity to be active input variables UniMass provides Constant Vs and Constant Temp table editing capabilities as well The resulting lookup function then associates specific gravity and or viscosity with either temperature or sonic velocity only APPLICATION DATA MENU EXPLANATIONS FOR UniMass TABLE The UniMass Table resides within the Application Data menu however in Flow Tube FT instruments it resides within the Liquid Data menu UniMass Table Press the Right Arrow to access the UniMass data point editor Disable Press the Right Arrow to access tables and enable UniMass routine The currently active table will be shown highlighted next to the UniMass Table menu cell If no table is active then Disable will appear highlighted next to the UniMass Table menu cell Constant Temp Press the Right Arrow to access The Constant Temp UniMass Table can be used for multiple liquid applications with tightly controlled cons
63. cursor to the second position Controlotron Dual Path Channel 1 Right Arrow amp Enter Creates a new Site Recall Site Setup Channel Enable No Site Security Off Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site Channel Path Setup Use the lt Right and Left Arrows gt to move through the character positions If you wish touse numbers in your string you can type them directly from the keypad After you finish selecting your string press lt ENT gt to register it 1 7 3 THE METER TYPE MENU This is the first list presented upon entering the Installation Menu Select the type of meter required for your application The meter automatically conditions Installation Menu choices to suit the selected meter type The following paragraphs introduce the available meter types for dual channel systems NOTE On Single Channel systems you do not get a choice of meter types sincethis requires two independent measurement channels However you can operate the single chan nel with any optionally supplied measurement technology Some four channel models provide four path and channel summing operation 1 8 Section 1 1010NFM 3J Dual Channel Dual Channel provides two independent measurement channels that operate simultaneously De pending on the specific model Dual Channel supports Clamp on Transit time In line Transit time Reflexor Channel 1 I Ll Flow Pipe A Flow Rate PIPE A
64. damage to equipment accessories or components caused by such removal or reinstallation This Warranty does not apply to any equipment or part thereof which in the opinion of the Company has been damaged through alteration improper installation mishandling misuse neglect lightning strike or other accidents THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY S LIABILITY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT PROVIDED ABOVE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COMPANY S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR THE PRODUCT This Warranty is in lieu of all other express warranties or liabilities ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR USE ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED IN NO CASE SHALLTHE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHATSOEVER No person or representative is authorized to assume for the Company any liability other than expressed herein in connection with the sale of this equipment SIEMENS FIELD MANUAL IMPORTANT NOTICE Controlotron is now part of Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc Process Instrumentation Business Unit PI BU CoC Ultrasonic Flow SITRANS FUS 1010N NEMA 4X CLAMP ON MULTI FUNCTION FLOWMETER FoR ATTENTION This equipment contains components that are susceptible to electrostatic discharge ESD Please observe ESD control measures during the handling and connection proce
65. enough to exceed the relay output s 5 Hz rate If this occurs the meter will store excess pulses in an overflow buffer and route them back to the relay when the flow rate drops enough to allow the TOTCNT output to catch up Exceeding the 5 Hz rate for long periods could cause an excessive accumulation of buffered pulses and continue to trip the relay after the flow rate lessens or even stops If this occurs the meter will be unable to indicate the current flow total Therefore select a resolution to ensure that even at the maximum expected flow rate the TOTCNT pulse will not be activated more than 5 times per second for any appreciable length of time Note that resetting the Totalizer also clears the overflow buffer To change the default resolution To access the Total Resolution option list press Move the cursor to the required resolution by pressing DI To store selection press e 2 41 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 6 8 TOTALIZER MODE The Totalizer function operates in any of the modes listed below MODE FLOW DIRECTION NOTES POSFLOW positive flow Accumulates flow in positive direction only NEGFLOW negative flow Accumulates flow in reverse direction only NETFLOW positive or negative Adds to positive total subtracts from reverse total NETFLOW default is best for applications where there may be zero flow for long periods It mini mizes false Totalizer register increments due to data scatter Pre
66. flow direction only Model Identification 6 12 Section 7 1010NFM 3J 7 THE SYSTEM 1010 REFLEXOR FLOWMETER Reflexor is one of the operating modes available on certain 1010 models The Reflexor operating mode utilizes Doppler flow detection along with digital signal processing techniques to successfully measure flow under conditions that may not be suitable for transit time flow measurement The Reflexor samples the flow stream as it detects Doppler shift It converts the Doppler shift information by use of Fast Fourier Transform FFT and filters the FFT to determine the flow rate The Reflexor mode will operate with many of the same transducers that are used with transit time flow measurement along with those which are specifically designed for Doppler flow measurement Use of any other transducer than shown in these instructions may result in failure to measure or give an incorrect flow rate indication 7 1 REFLEXOR INSTALLATION STEPS The typical steps to complete the installation procedure are as follows Collect the site data pipe and liquid data part numbers etc Choose a mounting location for the flow transducers Prepare the pipe for transducer s mounting Access the Installation Menu and create a site Enter the pipe parameters Mount flow transducers on pipe and connect to flow meter Invoke the transducer installation procedure Optimize installation through use of the Spectra Display and diagnostic data Pleas
67. flow conditions and proper installation to achieve precise critical flow measurements Unfavorable factors such as liquid non homogeneity or stratification and aeration cavitation increase the possibility of reduced accuracy This applies to all flowmeters regardless of their design sophistication expense and published intrinsic accuracy These factors become critical when applications involve custody transfer tenant billing and nuclear or other safety related flows System 1010 flowmeters automatically compensates for adverse flow conditions to achieve extremely high accuracy This requires following the instructions for proper equipment selection use of the cor rect clamp on transducer or flow tube configuration and paying close attention to installation instruc tions Such judicious use implies expert equipment knowledge and experience plus a thorough under standing of flow conditions If your application requires critical measurement accuracy it is not realistic to simply install the flow meter and expect optimum performance Carefully review your piping configuration select the best mounting location and install the transducers or flow tube in strict accordance with the published in structions Even when the system is calibrated for enhanced precision at a flow laboratory this does not relieve you of the responsibility of adhering to the programming instructions and installation require ments We recommend that all potential install
68. ge c 2 36 Memory Delay sec enne nnne nennen 2 36 Reflexor Zero Fault Set Option Reflexor Mode only 2 36 The Flow Total Units Menu cnini nnn nenne kuxaS Euren 2 37 POSFLOW ME 2 37 NEGFEOW 2 37 Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 6 3 2 6 4 2 6 5 2 6 6 207 2 6 8 2 6 9 Eu 2 7 1 2 7 2 2 7 3 2 8 2 8 1 2 8 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 2 9 D cap re c a e e era E Ra a E A r 2 37 Totalizer COMO p 2 37 The Flow Total Units Menu Structure eoii trt terne 2 38 Flow Volume UMS iacens ouis seo Rn Cua PurauxAM a KRAE KENN NR UEEZRERKRiMUAE RRASA aaia 2 38 sl Mime rtc 2 39 Flow Display Range tni nien the ne nuo kv aS veerexcnessaancneeemaeeweces 2 40 Flow Display Scale mee ww w CoPR 2 40 SB UNITS 2 40 e lridEes le D 2 41 Total RESON m ENEA 2 41 TOt liZer Mode e M 2 42 Batch Sample Total nores rentur nnne an inan n cau unnnkERAD aec ERR naEERES 2 42 The Data Span Set Cal Mn unco ran e ru atraer nu nsa chacune ena nusn E causas 2 42 The Data Span Set Cal Menu Structure seesesss 2 43 rigor cm e nee 2 43 Mirage
69. how to create a new Site Setup This menu cell provides a list of saved site names Scrolling to a site name and pressing lt ENT gt moves all the parameters associated with that name into Active Memory If there are no site setups present in site storage memory the menu cell reports No Sites in the right hand column Saving a site setup with a site name adds the name to this option list The first selection 2 2 Section 2 1010NFM 3J on the list is the currently active Site Setup The system will be ready for operation after you install the transducers and make the required hardware connections Note that the installed transducers must comply with the recalled site parameters To recall a Saved Site Setup Where a visual of the keys is shown this means press this key To access the list of saved site names press 3 To move the cursor to the Site Name press T Press e This triggers a pop up window that asks if you intend to use the original transducer position recommended This means that you have to remount the transducers exactly as they were in the previous install If you cannot recreate the original transducer installation then press D to change the pop up list from Original to New Press ev This disables the measurement channel until you repeat the Pick Install Transducer rou tine 2 1 2 HOW TO ENABLE AND DISABLE A MEASUREMENT CHANNEL The flow computer disables a measurement channel until the completi
70. intrinsic RTD reading to match an external reference thermometer by directly entering its reading Only perform this procedure while the RTD under test is installed and currently measuring temperature To enter the current RTD temperature Move the highlight to the RTD you want to calibrate RTD1 or RTD2 To access the RTD option list press e Move the highlight to User Cal or Factory Cal then press ev This triggers the pop up window Calib deg F 32 0 To enable numeric entry press 3 then type in the reading of the reference thermometer e g 72 0 Calib 2 deg F 72 0 To recalibrate the RTD sensor Enr To verify the calibrated reading go to Diagnostics Liquid Data to check the current RTD output Make sure that it coincides with the reading of the reference thermometer Repeat for the other RTD if necessary NOTE Factory Calibration provides an additional prompt after a new temperature is entered Are you Sure No Yes It is recommended that you use User Cal to avoid alteration of preset factory calibration 4 6 2 ICE BATH RTD CALIBRATION Use distilled deionized water and ice mixture at 0 C 32 F equilibrium for an ice bath Ensure temperature with a reference thermometer Siemens can not assume responsibility for the incorrect design construction or operation of an Ice Bath CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW AN RTD SENSOR TO MAKE DIRECT CONTACT WITH ICE DURING AN ICE BATH CALIBRATION To perform a 32
71. keys to type the required 96 correction for point 2 Press en Repeat this procedure for all required calibration points After entering the last Flow Calibration Point press to exit MultiPoint calibration 2 8 THE STRIPCHART SETUP MENU This menu becomes available after picking a Meter Type and Measurement Channel Use Stripchart Setup to select a data category the type of scaling and the update interval for the on screen stripchart display You can also clear the stripchart screen Use this menu cell to select a data Siemens Dual Path SITE1 the stripchart Select Data Liquident Time Base 1 second Stripchart Clear Yes Use this menu cell to select whether Use this menu cell the stripchart to select an update interval for the stripchart shows data as either arate ora percentage of span Use this menu cell to clear the current stripchart Stripchart Setup THE STRIPCHART SETUP MENU STRUCTURE c Stripchart Setup c Select Data c Data Display gt Data Rate Units Percent of Span c Time Base gt 1 Second 3 seconds 6 seconds 12 seconds 24 seconds 1 minute 3 minutes 6 minutes 12 minutes 24 minutes 1 2 hours c Stripchart Clear c m Yes No 2 8 1 SELECT DATA The Select Data option list allows you to select a data function for the on screen stripchart display The stripchart provides a data plot using the selected data units and time base All data items except
72. latch e Place the power switch to the OFF position e Loosen the captive thumbscrew securing the Access Cover and remove Access Cover e Using a flat blade screwdriver remove four captive screws securing the I O board e Carefully remove the I O board and set it aside Access Cover Screw p 3 y g TT koma E 1H X B C 1010N s H Ee ra l i INKET WIN EXTERNAL PONER I5 9 ee URN Power Switich Fis VALTAGE EE a HIN Ay OF eO Le RIMQYE QE FOR ACCESS Latch T V NRINI TERMINAS ollu a J O Oj e oy TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTION Pans oar SHORT TERMINALS 1 AND 4 SUPPLY RETURN SINCE T2 IS NOT BEING USED i see note below TOP VIEW Refer to paragraph 3 2 1 step 3 on next page l i2EC SERIES GABLE If this meter is using only one RTD temperature sensor short terminals 1 and 4 of TB2 with a jumper wire to complete the dual RTD current loop TO SENSOR 1010N Single Channel Temperature Sensor Inputs 3 16 Section 3 1010NFM 3J e Using a flat blade screwdriver loosen Terminal Block TB1 and TB2 screws e Connect the wires of the 1012EC Series cable as follows 1 Connect the RTD liquid temperature cable 1012EC as shown in the table below 1012EC SERIES TERMINAL TB1 CABLE WIRE 1 Black to TB1 1 WIRE 2 White to TB1 2 WIRE 73 Green to TB 1 3 WIRE 4 Red to TB1 4 WIRE 5 GND SHLD Blue 2 Complete the temperature sensor cu
73. meter s analog outputs and optional inputs The Analog Out Setup assigns functions to the meter s current voltage and pulse rate outputs Each menu cell pre sents an option list of the available data items In addition you can set up the alarm relays enable and span the analog input ports Use this menu to Siemens Dual Path SITE1 assign data functions Assign Data to Analog Outputs to analog outputs Analog Out Setup Relay Setup Use this menu to enable Analog Input Setup amp and span optional Use this menu to analog inputs assign alarm functions to relay outputs I O Data Control 2 57 Section 2 1010NFM 3J THE I O DATA CONTROL MENU STRUCTURE I O Data Control c Analog Output Setup c lo1 102 c Viscosity Ti lin lin2 lin3 lin4 Vo1 Vo2 gt See lo option list Pgenl c See lo option list Relay Setup c Relay 1 c Off Power On S G Hi Temperature low Temperature High Flow Low Flow Flow Alarm Fault Alarm Spacing Empty Aeration Interface Reverse Flow BatchTot Pos Total Neg Total Soft Fault Multi beam Relay 2 c See Relay 1 list for 2 3 amp 4 Analog Input Setup gt lint c Input c Off Aux X or F Option S G F Option cS F Option cP PSIA BAR F Option BARA Deg F Deg C numeric entry numeric entry See lin1 option list numeric entry For Multi Path an
74. no alternatives offered Low Viscosity cS The Low Viscosity cS menu cell sets the low liquid viscosity alarm relay setpoint The viscosity units are centistokes with no alternatives offered High Temperature The High Temperature menu cell sets the high temperature alarm relay setpoint If metric preferences are selected prior to site creationthe temperature units will be in Centigrade If English preferences are selected prior to site creation the temperature units will be in Fahrenheit Low Temperature The Low Temperature menu cell sets the low temperature alarm relay setpoint If metric preferences are selected prior to site creationthe temperature units will be in Centigrade If English preferences are selected prior to site creation the temperature units will be in Fahrenheit 2 46 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Interface Vs m s meters per second The Interface Vs m s menu cell sets the Interface Vs setpoint The relay changes state when the variable exceeds the user setpoint Aeration 96 The System 1010 surpasses all other transit time systems in its ability to operate with substantial aeration caused by entrained gases mixing condition or cavitation Some applications may require an alarm indication if aeration exceeds a particular level The meter detects this aeration level and provides this data as an output The aeration percentage triggers the alarm relay whenever it meets or exceeds the threshold you set in this me
75. of diagnostic information thus minimizing menu clutter but preserving as much functionality as practicable Totalizer control via lead in function key is provided by F3 dual path meter and since there is no F5 F1 four path version The Diagnos tic Menu area has been similarly setup to provide data Path 1 Path 2 and Path 1 and 2 generated by the physical measurement channels when selected but to suppress elements only provided by the virtual channel As mentioned above use a partially installed multipath site in order to direct all meter input output to a single measurement path Simply install the single available physical path and you ll produce data based on only this physical input and obtain the same functionality as provided to the single channel user Selecting A Meter Type The following example explains how to select a dual channel clamp on meter and initiate site program ming for the measurement channel Your Meter Type selection as well as other menu selections are remembered through power cycles NOTE If you have a single channel system all you have to do is select a measurement tech nology and then go directly to Channel Setup The site setup procedure for a single channel system is identical to setting up a measurement channel on a dual channel system As shown in the steps below selecting this mode only requires Je presses This is because dual channel clamp on is the default configuration for this instrument
76. per second under current operating conditions The following factors influence this parameter aeration pressure transients signal strength variation Accepted The running tally of accepted and rejected up down transmit burst sets Last Makeup Reason for last Makeup signal reacquisition Makeup Status Current stage of Makeup routine Measurement normal operation 2 11 4 THE LIQUID DATA MENU This menu shows the current Reynolds number used by the meter to implement flow profile compen sation Depending on the 1010 model Temp 1 amp 2 Viscosity cP Viscosity cS and Pressure are also offered LIQUID DATA MENU ITEMS Temp 1 Current Liquid Temperature Temp 2 Current Liquid Temperature Reynolds Current Reynolds number Specific Gravity Current specific gravity Viscosity cP The absolute viscosity of a liquid dynamically measured in centipoise Pressure Derived spanned from analog input Viscosity cS Kinematic viscosity of a liquid measured in centistokes 2 67 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Current Reynolds number 50 0 Reynolds 318017 pecific Gravity 000 S G 1 000 cP 14 5 PSIA 1 000 cS Viscosity cP Pressure Viscosity cS Liquid Data 2 11 5 THE SITE SETUP DATA MENU This menu provides data pertaining to transducer characteristics and operation Some menu items are for technical support i
77. performed without inter rupting ZeroMatic operation To disable ZeroMatic invoke it again but then press Left Arrow to abort the installation NOTE The ZeroClr command only resets the memorized zero offset registers not those set when the AutoZero routine is invoked Using Actual Zero NOTE Flow must be stopped with the line blocked if possible before invoking this function To invoke Actual Zero Access the Zero Flow Adjust option list by pressing Press 5T A pop up window prompts you to set the current flow rate in selected rate units to equal zero 0 000 NOTE If a flow offset is desired i e to test analog outputs then press Right Arrow to enable numeric entry Press en to start the Actual Zero process 2 31 Section 2 1010NFM 3J When you send the command the flow computer analyzes the current flow rate for up to sixty sec onds integrating averaging the data for the best zero correlation During this time the menu prompt at the top of the display screen shows a timer that counts from zero to sixty You can allow zero averaging for the entire period or cancel the process at any time by pressing the ENT key This controls the amount of data the meter averages to obtain a zero level Using ReversaMatic If site conditions do not permit stopping the flow rate at the mounting location and Reflect Mount is not possible then use the ReversaMatic routine to establish the zero flow level
78. pipe and that there is equal space on both edges Also make sure to position strap for easy access to the mounting strap adjusting screw 6 Repeat Step 5 with the second transducer leaving it still attached to the spacer bar Apply a 1 8 inch bead of couplant to the transducer At the same time you place it in the middle of the second area prepared secure the spacing bar to the already mounted transducer by inserting the transducer index screw through the REF hole on the Bar Put mounting strap around transducer and tighten as 3 6 Section 3 1010NFM 3J in Step 5 Sight along spacer bar to ensure axial alignment to the pipe Adjust if necessary and do not overtighten Ensure that the transducers do not move while tightening 7 Connect the transducer cable ensuring that you have observed the upstream downstream orienta tion in respect to the cable and the input jack on the flow computer If this is a dual channel unit make sure you are connecting the cables to the correct channel s input jacks Repeat this procedure for the number index transducer 8 Return to the menu and press e to finish the transducer install routine 3 1 7 DIRECT MODE MOUNTING FRAMES SPACER BAR AND SPACING GUIDES The combination of mounting frames spacer bar and spacing guides is the recommended way to mount Direct Mode transducers The mounting frame establishes the axial alignment of the transduc ers and allows you to remove and replace either transdu
79. possible flow To edit the Display Range To access the Display Range option list press To move the cursor to the required display range press T To store selection press er 2 6 4 FLOW DISPLAY SCALE After you select rate units the meter automatically computes a prefix to provide the best combination of capacity and resolution e g KGAL MIN The Flow Display Scale menu cell shows the results If the displayed scaling is not suitable you can edit it by accessing the option list Note that this scaling applies to all flow rate data displayed on the flow display screen even if the units do not appear next to the data because there may not be room on the screen Therefore always keep this prefix in mind when you enter flow related data To select a different Flow Display Scale To access the Flow Display Scale option list press 3 Move the cursor to the desired display scale by pressing OQA To register selection press enr 2 6 5 TOTAL VOLUME UNITS This menu cell allows you to select which units the meter uses for the flow total output If you select mass units the meter uses the specific gravity parameter see paragraph 2 3 to convert volumetric flow to mass flow The default English Flow Total Units is Gallons US If this suits the application press qe bypass this menu cell To change the default setting To access the Total Volume Units option list press 3 To move the cursor to the desired Tot
80. programmed data LJ Consult X Select Choose first recommended transducer LJ Relocate transducers 2 87 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Ultragel Official COUPLING COMPOUNDS Application Portable Short Term 24 Hours Max Temp 110 F 43 C Remarks Water Soluble RTV 734 Permanent Plastic Xducers Only 150 F 65 C Avoid Humidity Magnalube Long Term Teflon Grease 300 F 159 C Temp affects life Dow 340 Temperature Sensors Only 400 F 205 C Heat Sync Comp Denso Submersible Applications 150 F 65 C Good Noise Damp Kry Tox Long Term High Temperature 450 F 232 C Use for all HT Barco Bond Permanent Epoxy for Metal Xdcrs 150 F 65 C Cure at Ambient SuperLube Long Term Grease 375 F 190 C Avail In Stores Alternative COUPLING COMPOUNDS Trade Name Motor Oil Gear Oil STP Application Portable Short Term Max Temp 250 F 121 C Remarks Messy Auto Wheel Bearing Grease Moderate to Long Term 250 F 121 C Good Gen Compound Silicone Rubber RTV Permanent As Rated Cure at Ambient 2 Part Epoxy Permanent As Rated Cure at Ambient Gasket Cement Permanent 375 F 190 C Cure at Ambient Ideal Vsig Display F 073 1469 73 1691 1929 476 Command Line appears here 2 88 D 444 I D
81. sential data This addendum contains the only authorized instructions to be used when commissioning a wet flow calibrated 1010 system 1 INTRODUCTION When the system 1010 is wet flow calibrated the flow computer stores the installation param eters in its storage memory Each flow calibration is assigned a unique site name Usually the site name corresponds to the pipe size For example a 3 inch carbon steel schedule 40 pipe would be given the name 3CS40 The flow calibration report issued with each wet flow calibration includes a flow calibration Diagnostic Data Sheet This data sheet lists the site name and other necessary information such as transducer serial number and spacing information for setting up the flowmeter A wet flow calibration applies to a specific flowmeter and set of transducers identified by serial numbers on the diagnostic data sheet NOTE In order for the flow calibration to be valid the flow computer and transducers being used must have the same serial numbers as those listed for the site on the Calibration Diagnostic Data Sheet 2 SETUP PROCEDURE 2 1 Transducer Installation 2 1 1 Refer to the diagnostic data sheet to find the mounting mode Direct or Reflect used during the wet flow calibration Review the transducer installation guidelines in your 1010 field manual Refer to the diagnostic data sheet for the transducer spacing index utilized during the flow calibration Using the mounting co
82. site storage memory available Storing several inactive site setups may reduce the available logging capacity If you receive a Memory Full message when you try to save a Site Setup then you will have to delete an obsolete Site Setup or clear the Datalogger Memory to make room Another Datalogger memory consideration applies to dual channel systems when both measurement channels are actively log ging data Dual channel meters store logged data from BOTH channels in a common file so you must include Site ID for each line to identify the applicable measurement channel The 1010 also offers a Memory Map and Defragmenting command in the Meter Facilities area of the menu as an aid in visualizing and maximizing the efficient utilization of your meter s memory resources 5 6 REFERENCE TABLES The following tables provide reference data that may be required during the Site Setup SONIC VELOCITY in meters sec FOR COMMON LIQUIDS 68 F Liquids Oils Vs m s Liquids Oils Vs m s Acetate Butyl n 1270 Ethanol 1180 Acetate Ethyl 1180 Ethylene Glycol 1620 Acetate Methyl 1150 Gasoline 1250 Acetate Propyl 1180 Glycerine 1920 Alcohol 1440 Linalool 1400 Alcohol Butyl n 1270 Linseed Oil 1770 Alcohol Ethyl 1180 Methylethyl Ketone 1210 Alcohol Methyl 1120 Motor Oil SAE 20 30 1487 Alcohol Propyl i 1170 Paraffin Oil 1420 Alcohol Propyl n 1220 Pentane 1010 Benzene 1330 Petroleum 1290 Benzol Ethyl 1340 Trichlorethylene 1050 Butyrate E
83. the overlap or fold the guide from the overlap edge to overlap mark and draw a line at the fold or halfway point see next page Section 3 1010NFM 3J 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 SPACING GUIDE Mark or fold exactly Overlap Edge at half way point 4 CIRCUMFERENCE i FINDING THE HALFWAY DISTANCE Reinstall the spacing guide its left edge abutting the transducers edge mark on the pipe and the overlapping edge in line with the dot now a line on the pipe see C on previous page Tape itin this position on the pipe Take the second frame and place it against the edge of the guide with its tapered roller centered on the center mark on the guide Temporarily position the frame in the 3 o clock position opposite the mounted frame see below where it will be mounted Ensure that this is a smooth area without any raised spots seams etc Mark a generous area around the mounting frames 1 2 inch on either side and half again the length front and back with a pencil or chalk Remove the frame and the mylar guide 9 o clock Transducer 3 o clock Transducer ALIGNING THE TRANSDUCERS FOR DIRECT MODE OPERATION Prepare the area you marked by de greasing the surface if needed and removing any grit corro Sion rust loose paint or surface irregularities with the abrasive pipe conditioning material provided Clean the pipe of any debris and abrasive particles Replace the myl
84. the unsigned flow Vfab is always zero Enter the data using the flow rate units you selected To set the Min Flow Range To activate numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the minimum flow rate 0 of range To store data press ENT The following Span Data items are set in the same way as the two previously shown examples by entering numeric values and storing the data 2 44 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Max Vs m s The Max Vs m s menu cell stores the maximum range for the sonic velocity output The sonic velocity Vs appears on the Stripchart display and can drive any analog output or the alarm relay The Max Vs m s menu cell restricts this parameter to a maximum range of 2100 m sec Min Vs m s The Min Vs m s menu cell stores the minimum range value for the sonic velocity output The sonic velocity Vs can be displayed on the Stripchart and drive any analog output or the alarm relay The Min Vs m s menu cell restricts this parameter to a minimum range of 400 m sec Max S G The Max S G menu cell stores the maximum range value for the specific gravity of a liquid The specific gravity S G will be displayed as the maximum on the Stripchart Min S G The Min S G menu cell stores the minimum range value for the specific gravity of a liquid The specific gravity will be displayed as the minimum on the Stripchart Max Viscosity cS The Max Viscosity cS menu cell stores the maximum range fo
85. to communicate with the 1010 flowmeter But first save your settings by mov ing the mouse cursor to File sliding the cursor to Save then clicking OK on the Save dialog box 10 The next time you want to use HyperTerminal Click on Start Drag to Programs Drag to Accessories Drag to HyperTerminal and click Double click the icon you selected for the connection NOTE For easier access create a shortcut to the connect icon from your desktop Right click on the icon to open its dialog box Left click on Copy or Create a Short Cut and then move the mouse cursor to a blank area on your desktop Right click to open dialog box and then left click on Paste to place a shortcut to the connect icon on your desktop Accessing the Installation Menu Once the parameters are set HyperTerminal automatically initiates Command mode You will see a blank screen Press lt ENT gt a few times until you see For Help on the screen Type question mark and then press lt ENT gt to see a list of the available commands Use the MENU command type Menu and then press lt ENT gt to access the top level of the Installa tion Menu You will see a screen similar to the example below B 5 Appendix 1010NFM 3J Siemens Site 1 Select Meter Type Meter Type Single Channel Meter Facilities NOTE To facilitate connecting through modems the Menu command times out after three minutes of inactivity To
86. to experiment with time average damping and slewing factors to discover which settings optimize the collected data With SmartSlew enabled you can create very smooth output graphs without losing the ability to respond to fast flow transients that may be undetectable with the fixed time average filter enabled 5 4 Section 5 1010NFM 3J 5 4 3 NOTES ON LIQUID CONDITIONS Successful transit time flow measurement depends on sonic transmit signals traveling through liquid and arriving at the receive transducer without excessive attenuation Receive signals can be scattered by liquids carrying dispersed particulate matter either of a solid non homogeneous or gaseous na ture This is especially true if the dispersed material is of different sonic impedance than the base liquid Liquids that contain an excess of gas bubbles or mineral solids may prove to be unsatisfactory transit time applications However these liquids are perfectly suitable for Reflexor flowmetering Liq uids containing dissolved gasses or dissolved organic solids will not cause any problems for transit time operation Most liquids are excellent sonic conductors regardless of their electrical or optical properties Al though highly viscous liquids exhibit a greater degree of sonic attenuation System 1010 operates perfectly with the vast majority of these liquids The Vale signal strength item on the Diagnostic Menu is a good indicator of this condition A low value under
87. to external printers and computers Note that a single channel meter uses a compression algorithm to maximize data storage This disables back scrolling of datalogger reports Use this menu cell to pick a destination for Siemens Dual Path Path 1 IEEE ELECTI TE T E ESTO Datalogger reports 99 Use this menu cell to select a logging i Datalogger Data None interval Use this menu cell to Log Time Interval 1 Min select items for Data Logger Events None Datalogger reports Display Datalogger Off Use this menu cell to send Datalogger reports to selected destination and pick Datalogger Setup up a line wrap mode Use this menu cell to select real time Datalogger triggers 2 52 Section 2 1010NFM 3J THE DATALOGGER SETUP MENU STRUCTURE c Off c Datalogger Setup C Datalogger Mode Memory RS 232 Output Datalogger Data gt f None Site Id Date Time Flow Average Flow Raw Flow Total Vs Valc Aeration S G Alarms Temperature Delta T usecs Analog Inputs C Log Time Interval Pray 5 Sec 10 Sec 15 Sec 30 Sec 1 Min 5 Min 15 Min 30 Min 1 Hr 2 Hr 4 Hr 6 Hr 12 Hr 24 Hr Demand c Datalogger Events gt g None Relay 2 Relay 1 Fault Alarm Memory Makeup Spacing Empty Aeration Interface Flow Alarm c Display Datalogger 2 53 Off No Line Wrap Line Wrap Section 2 1010NFM 3J
88. to the 1010X 8 I O module Terminal TB2 Flowmeter end of cable is unterminated wire B 2 Appendix 1010NFM 3J Signal PC DB 9 1010P 1020N 1010WP 1010N 1010X Name Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5 Pin E TB1 pin 6 TB2 pin 16 TX Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin C TB1 pin 1 TB2 pin 11 Rx TB1 pin 4 TB2 pin 14 PC DB9 Connector 1010P 1020N 990P Connector Wiring Side View 1010WP WDP Connector Wiring Side View COMMUNICATING WITH SYSTEM 1010 1020 VIA THE RS 232 INTERFACE The following sections assume that you are familiar with the basics of using a Windows 3 x or Win dows 95 98 NT 2000 XP based communications program All PC computers provide at least one se rial port using either a 9 pin or 25 pin D type connector The port designation can be either COM 1 or COM 2 Usually when a computer includes two serial ports COM 1 will be the 9 pin connector and COM 2 will be the 25 pin connector However port designations can vary from manufacturer to manu facturer so you will have to positively identify the COM port you wish to use for the flowmeter interface Connect the cable between the flowmeter and your PC using either the 25 pin 9 pin or USB to RS 232 adapter connector depending upon the port s architecture HOW TO USE THE Windows HyperTerminal PROGRAM Windows provides a communication program called HyperTerminal which is ideal for interfacing your computer with the flowme
89. tube and analyzes setup data to optimize operation During procedure the meter shows its progress by highlighting the prompt line Siemens 2 Channel 1 FLOW1 Drive 27 m 10 6 0 Select FlowTube 1S Install Completed Install Empty FlowTube Set Chan Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Chan Not Setup Install FlowTube Upon completion the computer reports the measured sonic velocity You can accept this reading or press to adjust it see field manual for instructions Note that the default Empty Flow Tube Set is MTYmatic The flow computer deter mines the empty flow tube setting automatically during the Initial Makeup so use of this menu cell is optional 6 7 Section 6 1010NFM 3J Pressing Q accepts the displayed sonic velocity This moves the highlight to Empty Flow Tube Set Press to move the highlight to Zero Flow Adjust Press ll This triggers the Zero Flow pop up window see below You can accept the default zero setting 0 000 or enter a zero offset by typing it with the numeric keys In either case the flow through the Flow Tube MUST BE EQUAL TO ZERO FLOW OR YOUR DE SIRED OFFSET Siemens 2Channel 1 FLOW1 Conforms Indicated flow to Actual zero Select FlowTube 1S Install Completed Yes Empty FIOM Ary TET WI TN Zero Flow 0 000 Install FlowTube To start the zero acquisition routine E The highlighted prompt at top of the screen shows Inte grating
90. unrivaled performance and features especially Siemens s ground breaking enhanced transit time Digitally Coded MultiPuls technology and the on line automatic and interactive site setup facility This manual covers FUS1010 Single Channel Dual Channel Dual Path and 4 Channel 4 Path flowmeter types in NEMA 4 or NEMA 7 enclosures Only the Model 1010FTN and 1010AN flowmeters are equipped to utilize the flow tubes shown in Section 6 This section shows how to install the System FUS1010 flowmeter with a minimal amount of effort It will show how to use the Installation Menu to set up the system for transit time Reflexor and Flow Tube Clamp on operation It also shows the basic connections to and from the flowmeter For additional information on connections see the drawings at the end of manual 1 2 IMPORTANT SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS The FUS1010 NEMA Permanent meter operates from either an external AC or DC power source Please observe all the electrical safety codes etc that apply to your application We recommend that only experienced personnel with knowledge of local electrical codes and safety operating procedures perform the installation and wiring It is solely the user s responsibility to operate this equipment safely Siemens cannot accept responsibility for any damage that may occur due to failure to observe any local safety rules If this equipment is used for a hazardous application high line pressure hostile liquid characteristics per
91. which may result in an incorrectly measured fluid sound velocity To improve the automatic measurement of Tn the envelope threshold limit can be adjusted to exclude portions of the envelope which may be causing the Tn detection problem 0 73 1469 73 1691 1929 476 Envelope Signal 4 4 4 ma 55 06 55 06 3 11 72 191 Envelope Threshold 124 1 3 Crossover Marker TN marker If it appears that the default placement of the Tn marker is incorrect or unstable it can be adjusted by pressing the 5 key on the keypad to invoke the EnvSet command while viewing the envelope screen A horizontal line representing the envelope threshold level will appear along with a number indicating the percentage level The High and Low thresholds can then be moved either up or down on the envelope using the lt gt or lt gt keys While viewing the Tn marker position adjust the thresholds so that they are well above the baseline noise level but below the first major peak To exit this mode press the lt 0 gt key 2 76 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Signal Masking Function Hot Key 7 Under conditions of extremely low signal amplitude a noise spike associated with 1010 s receive signal window may be present on the extreme left side of the graph display If this spike is large enough it may interfere with the signal detection routines To eliminate this noise from the signal processing routines press the 7 key to invoke the MaskSet
92. with this procedure Be aware that you will have to create a new Site Setup re enter all site specific param eters including pipe or transducer tables plus all desired Meter Facilities en tries To clear all Dynamic Memory press er Create a Site Setup before attempting to access other menu items To restore operation press ben to access the installation menu Create a new site setup and complete the installation procedure Re select desired Meter Facilities items e g RS 232 setup parameters 2 80 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 11 8 TROUBLESHOOTING WITH TRANSDUCER TEST BLOCKS To resolve an apparent system malfunction you have to determine whether the problem is due to equipment failure or an application condition Our 1012 and 996 Transducer Test Blocks allow you to bench test the flow computer transducers and their cables If the system operates properly using the test block then focus on application conditions as the source of the problem Series A and B 1011 transducers use the 1012TB 1 Test Block and series C and D use the 1012TB 2 Test Block At the present time neither one support the 1011 High Precision transducers The 996PSP pipe simulator allows you test a 1010 series flow computer and 991 transducers from size 0 to size 3 Note that although the 1010 flow computer operates with our 991 size 4 and 5 trans ducers testing of these sizes with a 1010 flow computer is not currently supported 2 11 9 USING THE 1012TB 1 A
93. 0 meter facilitates this by copying pipe data that you installed as Path 1 and Path 2 data to the other paths It is seldom if ever necessary to trim the pipe data for the individual path channels although you may install different size or type transducers for each path Once you define the pipe move the menu to the individual paths using Select Path for the physical installation of each channel This is accomplished in the same way that individual channels are installed Save and Restore Operations for multi path sites execute on all the component chan nels simultaneously the individual paths of multi path sites do not have any existence or autonomy as single channel sites You will also find that individual path channels possess a reduced set of user accessible menu functions For example although you may zero each individual path the meter provides Kc control slope correction for the virtual channel system channel only You will find that the features and functions provide for each physical channel to focus mainly on the physical measure 1 10 Section 1 1010NFM 3J ment task User output data however is mostly reserved for the virtual or system channel This in cludes the totalizer functions Analog data is largely reserved for the virtual or system channel as well as the totalizer functions analog outputs and datalogger In some instances access is also provided to the path channel s data in order to facilitate the gathering
94. 1010 s datalogger reports are Y2K complaint using an industry standard algorithm to form a 4 digit year field 4 7 1 DATE The Date command sets the month day and year for the meter s internal clock calendar Enter the date using the MM DD YY format Replace MM with two digits to indicate the month Replace DD with two digits to indicate the day Replace YY with two digits to indicate the year Type the period sepa rator between each set of digits For example you would enter December 7 1997 by typing 12 07 97 You can use the Right Arrow to move the cursor back to a number if you need to re type it Press the CLR key to remove the current setting To set the Date To enable numeric entry press Use the Numeric keys to type the date MM DD Y Y To store the date press jew This moves the cursor to Time 4 7 2 TIME The Time command sets the hours and minutes for the meter s internal clock calendar Enter the time using the HH MM SS format Replace HH with 2 digits to indicate the hour use 24 hr clock format Replace MM with 2 digits to indicate the minutes Replace SS to indicate the seconds You also have to type the period separator between each set of digits For example you would enter ten minutes after two o clock in the afternoon by typing 14 10 00 You can use the lt Right Arrow gt to move the cursor back to a number if you need to re type it Press the CLR key to remove the current setting
95. 12 438 13 688 15 670 17 670 19 634 21 624 0 156 10 156 0 165 0 165 0 188 10 188 12 390 13 624 15 624 17 624 19 564 21 564 0 180 0 188 0 188 0 188 0 218 0 218 16 000 18 000 20 000 24 000 26 000 28 000 30 000 32 000 34 000 Stand ID Jo 15 250 17 250 19 250 23 250 25 250 27 250 29 250 31 250 33 250 Wall 0 0 375 0 375 0 375 0 375 0 375 0 375 0 375 0 375 0 375 Extra I D 0 15 000 17 000 21 000 23 000 25 000 27 000 29 000 Em 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 Double D T Extra Strong wa XXS ia 15 500 17 500 19 500 21 500 27 376 29 376 31 376 33 376 135 376 10 Wall 0 250 0 250 0 250 Sched I D 13 376 15 376 17 376 19 250 21 250 23 250 25 000 27 000 29 000 31 000 33 000 20 0 312 0 312 0 312 0 3759 500 Sched 30 Sched 13 124 15 000 16 876 18 184 40 i j i 0 438 500 0 562 0 593 Sched I D 12 814 14 688 16 500 18 376 20 250 CD 0 as v TE 0 593 0 656 0 750 0 812 0 875 K 16 126 b 4 Size 0 937 d E Sched 11 814 13 564 15 250 17 000 18 750 20 120 1 093 1 218 1 375 1 500 1 625 1 I D 10 192119 Sched f E E 140 l Wall 0 279 0 312 0 312 0 937 i 11 188 12 814 14 438 16 064 17 750 19
96. 2 36 NEGFLOW NETFLOW POSFLOW 2 36 2 42 Totalizer Mode 2 42 Selecting 2 42 Totalizer Scale Selecting A Different Scale 2 41 TOTONT 2 41 Technical Assistance 5 1 Transducer Pairs 2 25 Matching Serial Numbers 2 25 Transducer Installation 2 22 2 82 3 1 Transducer Pick Install 2 20 Transducer Selection 2 22 Index 10 Index 1010NFM 3J Transducer Type Menu 4 4 Transducers Reflexor 7 1 Picking and Installing 7 1 Transit time 1 1 1 9 7 1 Transmit Receive Functions 2 22 Troubleshooting Tips 2 78 Flow Computer Messages 2 78 Mounting Transducers On 1012 Test Block 2 81 Troubleshooting With Transducer Test Blocks 2 81 Using 1012TB 1 and 2 Test Blocks 2 81 Using F4 Sequence 2 79 Two Phase Liquids 5 6 Overflow Buffer 2 41 U Ultrasonic Transit Time 1 1 UniMass Table 2 11 2 14 Alternate Data Entry Method 2 16 Menu Table Explanations 2 15 Units Flow Total 5 15 Units Flow Volume 2 39 Using 1012T Mounting Tracks 3 11 Installing In Reflect Mode 3 11 Using ReversaMatic 2 32 Using The 996PSP Pipe Simulator 2 83 Mounting 2 83 Using The Spacing Offset 2 24 V Vaer 2 87 5 6 Valc Value 2 87 5 3 Velocity Axis 7 5 Virtual Channel 1 9 Viscosity 2 11 Viscosity cS 2 13 Viscous Liquids 5 6 Voltage Output Trim Vo1 amp Vo2 4 9 Calibration 4 9 Volumetric Flow Rate 2 44 Vfab Vfo Vs 2 44 Vps Values in inches sec For Some Common Metals 5 8 Vs Sonic Velocity 2 65 2 85 5 7 5 8 W Wall Thicknes
97. 30 indicates a possible low liquid sonic conductivity or improper transducer installation 5 4 4 ERRONEOUS LIQUID PARAMETER SPECIFICATION The viscosity of the liquid is an important factor It governs the degree of Reynolds Number compensa tion that the flow computer applies to the final rate output Therefore flow data errors could result if you enter an inaccurate viscosity value Controlotron s Technical Service Department can provide reliable viscosity data for most liquids 5 4 5 LIQUID COMPATIBILITY Since our clamp on transducer systems never contact liquid the issue of liquid compatibility only applies to entrained gases or mineral solid content that might impair sonic signals Since System 1010 is designed to measure flow using both transit time and Reflexor techniques we can safely say that it will operate most successfully on virtually all liquids 5 4 6 AERATION Undissolved gases having very low sonic impedance may cause sonic beam scattering In large quantities they can reduce the sonic signal strength Small bubbles caused by cavitation usually provoke more signal loss than an equal quantity of large gas bubbles Usually the problem can be alleviated by eliminating the cause Aeration may be caused by a mixing tank throttling valve cavita tion or air suction upstream of the transducer location System 1010 can operate successfully with a larger amount of aeration than any other transit time flowmeter It measu
98. 5 Transit Time Adjustment Hot Key 3 2 75 Zero Crossover Adjustment Hot Key 4 ssssssssss 2 76 Envelope Threshold Adjustment Hot Key 5 amp 6 2 76 Signal Masking Function Hot Key 7 rere 2 77 Description Of Graph Screen Text Display Parameters 2 77 Hot Key SS UII Y irssi rias ena past SE euin rat usum Ut Ea 2 77 Troubleshooting TIPS enirn rnnt tra ukae a ens ux unn b n Ez xuaon aranan aaraa 2 78 Flow Computer Messages eoe tut DERI eir eR tri eres 2 78 Using the F4 Reset Sequence seeseeeeeeeeeenn 2 79 Troubleshooting With Transducer Test Blocks 2 81 Using The 1012TB 1 And 2 Test Blocks eee 2 81 Using The 996PSP Pipe Simulator eere 2 83 Ira Pipe Simulator Iest Blaek Test Fails 4 cuia tacta etoile cos 2 84 Guide To A Smooth Installation encre nec ccce etna rn nenne 2 85 Checklist for 1010 Startup amp Performance esses 2 85 wisis 2 85 Installation Transducer Mount Guidelines esses 2 85 SAUD MT U 2 86 Diagnostic Performance Verification eeeeeeeeseesessse 2 86 Optimization Correction of Problems eere 2 86 Incorrect Measured fep
99. 8 0 8478 2348 0 8539 0 8539 2410 0 8600 0 8600 2476 0 8661 0 8661 2558 0 8722 0 8722 2656 0 8783 0 8783 2759 0 8844 0 8844 2853 0 8905 0 8905 3077 0 8965 0 8965 3477 0 9026 0 9026 4006 0 9087 0 9087 4651 0 9148 0 9148 5678 0 9209 0 9209 7582 0 9270 0 9270 10000 0 9296 0 9296 13326 0 9331 0 9331 33832 0 9375 0 9375 97443 0 9420 0 9420 278428 0 9464 0 9464 779166 0 9508 0 9508 2184262 0 9553 5 10 0 9553 Section 5 1010NFM 3J TERMINOLOGY CHART This chart provides explanations for uncommon terms used in this manual TERM EXPLANATION Active Memory Section of RAM allocated for active site parameters all current values The flow computer receives site specific operating instructions from Active Memory Alphanumeric Field An 8 character data entry field that allows you to specify a Site Name or a Security code Arrow Keys Use the Up Down Left and Right Arrows to navigate through the Installation Menu in their respective directions The Up or Down Arrows allow you also to scroll through option list items Asterisk Refers to the marker used in the Installation menu to indicate a current option list selection When you access an option list you can move the asteris
100. A throttling valve or other source of cavitation A mixing tank or other device that could aerate the liquid The discharge of a positive displacement pump 6 2 Section 6 1010NFM 3J d DO NOT mount the flow tube on a section of pipe that may be empty during zero flow If this cannot be avoided then be aware that the system will not be able to measure flow until the pipe refills and flow persists for long enough to drive all the air from the flow tube e DO NOT run the transmit receive cables in common bundles with cables from any other equip ment f DO NOT mount the flow tube under water unless you order a submersible cable kit and install it according to factory instructions 6 1 4 FLOW DATA SCATTER AND DAMPING Use the slew rate and damping controls to smooth data response time to suit your application The default SmartSlew control provides excellent output regulation without sacrificing an instant response to sudden flow changes Therefore we recommend SmartSlew for most applications The Damping control is particularly effective when one cannot avoid mounting the flow tube very close downstream from a potential cavitation source such as a positive displacement pump 6 2 CONSIDERATIONS FOR CRITICAL APPLICATIONS All flowmeters depend on proper site flow conditions and installation to achieve precise critical flow measurements Unfavorable factors such as liquid non homogeneity or stratification and aeration cavitation i
101. Cleaned areas Clean an area 1 2 on either side of transducer and an additional 1 2 along the length of the transducer 3 3 PREPARING THE PIPE SURFACE Section 3 1010NFM 3J 3 1 5 REFLECT MODE MOUNTING FRAMES AND SPACER BAR The combination of a spacer bar with mounting frames is the easiest way to mount in Reflect Mode The result is a rigid structure that eliminates spacing measurements and maintains the transducer to transducer geometry In addition reflect mounting allows you to move the entire assembly while main taining the original transducer spacing Mounting Strap Space Bar Platform amp positioned around wee oc Clamping Screw Mounting Frame R Space Bar Optional on larger pipes ucc ent View you can link straps together to surround pipe Mounting Strap a screw m INSTALLATION REFLECT MOUNT WITH FRAMES AND SPACER BAR NOTE Minimum Ltn 0 75 in 18 mm 1012 Series Mounting Frame Transducer Clamping Screw Spring Clip Not present on some i models d Mounting Strap Note operational 2nd Mounting Strap shown Larger pipes may need an additional Spacer Bar strap for a more Platform and secure mount clamping screw 1 Perform all required menu steps until the flow computer issues the number index and prompts you to pressfaafie finish the transducer install routine Stop at this point Note the number index value displayed in the Pick In
102. Cursors Flow History To switch the screen to the big digits display eress DA Selected Meter Type vac UN Dual Channel Flow od Site Setup Name Siemens 2 Channel 1 Unit i Percent of 100 0 Span Bar FLOW GAL MIN Graph Display Vfo Volumetric Average Flow Output m Vi Flow Total TOTAL GAL Vs Instantaneous 354 6597 n Volumetric Flow Rate 96 Measured Sonic Velocity You can press to scroll between the available display screens 4 17 Section 4 1010NFM 3J UNIT 1 0 65 FLOW GAL MIN FLOW GAL MIN 9 73 11 01 TOTAL GAL TOTAL GAL 75 30 97 04 Dual Display Screen Siemens 2Channel 1 Channel 1 FLOW GAL MIN 89 68 02 TOTAL KGAL Vs Vfo 1474 G M 4 0 12 eel The flow display uses the first prompt line display for the purpose of identifying the type of meter currently enabled Dual Channel Dual Path and the channel from which the current display is derived 1 or 2 for the physical channels and 3 for the computed or average channel in a dual path meter The Site Name is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the digital display 4 18 Section 5 1010NFM 3J 5 SYSTEM 1010 APPLICATION NOTES System 1010 is an extremely versatile transit time flowmeter that operates with either non intrusive clamp on or in line non wetted flow transducers Please review the following application guidelines to obtain the best service from this equipment System 1010 provides a
103. Database Set Zero appropriately AutoZero or ZeroMatic for Reflect Actual Zero or ReversaMatic for Direct After completion of Zeroing access Flow Display by pressing lt MENU gt key Use UP Down Arrows to scroll through available displays DIAGNOSTIC PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION LDDDDODUOLD Verify Vs is correct for Liquid and Temperature Verify Valc is Greater Than 30 Verify Vaer is Less Than 10 when flowing Check Signal Graph Trace to be acceptable See reference graph below For 1011 Universal Transducers verify VfMax is higher than maximum Flow Rate of application Set Hi Flow at 9096 VfMax Ensure it is higher than Max Application Flow Rate Set Lo Flow at 10 VfMax For unidirectional flow applications only Set Lo Flow at 1096 Greater Than Maximum Negative Flow Bi Directional Applications 2 12 2 OPTIMIZATION CORRECTION OF PROBLEMS Incorrect Measured Vs LDDDODODODUOLD Verify actual pipe outside diameter matches meter programming Verify actual Wall Thickness matches meter programming Verify transducer Type and Size matches meter programming Verify transducer mount method and spacing positions indices match meter programming Check actual transducer spacing matches Ltn dimension Verify that signal graph is acceptable see below Use recommended High Precision or first recommended Universal Transducer Verify Liquid Vs in database take into account actual temperature amp pressure
104. F 0 C RTD Calibration Immerse RTD sensor in deionized water and ice mixture Stir the mixture costantly Move the highlight by pressing D to the RTD you want to calibrate RTD1 or RTD2 To access the RTD option list press e Move the highlight to User Cal then press en This triggers the pop up window 4 11 Section 4 1010NFM 3J When you are sure that the RTD Sensor is at 32 F 0 C press jen to recalibrate the RTD sensor To verify the calibrated reading go to Diagnostics Liquid Data to check the current RTD output Make sure that it coincides with the reading of the reference thermometer Repeat for the other RTD if nec essary er TN C To E g 32 0 The Clock Set menu allows you to set the time and date The meter uses its internal clock calendar to record the real time when certain data and diagnostic events occur In addition the clock calendar provides the Datalogger and Stripchart date and time stamps 4 7 THE CLOCK SET MENU CLOCK SET MENU STRUCTURE Clock Set Date xx xx xx date entry Time xx xx time entr Notice All flowmeters include a real time clock to provide a convenient date time stamp for display screens and datalogger reports The operating system does not rely on the date and time of day for any flowmeter opera tion Therefore the Turn Of The Century will have no effect on the proper functioning of any of our systems Although we limit the year to 2 digits in all our displays
105. Field Manual SITRANS FUS1010 NEMA 4X IP 65 Clamp On Multi Function Flowmeter SITRANS FUS CEERUEEDBRE ETT EI DATA PSEPREFREEE SET EP 1010NFM 3J Siemens Energy amp Automation s Standard Warranty This warranty applies to flow metering and leak detection systems SIEMENS ENERGY amp AUTOMATION CORPORATION the Company warrants to the original purchaser of this equipment as presented in Section 1 of Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale 10 1 2004 To obtain repair or replacement within the terms of this Warranty a Return Merchandise Authorization number RMA must be obtained from Technical Service by calling 631 231 3600 prior to shipment This RMA number must appear prominently on the outside of all returned packages Returned merchandise must include packing slip with specification of defect s and be shipped freight prepaid directly to Siemens Energy amp Automation Corporation 155 Plant Avenue Hauppauge NY 11788 Equipment or material returned for Certification Validation Repair or Replacement may result in the loss of memorized pipe site date in equipment computer memory Siemens Energy amp Automation can save and then restore this data for some NEMA type systems and all Portable systems if requested at the time of equipment return A fee may be imposed for this service This Warranty does not extend to costs incurred for removal or reinstallation of the equipment or to
106. For Flow Tube Operation 6 4 jp m 6 4 Set p PRO CCUM 6 4 Specifications CPVC Flow Tube sccccsseeeeesssseeeeeesseeeeeessneeeesseneeeeeseaes 6 9 Specifications KYNAR PVDF Flow Tube eene 6 9 Specifications TEFLON PFA Flow Tube eene 6 10 Specifications 316 Stainless Steel Flow Tube 6 10 vii Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J Additional Installation Notes eeeeseess 1011FT Series 316 Stainless Steel Flow Tube 992DFT Series CPVC or Kynar PDFA Flow Tube 992 Series Teflon PFA Flow Tube Section 7 re The System 1010N Reflexor Flowmeter fA Reflexor Installation Steps eese 7 2 Select A Transducer Set For Use By Reflexor 7 3 Select The Transducer Mounting Location 7 4 Mounting The Transducers eee Reflexor Mode Adjacent Transducer Mounting Reflexor Mode In line Transducer Mounting 7 5 Connection Of Transducer Cables 7 6 Select Reflexor Operating Mode
107. If the maximum flow rate for the application is relatively low then this correction should not be required e lf the flow rate is very high and the flowmeter is reporting erroneous or unstable flow then the flowmeter may already be having trouble resolving the upstream and downstream signals In this event it may be necessary to first lower the flow rate to a moderate level before performing the Automatic HF adjustment Once this is done the flowmeter should be able to properly measure the highest flow rates without problems e The limits of the HF parameter are 0 7 and any attempt to manually install a larger value will cause the flowmeter to abort the installation of the parameter NOTE Pressing the Left Arrow at any stage prior to accepting the measured value will abort the installation and return to the previous setting To access this HF menu item proceed as follows e Atthe Meter Type Menu press the Right Arrow and then lt ENT gt to select the desired Path e g Dual Path Flow e Inthe Dual Path Flow Menu press the Down Arrow and scroll to the Diagnostic Data menu cell Press the Right Arrow to select it 2 69 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G Channel Path Setup Path Select 1 Pipe Data Path Enable Yes Application Data Flow Rate Pick Install Xdcr Application Info Operation Adjust Liquid Data Flow Total Units Data Span Set Ca
108. Interval Datalogger Events Display Datalogger c I O Data Control c Analog Out Setup lo1 2 Vo1 2 Pgen1 2 c Relay Setup Relay 1 Relay 2 3 4 c Analog Input Setup lin1 lin2 Optional Function c Diagnostic Data gt Flow Data Flow Flow Vel F S Total Vs m s Signal mV Valc 96 Vaer 96 Alarm Status AnCal HiFlow LoFlow c Application Info TN uSec TL uSec DeltaT nSec Burst Sec 96 Accepted Last Makeup Makeup Status c Liquid Data Temp 1 2 Reynolds Specific Gravity Viscosity cP Pressure Viscosity cS aa c Site Setup Data gt t fx drive N burst length Ltn in Vimax Vs max m s Vs min m s Empty Samples Cycle Max Damping Min Damping HF C Test Facilities 5 16 Makeup Graph Tx Up Tx Dn 7 continued Section 5 1010NFM 3J THE CLAMP ON MENU continued c Diagnostic Data c Test Facilities gt rf Fixed ALC Tx Up Fixed ALC T Tx Dn Fixed ALC f Graph AutoZero c Print Site Setup oD No Yes C Date Site Created C XX XX XX XX XX XX 5 17 Section 6 1010NFM 3J 6 OPERATING SYSTEM 1010 WITH FLOW TUBES This extremely versatile in line transit time flowmeter system has proven to be a valuable tool for servicing the following applications listed below Be aware though that only the models 1010FTN and 1010AN meters are equipped to utilize flow tubes
109. Io invoke ReversaMatic e To access the Zero Flow Adjust option list press C9 e Move the cursor to ReversaMatic Press to invoke the routine e The meter begins to measure the positive flow rate Positive flow refers to flow moving from upstream transducer location to the downstream transducer location Note top prompt line shows Reversamatic Action e Upon completion the meter beeps and the display screen shows Reverse Xdcrs Press ENT e Now remove then remount the upstream and downstream transducers in their reversed positions Mount the Up transducer without removing its cable in the Down transducer cable location Mount Down transducer with its cable in the Up transducer cable location When remounting the trans ducers couple them to the pipe properly Press lt ENT gt after re installing the transducers e The flow computer measures the negative flow rate briefly then beeps and repeats the aA AEE CO OCA WE SU prompt e Now remount the transducers for normal operation in their original orientation When remounting transducers couple them to the pipe properly Press ENT after re installing the transducers This completes the ReversaMatic procedure The system s zero accuracy will be very close to that obtainable using the Actual Zero method providing flow remained constant during this procedure Important Note A caution on the use of upper and lower flow limits used to prevent flow mis registra tion
110. MA 4 Outline Dimension 191N1W Transducer Submersible NEMA 4 Installation Drawing CC129 Dry Film Couplant Installation Outline 1010 Series Flow Tube Index 1010NFM 3J Index Symbols 1010WX Series Flowmeters 1 19 1011 Series Transducers 3 1 1011 Universal Transducer 2 22 1011H High Precision Transducer 2 22 4 Channel 1 1 1 10 991 Universal Transducer 2 22 A Absolute Flow 2 44 Vfab Vfo Vs 2 44 Accuracy 5 3 6 3 Active Memory 2 1 5 7 Actual Zero 2 30 Additional Installation Notes Flow Tubes 6 11 Adjacent Mounting Method 7 1 7 3 Aeration 5 5 Alarm Letter Codes And Descriptions 2 55 Alarm Levels setting 2 45 Aeration 2 47 Hi Flow Interface Vs m s Low Flow 2 46 Alphanumeric String 1 5 1 8 Analog Input Setup optional function 2 61 Module Analog Input wiring 3 16 Setting Current Input 2 61 Analog Out Setup 2 59 Assigning Functions lo 2 59 Vo Pgen 2 60 Outputs Setup Data Categories 2 59 Analog Output Trim 5 13 Analog Output Trim Menu 4 9 Analog Output Span 2 59 Application Data 1 6 Application Data Menu 2 10 Application Data Menu Structure 2 11 Application Dependent Adjustments 7 5 Application Info Menu 2 67 Application Notes System 1010 5 1 Arithmetic Operation 1 10 AutoZero 2 30 Axial Alignment 3 5 3 7 Backlight 4 16 Selecting 4 16 Batch Sample Total 2 42 Batch Sample Volume 2 42 Entering 2 42 Index 1 Index 1010NFM 3J C Cables see Appendix B Calibrating Flow Rate 2 48
111. ND 2 TEST BLOCKS The 1012TB 1 and 1012TB 2 test blocks provide two test surfaces Each surface supports a specific transducer size For example one surface of the 1010TB 1 supports Size A transducers and the other supports Size B transducers The 1012 pipe simulators include two labels one on each side plate The labels identify the transducer size data to be entered and the surface to be used with the specific transducer size See drawing on next page Transducer clamping Screw Slide transducers firmly against Transducer Transducer Pinstops Clamping Bracket Transducer under test This label showsthe data entry parameters for size B Size A parameters appear on alabel on the other Side plate Example shows testing for This arrow points to Size B Rotate brackets 180 to the surface associated with the Transducer testing mount Size A transducers xdcr size identified on the label surface for an A size transducer MOUNTING TRANSDUCERS ON A 1012 TRANSDUCER TEST BLOCK 1 Identify the side of the simulator that applies to the transducers under test Rotate the clamping bracket as required to mount transducers on the test surface 2 Using a coupling compound preferably CC 102 mount the transducers on the pipe simulator as shown above Slide each transducer until it presses against the pin stop Use the clamping screws to hold the transducers in place 3 Connect transducer cables between each transducer and the mete
112. P ON MENU c Clamp On c Channel Setup System Info Of Recall Site Setup Channel Enable Create Name Site Site Security Delete Site Setup Save Rename Site Version Reset Date Time Op System P N Checksum Code c Pipe Data als Select Pipe Class Select Pipe Size Pipe OD in Pipe Material Wall Thickness Liner Material Liner Thickness c Application Data Liquid Class C Select Liquid f Estimated Vs m s Viscosity cS Density S G c UniMass Table 5 14 cC Disabled c Constant Temp Create Edit Table Table Point Vs Temperature S G Viscosity cS Accept E Clear Table No Yes Table Active Yes No C Constant Vs Create Edit Table Table Point Vs Temperature S G Viscosity cS Accept o gt Clear Table No Yes Table Active Yes No c Changing Temp Table Active Yes No amp Vs continued Section 5 THE CLAMP ON MENU continued c Clamp On c Application Data c Temp Range c p 40F to 250F 40F to 375F 40F to 450F c Pipe Config Change to Up stream Piping c f Fully Developed 1 Elbow Dbl Elbow Dbl Elbow Valve Expander Reducer Norm Entry Header Inlet Intrusions c Anomaly Diams xxxx numeric entry c Pick Install Xdcr c qq Transducer Model Transducer
113. Picking a pipe class and size automatically sets all the required pipe parameters using industry standard dimensional data Press to access the Pipe Class option list Note that although Manual Entry exists on this list it is inactive for FastStart Setup see paragraph 2 2 1 2 Channel Channel 1 Choose Pipe Class Manual Entr Select Pipe Pick Install Xdcr FastStart Setup In this example we will pick the pipe class ASA Carbon Steel by moving the cursor to the selection and then pressing en 2 Channel Channel 1 Hanual Entry Select Pipe ASA StainlessSteel Pick Install Xdcr ASA Carbon Steel ASA Plastic Metric DN Steel Metric SGP Steel Cast Iron Table Ductile Iron Table Copper Tube Table FastStart Setup Section 1 1010NFM 3J Next we will pick the pipe size 1CS80 by moving the cursor to the selection and then press ing nn This is all there is to setting up the pipe parameters Now we will select and install the transducers Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Dpens Transducer Select Install Henu Choose Pipe Class ASA Carbon Steel Select Pipe 1CS88 Pick Install Xdcr astStart Setup 1 8 2 PICKING AND INSTALLING THE TRANSDUCERS Press to access the Pick Install Xdcr menu then select the appropriate Transducer Model The meter then analyzes your pipe data and registered transducer list before calculating the recommended transducer size s The top line prompt shows a series of t
114. Pipe Table editor in the Meter Facilities menu 2 2 2 HOW TO SELECT A PIPE SIZE Selecting a Pipe Size installs the selected pipe parameters into the balance of the Pipe Data menu cells and prepares the 1010 for Transducer selection and Installation This option is not applicable if the Pipe Class is Manual Entry 2 8 Section 2 1010NFM 3J After selecting a pipe class To access the Select Pipe Size option list press To scroll to the required pipe press DID To register selection press enr 2 2 3 HOW TO ENTER THE PIPE OD in or mm Use this menu cell to edit the pipe outer diameter Be aware that you will not be able to complete the transducer installation successfully unless this information is accurate In addition if you change this parameter on a previously installed site you will have to repeat the transducer installation Note Use actual pipe dimensions not ASA code or any other standard The English Metric selection in the Meter Facilities menu determines whether these dimensions are in inches or millimeters To enter the Pipe OD To enable numeric entry press Use the keypad s numeric keys to type the exact outer diameter of the pipe in inches or millime ters To register the Pipe OD press enr 2 2 4 HOW TO SELECT A PIPE MATERIAL The pipe material selection affects flow calibration to a small degree It also influences the meter generated transducer size and spacing recommendations Select a substit
115. TL amp ALT Used as shift keys for alternate key functions DATALOG Triggers immediate Datalogger report PLUS MINUS Changes the sign of numeric data NOTE The keypad does not have alphabetic keys Scrolling lists provide alphanumeric char acters as needed 1 6 INTRODUCTION TO THE 1010N MENU SCREENS The figure below shows a typical 1010N menu screen in this case the Pipe Data Menu Current Selected Current Selected Meter Type Measurement Site Name Identified Menu Prompt Line Channel Reverse Video Siemens 2 Channel 1 SITE 1 Highlighted Data Select Pipe Class from Pipe Table T Select Pipe Class ManualEntry M Menu Cell Data Highlighted 7 Select Pipe Size No Pipes right hand column Menu Cell Pipe OD lt in gt 0 500 Pipe Material Steel Wall Thickness 0 100 Liner Material None Menu Cell Data aum aui nes Thickness 0 000 left hand column Pipe Data Current Selected Menu TYPICAL INSTALLATION MENU SCREEN 1 3 Section 1 1010NFM 3J EXPLANATION OF THE CALL OUTS Menu Prompt Line When you select a menu cell a highlighted text prompt appears on the top of the screen to explain the function of the cell Current Selected 2 Channel indicates Dual Channel meter operating mode selected Meter Type Selected Channel The 1 indicates that measurement Channel 1 is currently selected Highlighted Menu The menu cursor highlight bar shows where you are currently working by C
116. The Analog Input Module 3 16 1010N Supply And Return Connections eeseeeeeeeeeeee 3 17 Notes On 1010 Analog Input Modules eese 3 18 Single Channel M del TR 2 18 Dual Channel Model isnt snnt tc tta terra Sea tome emo Sb 2 18 Clamp On RTD Installation Notes eene 3 19 Paralleling RTD Inputs For Dual Channel Energy Measurement 3 19 Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J Section 4 4 4 1 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 4 8 3 4 8 4 4 8 5 4 8 6 4 9 4 10 4 11 Section 5 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 The Meter Facilities Menu And Graphic Display Screens 4 1 aic Mr 4 1 The Table Set ps Mon rnt eraut ux ont ne een aasan nuire akR aiaia 4 2 Hur m M 4 2 Pipe Table Menu Structure s cccccsisccecsascnacexessacekersstuicnsenacntansassescemenseoraneraeie 4 2 Create Edit 0 ame eer ee neers 4 3 i 4 4 Transducer Type Mel iius seiacccir ne ain nixus cv hix iA SERERE ERR XRR PA E Max UE UN ISIN E 4 4 Transducer Type Menu Structure seessesseeeeeeeennee 4 5 The Datalogger Control Menu
117. UP If you attempt to save a Site Setup when memory is full the screen will show Memory Full If you get this message after issuing a Save Rename Site command you ll have to delete an unneeded Site Setup to clear memory space The Datalogger and Site Storage share a common memory pool so a large amount of logged data could also trigger the Memory Full message For how to clear Datalogger memory see Meter Facilities Datalogger Control The Defragment Command may also secure more memory see Meter Facilities Memory Control Menu To delete a stored Site Setup To highlight Delete Site press T To access the Delete Site option list press 3 Move the cursor to the site name of the site setup you want to delete To delete the obsolete site setup press enr 2 1 6 HOW TO SAVE RENAME A SITE SETUP The Save Rename Site command copies data from Active Memory to the Site Storage Memory Saved Site Setups can be recalled for future use This menu cell allows you to save a Site Setup at any time during the programming process However you must recall and complete the Site Setup in order to achieve operation When you access the Save Rename Site menu cell the name of the most recently created Site Setup see Create Name Site appears automatically If this name is acceptable you can press ENT to save the Site Setup You can change the listed site name by following the procedure below You may select up to eight characters If you d
118. a Screen Data and Controls 7 6 HyperTerminal see Appendix B I O Data Control 5 16 I O Data Control Menu 2 57 Inaccurate Viscosity Values 5 5 Index Pin 3 13 Initial Makeup 2 28 6 7 In line Method 7 3 In line Transit time 1 9 Install Completed Command 2 25 Installation Guide 2 85 Check List For 1010 System Start Up amp Performance 2 85 Programming 2 85 Transducer Mounting 2 85 Installation Menu 1 1 1 4 Installing a 1012T Mounting Track In Direct Mode 3 13 180 Degrees Opposed With Mounting Track 3 13 Installing a 1012T Mounting Track In Reflect Mode 3 11 Installing The Transducers 3 1 Picking The Appropriate Transducer 5 2 Preparing The Pipe 3 3 Finding The Halfway Distance 3 10 K Kc Calibration 2 48 Kc Control 1 11 Keypad 1 3 Enable Disable Switch 1 2 L Leak Detection 2 22 Line Feed 4 14 RS 232 4 13 Liner Material 2 10 Default Material 2 10 Material Option List 2 10 Liner Thickness 2 10 Liquid Composition 7 9 Liquid Conditions 5 5 Liquid Data 6 6 Index 5 Index 1010NFM 3J Liquid Data Menu 2 67 Liquid Sonic Conductivity 6 1 Low 6 1 Log Time Interval 2 55 Low Limit Cursor 7 6 Low S G 2 46 Low Signal Message 2 79 Low Temperature 2 46 Low Viscosity cS 2 46 Ltn Menu 2 21 Ltn Menu Cell 2 25 Makeup Latch 2 47 Enable Disable 2 47 Managing Site Setups 2 2 Marking Transducers 4 5 Mass Flow 2 14 Matching Serial Numbers 5 2 Max Flow 2 44 Range Setting 2 44 Max S G 2 45 Max Temperature 2 45
119. able Active Yes No Use this item to tell the 1010 meter whether to use the UniMass Table as the source of S G and Viscosity parameters for the currently active site Constant Vs Press the Right Arrow to access The Constant Vs UniMass Table can be used for single liquid applications where temperature is directly measured Availability of liquid properties rela tive to temperature greatly simplifies the implementation of this table Contains the same menu option list as the Constant Temp menu cell above but allows Temperature input data instead of the Vs Sonic Velocity Alternate Data Entry Method If you wish you may input the data table via the meter s serial port To accomplish this the meter must be in Direct Command Mode not Menu Mode or Data Display Mode You can recognize this mode by noting that the meter responds to a CR input with a for menu prompt The meter will accept a text file of the correct format into the UniMass table data structure directly An example of the format for a four point data file is as follows MTABLE 1 4 1510 0 30 0 1 1 2 7 1520 0 40 0 1 5 3 4 1530 0 50 0 1 9 5 5 1540 0 60 0 2 2 6 8 2 16 Sec tion 2 1010NFM 3J Ch MTABLE is the special keyword indicating that UniMass data follows 1 stands for the channel number where the data is being installed and 4 indicates the number of lines data points The last number must match the number of lines or else the table w
120. above the previous MaxDamp value will set both parameters to the same value In most cases itis preferred that both damping parameters be set to the same value however in cases where rapid response to changes in liquid sound velocity is required the two values may be set differently In this situation the meter will use the MaxDamp value when sound velocity is stable but then switch to a faster damping value limited by MinDamp when a significant change in sound velocity is perceived To exit this mode press the lt 0 gt key on the keypad Transit Time Adjustment Hot Key 3 Observe the short vertical marker at the beginning of the receive signal in the Graph Screen above This line represents the position in time Tn where the 1010 flowmeter perceives the arrival of the ultrasonic signal There are actually two Tn markers one for the upstream arrival time and one for the downstream arrival time For proper liquid sound velocity measurement these Tn markers should be positioned near the beginning edge of the receive waveform envelope as shown however in cases of poor signal conditions it is possible for this measurement to be off by several receive waveform cycles 2 75 Section 2 1010NFM 3J To adjust the Tn mark position press the 3 key on the keypad to bring up the TnSet command Pressing the lt gt or lt gt keys will cause the Tn marker to move later or earlier respectively The change from the default value in sa
121. acent Transducer Mounting 7 3 Diagnostic Data 7 8 In Line Transducer Mounting 7 3 Selecting 7 4 Relay Option List 2 60 Relay Setup 2 60 5 16 Assigning Relay Functions 2 61 Resultant Data 1 9 ReversaMatic 2 31 Reynolds Number 2 14 Compensation Factors 5 10 RS 232 Setup Menu 4 13 Baud Rate 4 13 Parity 4 14 RTD 4 10 Calibrate Menu 4 10 Index 8 Index 1010NFM 3J Calibration By Data Entry 4 11 Clamp On 3 19 Entering Current RTD Temperature 4 11 Ice Bath Calibration 4 11 Parallel RTD Inputs Dual Channel 3 19 RTS Key Time 4 15 Setting RTS Key Time 4 15 S Safety Considerations 1 1 Save and Recall Data Sites 1 10 Save and Restore Operations 1 10 Save Rename Site Command 2 5 Scrollable Option List 1 5 Selecting Channel 1 4 1 9 1 11 2 3 6 4 Data Options 2 50 Datalogger Data Items 2 54 Liquid Class 2 13 Datalogger Event Items 2 56 Selecting Deselecting 2 56 Liquid Class 2 12 Meter Type 1 11 Memory Mode 2 36 Path 1 10 Reflexor Mode 7 3 Time Average 2 35 Transducer Model 2 22 Transducer Mount Mode 2 23 Direct Reflect 2 23 Transducer Size 2 23 Zero Flow Adjust Menu 2 30 Sensor Temperature 3 15 Serial Data Port 1 3 see also RS 232 Set Empty Command 2 30 Empty Pipe Alarm Threshold 2 30 Setting Analog Output Span 2 58 Setting Clock 4 13 Setting The Log Time Interval 2 55 Setting Up The Reflexor Flowmeter 7 4 Signal Low Poor 2 88 Single Channel 1 1 1 5 Site Programming for measurement channel 1 11 Site Set
122. agile in tracking pressure wave induced Vs transients and will recover from mistracking more quickly and smoothly than any other competing transit time flowmeter 5 4 1 LOW FLOW RATES Our 1010 Systems provide a flow resolution and measurement range that surpasses any other type of flowmeter Therefore it operates superbly for low or high flow rate applications However with our clamp on systems using the highest resolution when measuring a low flow rate may cause natural data scatter to become a high percentage of the reading Since it is data scatter it will not contribute any error to a totalizer reading accumulating for at least several minutes However if the flow rate is extremely low e g under 0 25 ft sec the minute zero drift retained by the system may cause an observable performance decline Therefore if your application involves extremely low flow velocities and your line size is 2 or under our 992DFT or 1011FT Flow Tubes might serve you best 5 4 2 FLOW DATA SCATTER amp DAMPING The transit time flowmeter s ability to respond to the extremely fast flow fluctuations that characterize real flow may surprise you Most conventional flowmeters cannot detect these rapid flow fluctuations since they are subject to unavoidable mechanical inertia System 1010 s response speed is ideal for tracking fast flow transients However if this performance is unnecessary you can smooth the Sys tem 1010 s response time to suit any application
123. al volume units press m To store selection press e 2 40 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 6 6 TOTALIZER SCALE After you select totalizer units the meter automatically computes a prefix to provide the best combina tion of capacity and resolution e g MGAL MIN The Totalizer Scale menu cell shows the results If the displayed scaling is not suitable you can edit it by accessing the option list Note that this scaling applies to all flow total data displayed on the flow display screen even if the units do not appear next to the data because there may not be room on the screen Always keep this prefix in mind when you enter totalizer related data To select a different Totalizer Scale To access the Totalizer Scale option list press Move the cursor to the desired display scale by pressing DICTI To register selection press e 2 6 7 TOTAL RESOLUTION The meter assigns multiplier prefixes for the flow total units you selected e g MGPM It provides three resolution or capacity levels Therefore actual Totalizer display units depend on the selected multiplier Check the total units by accessing the Totalizer Scale menu cell If you use the totalizer TOTCNT relay output take into account a The TOTONT relay output pulses at a maximum rate of 5 pulses per sec 5 Hz b The meter sends a totalizer output pulse for every advance of the rightmost visible totalizer digit It is possible for a high flow rate to persist long
124. alla tion However if the estimated Vs is substantially different from the measured value the computer will request you to re space the transducers during the transducer install procedure NOTE During the Xdcr install procedure see paragraph 2 4 you can ignore a respacing request by pressing the Down Arrow gt instead of lt ENT gt If this triggers a Spacing Alarm check Diagnostic Data Site Setup Data to make sure the measured Vs value does not exceed the Vs max or Vs min items To edit the Estimated Vs m s To activate numeric entry press Type the sonic velocity value using meters per second To register the data press enr 2 13 Section 2 1010NFM 3J How to Edit the Viscosity cS Setting The Viscosity cS menu cell shows the kinematic viscosity of the selected liquid in centistokes The viscosity value is particularly important for high viscosity liquids The meter requires an accurate liquid viscosity to compute the flow profile compensation If the displayed viscosity is correct bypass this menu cell by pressing the Down Arrow Please be aware that the viscosity of the liquid affects the Reynolds Number compensation applied to the final rate output Therefore inaccurate data could cause flow data errors Edit this entry only if you know the true viscosity of your liquid If necessary our Technical Service Group can provide reliable viscosity data for most liquids To edit the Viscosity setting To act
125. annel Meter Type If your 1010 is a multi channel model it offers 2 or 4 independent measurement channels The meter s resources are divided among these channels equally This means that analog Input Output relays and digital command lines will be fewer than for single channel machines We ll show you later how to get around this limitation for times when you need all your multi path meter s resources for a single measurement channel If one two or three channels are running when you are trying to setup the last channel it could take a very long time for the setup some 10 to 15 minutes should be expected A great time saver would be to turn each channel off after setup setup one channel at a time and reactivate all after everything is setup then the setup time goes very quickly Your datalogger and site storage memory being bulky resources are not divided up at all and remain available for each channel s use You will be able to save and recall sites to and from the various channels as long as they share an identical measurement technology Reflexor clamp on flowtube etc Be aware however that moving a site from one channel to another like this will likely require a new initial installation to achieve its best potential This is especially true if the new target installation is not on the same pipe or uses another pair of transducers whose nominal characteristics are identical Note that datalogger reports will be interleaved in mem
126. appear These marks represent the time at which the receive signal is digitally sampled Correlated Plot During conditions of flow the actual transit time delta difference can be observed in the displayed receive signal waveform when the Correlated Plot menu parameter is not selected To observe this time difference simply depress the lt gt key to see greater signal detail until the individual up and down receive signals are clearly discernible To verify that the 1010 signal processing algorithms are properly correlating the up and down stream receive signals select the Correlated Plot option from the display menu list 2 74 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Return to the graph screen and observe the relative position of the up and down waveforms In a properly correlated receive signal the two images should be nearly superimposed on top of each other even during high flow conditions In the unlikely situation where the two images appear to be offset by one or more receive cycles then the flow readings should be considered questionable Command Modes Although the 1010 signal processing algorithms are capable of accommodating a very wide range of signal conditions it may be desirable to override these default settings under extremely difficult operat ing conditions The following functions are available for this purpose Digital Damping Control Hot Key 1 and 2 The 1010 permits user modification of the digital averaging used by t
127. application It recommends the appropriate mounting mode direct or reflect and lists the Spacer Bar or Mounting Track part number and spacing index Ideally you will be able to use the primary recommendations However you can edit the menu entries as required to accommodate different transducers or mounting configurations The flow computer will adjust its parameters to optimize performance based on your selections The Ltn menu cell shows the required spacing distance in inches or millimeters between the upstream and downstream transducers Use the Install Completed menu cell to inform the flow computer that you completed the physical mounting of the transducers You can define the empty pipe and zero flow values once the transducers are operational 2 20 Section 2 1010NFM 3J NOTE Before preceeding to mount transducers it is recommended that Section 3 HARD WARE INSTALLATION GUIDE be reviewed Refer to the Pick Install Xdcr menu and menu structure shown below for menu cell descriptions and details Use this menu cell to select the type of transducer to be installed These menu cells identify the spacing indices on the spacer bar You must use these settings to mount the transducer properly This menu cell shows the actual spacing distance required between the transducers Once you select the type use this menu cell to specify the transducer size This menu cell allows you to select a mounting mode Us
128. ar guide back in the same position it was in and retape it to the pipe Put a mounting strap around the pipe and engage an end into adjusting screw screw should be pointing up Position frame in the middle of area you have cleaned and centered on the pipe with its angled end facing away from where the other frame will sit and aligned with the edge and center marks on the guide Slide the mounting strap over it and under the clip if there is one and tighten with a screwdriver While tightening check to ensure that the center of the tapered roller is cen tered on the pipe Apply a 1 8 inch continuous bead of couplant compound down the center the long way of the contact surface of one of the transducers Place the transducer into one of the frames so that the couplant compound does not smear until it contacts the pipe Slide it in until it butts against the stop and while holding in place tighten the transducer clamping screw tight enough to hold firmly in place Do the same with the other transducer Connect the transducer cable ensuring that you have observed the upstream downstream orien tation in respect to the cable and the input jack on the flow computer If this is a dual channel unit make sure you are connecting the cables to the correct channel s input jacks Repeat this proce dure for the number index transducer Return to the menu and press en to finish the transducer install routine 3 10 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 3 1
129. arameters such as pipe and liquid tables Spacing Index Refers to the Number Index used by the flow computer to determine the space between the upstream and down stream transducers on clamp on systems Spacing Offset Fixed transducer offset assigned by the flow computer This can be overrid den by the installer TOTONT A totalizer pulse count function used for Batching or Sampling Transducer Clamp on flow sensors that the meter uses to measure the flow rate Vaer The meter s aeration percent output Vps The sonic propagation velocity of a pipe Vs The sonic velocity of a liquid 5 12 Section 5 1010NFM 3J 5 7 THE NEMA DUAL CHANNEL MENU CHART This section shows the 1010 Permanent Dual Channel Menu Chart The Dual Beam Flow Ch 1 2 Flow Ch 1 2 Flow Channel Setup menus are virtually identical The Reflexor and Flow Tube menus repeat the Clamp On menu except for the exclusion of menu cells only appropriate for clamp on transducers NOTE The Installation menu for single channel systems does not provide the Meter Type choices shown below THE METER TYPE MENU c Meter Type c DualChannel Flow gt gt Channel 1 c Clamp On c Channel Setup f C Flow Tube c Channel Setup c Reflexor c Channel Setup Channel 2 c same as Ch 1 c Dual Beam Flow Channel Path Setup cC Ch 1 2 Flow Channel 1 c Clamp on c Channel Setup t c Flow Tube c Channel Setu
130. as secessus nesen Pig passage detected optional i esses ZeroMatic ZeroMatic signal fault NOTE The time interval based Datalogger records the state of all the alarms at the selected report time only Therefore if an alarm condition resets before the report time it would not appear on the report Use Datalogger Events to log transient alarms This mode generates a report upon the detection of an alarm event To select Datalogger Data items To access the Datalogger Data option list press SI Move the cursor to a desired data item by pressing Q Oe en to select it Note that a plus sign appears before the item To de select Datalogger Data Move the cursor to the data item then press cur Note that this removes the plus sign from the item After selecting deselecting all desired items press lo leave the Datalogger Data option list 2 9 3 LOG TIME INTERVAL The Datalogger records a snapshot of conditions at each log time interval Datalogging uses a con siderable amount of RAM so only select short log intervals if it is fully justified NOTE The meter maps the first Datalogger report time to an even division of its clock Sub sequent reports will conform to the selected interval To set the Log Time Interval To access the Log Interval option list press Move the cursor to desired interval by pressing To store your selection press e 2 9 4 DATALOGGER EVENTS System 1010 offe
131. ases data scatter You should check the signal level Valc 96 item on the Diagnostic Menu Usually this is indicated by a low Valc 96 value less than 30 System 1010 does not exhibit inertia since it has no moving parts In addition it takes readings ten times per second Therefore it can detect and track very brief flow fluctuations that are beyond the response capability of some conventional meters This performance level is required for detecting very fast and short flow transients or for a fast response servo control loop application However you can use the damping and slewing controls to smooth the output response if you want the system to ignore rapid flow fluctuations or data scatter Data Drift Drift is a defined as a long term cyclical flow deviation resulting from the variation of liquid temperature or liquid sonic velocity Drift may be more noticeable when combined with a poor signal to noise ratio System 1010 is carefully designed to minimize the effects of drift There are no drift prone analog phase locked loop devices in the primary detection circuits In addition we use only the most stable plastics or steel to construct our transducers 5 3 Section 5 1010NFM 3J 5 4 FLOW CONDITIONS Very rarely are real world flow conditions uniform and predictable Therefore the 1010 operating sys tem provides a considerable degree of control over the stability agility of the flow rate output System 1010 is significantly more
132. ath This can improve performance with sonically attenu ative liquids or pipe materials We recommend using Direct mount for plastic pipes Compared to Direct mounting Reflect mount requires almost double the amount of a mounting length Therefore Direct mount may be the only option if the availability of mounting space is limited Upstream Pipe Transducer N x i m ise FLOW gt Sonic Path ee T i A Downstream EM Transducer DIRECT MOUNT Pipe shown in Top View for ease in visualizing sonic path 3 1 4 PREPARING THE PIPE 1 Pick a mounting location with the longest straight run You must have easy access to at least one side of your pipe The mounting location must remain full even at zero flow 2 Decide on your mounting mode Direct or Reflect Always use Reflect Mode whenever possible You may only need to use Direct Mode if your pipe is plastic 3 After receiving the spacing dimensions from the Installation Menu prepare the pipe surface De grease the surface if necessary and remove any grit corrosion rust loose paint etc Use abra sive material provided to provide a clean contact surface for the transducers 4 Refer to the next sections for illustrated instructions on how to locate each area to be cleaned and how to use each mounting option Please note that the instructions show vertical mounting for clarity purposes only Do not install transducers on the top of a pipe Pipe LA LLLA
133. by issuing the Create Name Site command Although you do not need to enter a site name to create a new site setup you have to provide one to save the site setup or to identify the source of logged data In this example we will use SITE1 for the site name To access the Channel Setup menu press then move the highlight down to Create Name Site Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Right Arrow amp Enter Creates a new Site Recall Site Setup No Sites Channel Enable No Site Security Off Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site Channel Setup Press Note that the cursor changes to a block which appears after a question mark This indicates that you have accessed the first character position of an eight character max alphanumeric entry field Section 1 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Recall Site Setup No Sites Channel Enable No Site Security Off Delete Site Setup No Site Save Rename Site This block cursor is currently placed at the first character position Channel Setup Press and hold A Note that the character position begins to scroll upward through the alphabet of capital letters Continue to scroll until block cursor shows S Press el NOTE The character S remains at the first character position and the block cursor moves to the second character position Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Right Arrow amp Enter Creates a new Site Recall Site Setup
134. ce the password The only way to deactivate Site Security without knowing the password is to return the unit to Siemens How ever the process the factory uses to remove Site Security will eliminate any existing Site Data as well The flowmeter will allow a F4 Reset Sequence when Security is active however it also contains a Menu Enable switch that allows you to inhibit this function see drawing 1010N 7 CAUTION MAKE CERTAIN THAT YOU RETAIN A COPY OF THE PASSWORD IN A SE CURE LOCATION To activate Site Security To access Site Security option list press To scroll the option list to On press Kl a then ENT Enter Code appears at the top of the display screen 2 4 Section 2 1010NFM 3J To select the first character use the numeric keys or press D KT To move the cursor to the first character position press eJ To move the cursor to the second character position press eJ Repeat the selection process for the second character Continue this process until all the required characters 8 max appear in the field To store code press e Confirm Code appears at top of the display screen Retype code exactly as described above Press en This moves the cursor to the Site Security option list To scroll the option list to Site Security On press D d Once you turn on Site Secu rity you must enter the correct code to turn it off To activate Site Security press en 2 1 5 HOW TO DELETE A SITE SET
135. cer while preserving their exact mounting location Transducer Clamping Screw Mounting Strap Mounting Frame Mounting Strap Adjusting Screw Ltn Reference Notch INSTALLATION DIRECT MODE WITH TRANSDUCERS MOUNTING FRAMES SPACER BAR Not Shown AND SPACING GUIDE For Direct Mode mounting you will use a spacer bar to establish the distance between transducers and a spacing guide to easily locate the transducers at the nine o clock and three o clock positions Should the distance between transducers be beyond the span of a spacer bar a measuring tape can be used The Mylar spacing guide comes in various lengths and widths to accommodate most pipe sizes see list below Spacing Guide P N 1012 145 1A 2 x 26 50 8 x 660 4 mm 1012 145 1 2 x 45 50 8 x 1143 0 mm 1012 145 2 4 x 81 101 6 x 2057 4 mm 1012 145 3 4 x 155 101 6 x 3937 0 mm Section 3 1010NFM 3J MYLAR SPACING GUIDE 1 Perform all the required menu steps up until the point where the flow computer issues the number index and prompts you to press to finish the transducer install routine Make a note of the number index displayed in the Pick Install menu Check to ensure that you have a matched set of transducers They both should have the same S N number but marked with either an A or B e g 100A and 100B 2 Temporarily position one of the frames on the pipe where you will be mounting it Ensure that this i
136. change The default is 10 seconds Enter any amount of time up to 60 seconds maximum To edit the default SmartSlew setting To access the SmartSlew option list press e three times Scroll the numeric list to the desired choice press DID To register the new value presse To select Time Average To access the Damping Control option list press To move the cursor down to Time Average press enr To enable Time Average entry press Use the numeric keys to type the new Time Average setting To register the new value press e 2 5 2 DEADBAND CONTROL Use Deadband Control to instruct the meter to report zero flow if the flow rate falls below a specified level usually a very low rate It will prevent the possibility of data scatter a natural result of digital computation from causing false totalizer accumulation during long non flowing periods Inspect the actual data scatter during zero flow conditions to find the proper deadband setting for your application To edit the default setting 0 000 To enable numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type in the desired rate using selected flow rate units To register the new value press enr 2 35 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 5 3 MEMORY FAULT SET Certain situations e g an empty pipe or excessive aeration will interrupt data production Use Memory Fault Set to select the meter response to such an interruption The Fault setting default will zero th
137. channel model Note that two columns one on the left hand side and the other on right hand side divide the screen The first left hand item Meter Type is highlighted white type on black Meter Type allows you to choose a meter configuration from the highlighted right hand column list With single channel models the only option is Single Channel The next left hand selection is Meter Facili ties Use the Meter Facilities menu to set global meter options and controls 1 7 2 HOW TO ENTER DATA The left hand column shows the menu cells described previously Another way to think about left hand column items is to consider them menu questions Then you can see that the right hand column answers these questions Right hand column answers can be e Another series of menu cells may become left column items when selected e Anitem from a scrollable option list e g a class of liquids e Anumeric entry e g a pipe outer diameter e Analphanumeric string e g a site name 1 5 Section 1 1010NFM 3J Selecting Items from an Option List Examine the screen below It shows how to use an option list to select a liquid for your application How to access this menu will be explained later Note that the menu name Application Data appears highlighted on lower left of the screen Note also that the menu cell Liquid Class is highlighted the right hand column shows the answer Water 20C 68F Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channe
138. correct Liquid Type Estimated Vs Consult Vs Database for liquids not on meter menu Select Recommended Transducer HP for Steel Only Use first choice for Universals if possible Ensure Transducer Type amp Size match programming Ensure transducer serial numbers match each other INSTALLATION TRANSDUCER MOUNT GUIDELINES OUOUO D DDODUOLD Install Transducers Reflect Direct as recommended by meter Use assigned spacing positions Use Reflect Mount whenever possible Not permitted on plastic pipes Avoid placing transducers downstream of flow obstructions pressure drops elbows Mount upstream of Orifice Plates Turbines Valves T s Allow a minimum of 10 diameters of straight pipe upstream of Transducers More following multi elbows If 10 diameters is available mount Reflect within 2 diameters in Plane of Elbow on outside of bend DO NOT mount Transducers on top and or bottom of horizontal pipe Ensure pipe is clean and smooth remove external scale loose or flaking paint Use appropriate Coupling Compound for application see charts below Avoid mounting on pipe seams Connect UP Cable to Upstream Transducer closest to source of flow and vice versa 2 85 Section 2 1010NFM 3J START UP LDDDDUOLD Ensure pipe is FULL flowing or not Select Install Complete INSTALL to Invoke Initial Makeup routine Verify Measured Vs is accurate for liquid type amp temperature Consult Vs
139. ct the lowest flow range rate that is at least two times higher than the maximum flow expected at this application At Install Completed for new installations press the Right Arrow select Install and then select Yes Press the lt ENT gt key The meter is now operational and the display will show flow by pressing the lt MENU gt key 74 Section 7 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Key Install to start flow measurement Transducer Size Flow Range GAL MIN Install Completed Spectra Graph Install Xdcr 7 9 THE SPECTRA DISPLAY SCREEN The Spectra Graph provides a powerful tool to determine if the installation has achieved an adequate margin of operation It also eliminates the possible effects of mechanical vibration and external RFI Radio Frequency Interference Mechanical vibration and external RFI can cause other types of Dop pler flowmeters to be inaccurate The Spectra Graph screen provides keypad control keys that allow adjustments of application dependent parameters if required while observing the results of these adjustments Application dependent parameters are the Low and High Limit Cursors and the Noise Cursor In most cases only the Noise Cursor will be required to be adjusted To display the Spectra Graph position the highlight over Spectra Graph and use the lt Right and Down Arrows gt to select Yes The Spectra Graph display shows the results of the Fast Fourier Transform FFT pe
140. d Arithmetic operating modes only 2 10 1 ANALOG OUTPUT SETUP numeric entry System 1010 provides current voltage and pulse rate analog outputs Analog Output Setup allows you to assign data functions for these signals The flow computer s terminal strip contains the analog output terminals 2 58 Section 2 1010NFM 3J System 1010 Analog Outputs lo Isolated current 4 to 20 mA varies in proportion to an assigned data function Vo DC voltage 0 to 10 Vdc varies in proportion to an assigned data function Pgen TTL logic 0 to 5000 Hz varies in proportion to an assigned data function Analog Out Setup Data Categories Vfo Spanned volumetric mass flow rate Vfab Spanned unsigned flow magnitude Vs Spanned liquid sonic velocity Valc Receive signal amplitude Vaer Relative degree of liquid aeration cavitation Vsg Spaned specific gravity Viscosity System liquid viscosity T1 Current liquid temperature lin1 lin2 Represents a re transmit of the analog input signals e g Pressure and Temp inputs can be transmitted on the 4 20 mA output lin3 lin4 Same as lin1 and lin2 above but only available for opera tion in Multi Beam and Arithmetic modes NOTE For Multi Channel meters refer to drawing 1010MN 7 for details For Expanded I O modules refer to drawing 1010N 7 7 and Addendum 1010FMA 14 for details Table To Determine Proper I O Installation Drawings Model Number an
141. d I O Module Installation Drawing and Page Number 1010N 1010N 2 7 Sheet 2 of 2 1010N with 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module 1010N 7 7 Sheet 2 of 3 1010DN 1010N 2 7 Sheet 2 of 2 1010DN with 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module 1010N 7 7 Sheet 2 of 3 Note For Ultra Precsion transducers see 1010N 7 7 sheet 3 of 3 Assigning lo Output Functions The lo analog output is a self powered isolated 4 20mA DC signal that varies linearly in relation to a selected data function CAUTION Do not connect to a powered loop To assign a function for the current output From Analog Out Setup press wice to access the lo option list To move the cursor to the desired data function press DIO To store selection press ent 2 59 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Assigning Vo Output Functions The Vo analog output is a 0 10 VDC signal that varies linearly in relation to a selected function To assign a function to the voltage output To access the Vo option list press To move the cursor to the desired data function press DIDI To store selection press Assigning Pgen Output Functions The Pgen analog output is a buffered TTL compliant pulse rate signal similar to the pulse outputs of flowmeters such as turbines It varies linearly from 0 5000 Hz in relation to a selected data function To assign a function to the Pgen output To access the Pgen option list press To move the cursor to the desired data function press DID
142. d by this model Select data entry and meter output in either English default or metric units Customize the default pipe and transducer tables to suit your requirements Output display erase and select a memory management method for the Datalogger Determine the amount of memory available Verify Adjust the analog output voltage and current using a multimeter Verify Adjust the analog pulse output using a frequency counter Calibrate the RTD temperature sensors Set the system clock calendar Obtain detailed software hardware identification This menu allows you to specify default Siemens Dual Path SITE 1 measurement n cil Select Default Units for all Menus This menu allows you This menu allows to create or edit pipe and transducer tables Datalogger Control This menu allows you we Memory Control Analog Output Trim4 4 to work with and select a Datalogger storage method This menu allows you to calibrate the RTD Temperature Sensors Preferred Units English Table Setups RTD Calibrate Backlight System Info Clock Set 9 02 99 09 30 06 RS 232 Setup 9600 Odd Meter Facilities This menu shows detailed information you to view the number of data memory bytes This menu allows you to fine tune the analog outputs This menu allows you to set the system clock calendar This menu allows you to select RS 232 port pa
143. der most accurately represents the upstream pipe condition Reducer Norm Entry Header Inlet Intrusions Application Data Pipe Configuration Menu Structure Application Data Pipe Configuration gt Fully Developed Change to Upstream 1 Elbow Piping Dbl Elbow Dbl Elbow Valve Expander Reducer Norm Entry Header Inlet Intrusions Anomaly Diams xxxx numeric entry Default 2 19 Section 2 1010NFM 3J PIPE CONFIGURATION OPTION LIST DEFINITIONS Fully Developed Fully Developed flow as would be expected for very long straight pipe runs or installation downstream of a flow condition 1 Elbow Single 90 degree Elbow upstream of transducer installation Dbl Elbow Double out of plane Elbows upstream of transducer installation Dble Elbow Double in plane Elbows upstream of transducer installation Valve To Be Determined Expander Pipe expansion upstream of transducer installation Reducer Pipe reduction upstream of transducer installation Norm Entry To Be Determined Header Inlet Header or pipe manifold upstream of transducer installation Intrusions To Be Determined 2 4 THE PICK INSTALL XDCR MENU Use this menu after creating a new site setup in the Channel Setup menu and defining the pipe parameters in the Pipe Data menu Based on pipe data and optionally application data entries the Pick Install Xdcr menu automatically identifies the most suitable transducers for the
144. dex pin with the cable connector pointing away from the pin Move the transducer right until the pin stops it Hold it in this position and move the transducer clamping screw over the transducer and tighten Insert the other index pin into the index hole see Step 1 on the other track marked Direct Mode Spacing Insert the second transducer with its cable connector pointing away from the pin between the track rails on the right side of the pin and move the transducer left until it s stopped by the pin and then follow the same procedure as with the first transducer 7 Mark a generous area around the transducers where they contact the pipe with a pencil or chalk Make a mark showing the center between the tracks on the mylar guide Release the tension on the transducers and remove them Loosen the chains and rotate the track assembly on the pipe so you can gain access to the areas marked 8 Prepare the area you marked by degreasing the surface if needed and removing any grit corro sion rust loose paint or surface irregularities with the abrasive pipe conditioning material provided 9 Revolve the tracks on the pipe into the position they were originally in by using the edge of the mylar guide as a stop for both the upper and lower tracks and the mark on the guide to center that track This time before installing each transducer apply a 1 8 inch continuous bead of couplant com pound along the center the long way of the contact surface of t
145. e flow rate output and declare an alarm on a flow display screen Datalogger report and an assigned relay output For some applications occasional temporary Fault conditions may be a normal part of the process and would not require an alarm response The system offers a Memory operating mode to support such an application Memory Mode suspends the system s Fault response by preventing the flow outputs from dropping to zero for the interval specified in the Memory Delay menu cell During the Memory duration the meter will maintain the last valid flow reading measured before the onset of the fault condition The default Memory Delay is 60 seconds You may select any duration from 3 to 604 800 seconds one week To select Memory mode To access the Memory Fault Set option list press Move the cursor down to Memory by pressing II To make selection press This moves the highlight to Memory Delay sec Memory Delay sec Selecting Memory activates the suppressed Memory Delay menu cell It allows you to specify the number of seconds that the meter maintains its last valid flow reading When the memory delay ex pires it triggers the fault alarm response described previously To specify the Memory Delay To enable numeric entry press e Use the number keys to type the delay in seconds To register the new value press enr 2 5 4 REFLEXOR ZERO FAULT SET OPTION Reflexor Mode only NOTE The Zero Fault Set menu option only app
146. e 29 HF gt 0 120 Automatic Adjustment Procedure e Inthe Site Setup Data Menu press the lt Down Arrow gt and scroll to the HF menu cell Press the lt Right Arrow gt and a pop up Manual prompt will appear e Press the Up or Down Arrow to select Automatic then press lt ENT gt e The current measured correction value is displayed see below e Press ENT again to install this correction value which will now appear next to the HF menu cell NOTE The value shown in the Automatic pop up prompt can not be changed and is for user information only Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G fx drive 29 fx drive 29 N burst length 5 N burst length 5 Ltnin Ltn in 2 Vf max CU Adjustment Vf max CU gt Automatic Vs max m s gt Automatic Vs max m s 0 026 Vs min m s Vs min m s oe Samples Cycle Samples Cycle HF gt 0 000 HF gt 0 026 e lf you decide not to use the Automatic selection press any key other than lt ENT gt to abort the operation 2 71 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 11 6 THE TEST FACILITIES MENU The Test Facilities menu provides commands for system analysis and recovery The most useful for the end user are Makeup and Graph Using these routines under the supervision of our technical support staff will help us to provide technical analysis and solutions Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Right arrow invokes an InProces
147. e Flow Rate Create a site setup to store the flow tube installation parameters Enter liquid Parameters optional default water 68 F Complete the Flow Tube install procedure 6 3 2 SETUP PROCEDURE From the Channel Select screen press Je access the option list then press D to move the cursor to FlowTube if required Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Choose Channel 1 Flowmeter Type Channel 1 Clamp on Channel 2 FlowTube Reflexor Dual Channel Flow To select Flow Tube press jew This enables the Flow Tube menu Press to access Channel Setup menu 6 4 Section 6 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2Channel 1 Scroll saved Site Setup list and Enter Recall Site Setup No Sites Channel Enable No Create Name Site Site Security Off Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site Channel Setup Move the Highlight by pressing D to Create Name Site To access the site name field press e In this example we will simultaneously create and name the site FLOW1 Use the character lists to select a site name as shown below Siemens 2Channel 1 Right Arrow amp Enter Create a new Site Recall Site Setup No Sites Channel Enable No Site Security Off Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site Channel Setup To create a new site and register the site name press ET FLOW1 Note that the name now appears in the site name field on the upper right of the display and in the Sa
148. e Reflect Mode whenever possible Transducer SizeP Xdcr Mount Mode Spacing Offset Number Index Spacing Method Ltn Value in Install Complete di Eoi This menu cell indicates the model number of the appropriate spacer bar for Spacer Bar PB 1 your transducers and 0 spacing requirements Track 1012TAH 0 565 Pick Install Xdcr After the transducers are Use this menu cell to inform the meter that you have completed the transducer mounting After the transducers are operating you can use this menu cell to set the operating you can use this menu cell to manually set the zero flow correction empty pipe threshold 2 21 Section 2 1010NFM 3J PICK INSTALL XDCR MENU STRUCTURE Pick Install Xdcr Transducer Modelc 991 Universal 1011 Universal 1011 Hi Precision Transducer Size gt 1011 Universal 991 Universal 1011H High Precision f 0A 0 1 2A 2 3A 3 4A 4 5A 5 Xdcr Mount Mode c Direct ae Reflect Spacing Offset gt at Minimum Nominal st Maximum Number Index c 4 generated Spacing Method c Spacer Bar P N c auto P N generation Ltn Value in c 2 00 generated Install Completed gt e No Yes Yes indicates successful install Install Install Transfer Empty Pipe Set gt 2 MTYmatic 1 Set Empty Actual MTY Zero Flow Adjust gt y AutoZero Reflect mount only ZeroClr f Reversamatic Actual Zero ZeroMatic
149. e check the frequency counter to make sure that it is now reading 1 kHz THE RTD CALIBRATE MENU optional The RTD Calibrate Menu appears on all 1010N models Use this menu to calibrate the 991T or 1011TN RTD Temperature Sensors to an external standard It is important to note that the RTD temperature sensors are factory calibrated for high accuracy We recommend that before deciding to perform the calibration check the current RTD reading in Diagnostics Liquid Data You may find that you do not even need to calibrate the sensor In any case make sure that the temperature reading stabilizes before proceeding further The RTD Calibrate menu allows you to perform an external calibration which can be accomplished either by data entry of the current RTD temperature or by a 32 F 0 C Ice Bath procedure You can switch between the intrinsic and external calibration modes at any time NOTE If you perform an external temperature calibration you should mark and record the location of each connector and sensor cable Once you have re calibrated the tem perature sensors changing the sensor connector orientation established during the procedure may void the calibration To access the RTD Calibrate menu press 4 10 Section 4 1010NFM 3J RTD CALIBRATE MENU STRUCTURE Single Channel 1010 RTD Calibrate Factory User Cal m Factory User Cal 4 6 1 RTD CALIBRATION BY DATA ENTRY The RTD Calibrate menu allows you to adjust the
150. e do not allow the size of the Installation Menu to intimidate you Almost all menu cells will contain default parameters and will not require any additional action To obtain operation you will only need to access the menu cells for required parameters such as pipe data Obtaining accurate flow rate data will take less than five minutes Application conditions may require you to mount the transducers using the adjacent mounting method as described and shown in paragraph 7 4 7 2 SELECT A TRANSDUCER SET FOR USE BY REFLEXOR The transducer recommended for use by Reflexor is any of the currently available Spectra transduc ers For general purpose dedicated use this is the 191N1S transducer set Alternate transducers are any of the 1011 size C Universal 991 size 2 and 3A including High and Very High Temperature versions along with the 1011 High Precision size A3 and B1 The maximum sensitivity will be obtained with use of the 191N1S transducers Transducer models are available for submersible and extended tempera ture applications 7 1 Section 7 1010NFM 3J 7 3 SELECT THE TRANSDUCER MOUNTING LOCATION Select a mounting location that has a fully developed flow profile Do not locate the transducer so that sonic energy enters a region that is not representative of the flow velocities at the measuring location Use the figure below as a guide to select the proper mounting location Incorrect Transducer Placement Correct Transducer Placeme
151. e includes 9 pin and 25 pin connectors to accommodate both types of IBM compatible serial ports A PC commu nication program such as Terminal Windows 3 x or HyperTerminal Windows 95 98 NT 2000 XP serves as the data entry interface These programs reproduce the menu screens that would appear on the system s graphic screen In fact the example screens in this manual are actual HyperTerminal screen captures Once the serial interface is established the site setup procedure for blind and graphic display systems are identical You could choose to program a graphic display system using a PC and a communications program However note that for models with a local display screen the serial interface cable is an option NOTE You can use a DOS based communications program also Make sure that your PC is loading the ANSI SYS driver via your Config sys file Set the program s RS 232 param eters to match those of the flowmeter see HyperTerminal example screen on the fol lowing pages NOTE Many newer Laptop PC s are not equipped with serial ports having USB ports only These PC s will require a USB RS 232 adaptor that can be purchased commercially Not all of these adaptors are suitable Siemens has found the best performance is achieved with the adaptor from Radio Shack Part 26 183 THE RS 232 INTERFACE CABLE The physical connection between the flow computer and your PC is accomplished using a serial interface cable part number 1015CPC N
152. e liquid signal Use Direct Mode instead Press ENT UP Arrow DOWN Arrows or LEFT Arrow to abort install routine Continue programming other site data in anticipation of re solving the difficulty later Call technical support for help if necessary Low Signal Press During the Initial Makeup the meter decides that the level of the receive ENT signal is insufficient for proper operation Some reasons for low signal are Invoking Install Completed on an empty pipe Coupling compound insufficient not applied or evaporated A disconnected or broken transducer cable You need to condition the pipe at the mounting location Flush out Large air bubbles The Xdcr cables are defective or not connected to the correct channel The Set Empty routine performed when pipe was NOT actually empty Detection Mode If you locate and correct the improper condition immediately press lt ENT gt to resume the installation procedure Otherwise press the LEFT Arrow to abort the installation and conduct a thorough investigation Appears if the meter cannot complete an Initial Makeup It means that the pipe and or liquid conditions do not permit a receive signal that meets the flow detection standards The system will not be able to operate Attempt to improve operating conditions by reinstalling the transducers at a different spacing offset or even at a different location on the pipe In addition switching fr
153. e liquid to be measured NOTE Transducer pairs must have matching serial numbers 5 3 3 FLOW VELOCITY RANGE System 1010 s flow velocity range with clamp on transducers is at least 40 ft sec regardless of the diameter of the pipe Depending on application conditions this range can extend to over 100 ft sec This measurement range is greater than needed for virtually any application For optimum accuracy at very low flow rates and for small line sizes consider using our 992DFT or 1011FT flow tubes 5 3 4 OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Our system performance specifications are based on acceptable liquid sonic conductivity and other pertinent application conditions The diversity that characterizes liquid flow makes it impossible for us to cover all possible application conditions that have the potential to reduce performance Performance 5 2 Section 5 1010NFM 3J within specifications depends primarily on the receive signal s signal to noise ratio and amplitude The information below may point to application conditions that could reduce system performance below its normally high level 5 3 5 ACCURACY Although system accuracy is exceptional over a wide turndown ratio at extremely low flow rates a small zero offset becomes a high percentage of actual flow Obviously the ultimate accuracy will be obtained by performing an on site flow calibration A flow calibration can increase system accuracy to between 0 3 to 0 5 depending
154. e list then select the closest type available If necessary call Siemens Customer Service for additional help The system default Liner Material is None If the pipe does not have a liner press the Down Arrow twice to bypass to the next two menu cells The Liner Material option list offers a selection of common liner materials To select a Liner Material To access the Liner Material option list press To scroll to the required Liner Material press DID To register selection press en 2 2 7 LINER THICKNESS If you specified a pipe liner in the Liner Material menu cell then use this menu cell to set its exact thickness in appropriate units English or Metric To enter a Liner Thickness To enable numeric entry press Use the number keys to type the exact line thickness value To register the data press e 2 3 THE APPLICATION DATA MENU This Menu becomes available after picking a Meter Type Measurement Channel and Measurement Technology Use of this menu is optional CAUTION An erroneous Viscosity entry could affect the meter s intrinsic calibration Do not alter the default viscosity value of your liquid unless you are sure of your data Use the Application Data menu to edit default settings to match your application When you specify a Liquid Class the meter will adjust its operation to accommodate the liquid s estimated sonic velocity viscosity and specific gravity If necessary you can edit each liqu
155. e to the method used to simulate flow data Vs m s Signal mV Valc Vaer Alarm Status Note that the Flow menu cell immediately reflects the AnCal entry Over time the Total display will also AnCal GAL MIN A HiFlow GAL MIN E increase LoFlow GAL MIN Flow Data To activate AnCal Move the cursor to the AnCal menu cell by pressing QA Press to enable numeric entry Note that an equal sign appears before the number Type the desired flow rate using current rate units e g 120 00 GPM Note that the Flow menu cell now reflects the artificial rate Move the cursor away from the menu cell by pressing m lio turn AnCal off 2 66 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 11 3 THE APPLICATION INFO MENU This menu provides a live display of the basic timing data used by meter during operation TN uSec Siemens 2 Channel 1 1 Time between transit and receive TN uSec TL uSec DeltaT uSec Burst Sec Accepted Last Makeup Re Start Makeup Status Measurement Application Info APPLICATION INFO MENU ITEMS The total elapsed time between the transmission and reception of a sonic pulse TL uSec The total time a sonic pulse takes to travel through the liquid DeltaT nSec This is the instantaneous result of subtracting the down from the up transit times NOTE This will appear to be more active than dampened flow readings Burst Sec Number of transmissions
156. ears on the display if the selected Channel is the Reflexor mode The System 1010 Reflexor declares a Fault when the receive signal drops below the Doppler detection threshold To change the Reflexor response to a Zero Flow indication rather than a Fault select Zero in the Zero Fault Set menu option Note the following a FAULT When selected the system will declare the Reflexor channel to be in Fault and the flowmeter will indicate F on the display screen Note that when a new Reflexor channel is created the Fault option is the default mode Also note that the sum or difference channel will also be declared to be in Fault b ZERO When selected the Reflexor channel will be declared to be at Zero Flow instead of in Fault and the flowmeter will indicate 0 00 on the display screen 2 36 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 6 THE FLOW TOTAL UNITS MENU The Flow Total Units menu is available after selecting a meter type and measurement channel Use the Flow Total Units menu to select volumetric flow units and an associated time base for the energy and flow rate and total outputs After making your selections a view only menu cell shows the resultant scaling Another menu cell lets you adjust the output resolution by selecting a display range This system provides three totalizer display modes POSFLOW Positive forward flow total only NEGFLOW Negative reverse flow total only NETFLOW The net of the Positive and Negative flow defaul
157. ecide to use numbers or a decimal point in the site name you can type these characters directly from the keypad 2 5 Section 2 1010NFM 3J To Save or Rename a Site Setup To access the first character position press To select a character press O a then S to highlight to next character position To select the second character press 0 a Repeat this process to select all the characters 8 max To save the site data present in Active Memory press 2 2 THE PIPE DATA MENU This menu becomes available after picking a Meter Type Measurement Channel and Measurement Technology We recommend that you edit the Pipe Data immediately after creating a new Site Setup The Pipe Data menu allows you to define the application s pipe parameters Select a pipe from one of the meter s stored pipe tables see menu structure below or input the pipe size and description manually Manual entries include Pipe Material Outer Diameter OD and pipe Wall Thickness Liner Material and Liner Thickness entries are included to support pipes with liners The meter requires the pipe outer diameter OD and wall thickness to operate You must define these parameters to com plete the installation The pipe table includes descriptions for over sixty standard pipes plus any user entered pipes see Meter Facilities To use these presets first pick a Pipe Class e g ASA Stainless Steel then pick a pipe size within that class e g 48810 When you selec
158. ell reversing the display colors for that cell white type on black Highlighted Data The right hand column shows the current value highlighted Pressing the Right Arrow provides access to an option list or numeric field where you can change the current value as required Menu Cell A menu cell is an individual location within a menu in this case Pipe Data that stores a parameter either a numeric entry or an option list selection Menu Cell Data The right hand column shows the current value stored by left hand column menu cell The Pipe Data Menu includes option list items and numeric entries Current Selected The highlighted bar at the bottom of the screen shows the name of the menu Menu that you are accessing e g Pipe Data 1 7 HOW TO USE THE INSTALLATION MENU This section introduces the System 1010 Installation Menu It explains how to access and leave the Installation Menu and how to enter site data The Installation Menu consists of sub menus each pro viding individual menu locations menu cells that store site data For convenience this manual refers to sub menus simply as menus e g the Pipe Data Menu Shown below is the Clamp on Full Site Setup screen for Channel 1 of a dual channel meter Single and four channel systems are identical Siemens 2 Channel 1 Create Name Recall Enable amp Delete Site Channel Setup Pipe Data Application Data Pick Install Xdcr Operation Adjust Flow Tota
159. em press Cl This brings up a Flow Display Screen Siemens 2Channel 1 Channel 1 FLOW GAL MIN 89 68 gt 0 20 TOTAL KGAL Vs vfo 4 dio 9 Once your site has successfully installed you can press D Do scroll between the avail able display screens The meter is now operational and the display will show flow by pressing the lt MENU gt key Now that you are familiar with the 1010N setup take the time to read the information about the Installa tion Menu in Section 2 Becoming acquainted with the various flowmeter setups in the Main Menu will help further your understanding of the 1010N Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 9 1010WX CLAMP ON LIQUID FLOWMETERS The 1010WX flowmeter model numbers are listed below 1010WX Series Flowmeters 1010WX 1010DWX 1010MWX 1010WX METER TYPES The 1010WX series flowmeters are available in Single Dual Path and Multi Path versions The flowmeters may include a display providing flow rate diagnostics data and keypad interface to access on screen software setup menus Safety agency approved 1010WX series flowmeters have hazardous area certification as indicated in the label example below NOTE Graphic displays and local keypads are only available as options The standard 1010WX is not equipped with a graphic display or local keypad Refer to Appendix B in this field manual for hardware and software requirements for programming these models 1010WX FLOWMETER LABEL Blank unless flowmete
160. ensitive and precise Its contribution to the performance of your meter can be as important as that of the liquid flow sensors Please consult the installation drawings for details on physical installation and wiring of the RTD In order to produce the best possible tracking of the true liquid temperature try to make your installation conform to the notes on the installation drawing and these following tips e Prepare the pipe surface by removing paint to expose bare metal and by smoothing out any re maining rough spots e Use the thermal couplant compound CC 117 between the face of the RTD element and the pipe surface to improve the conductivity of the metal to metal contact e Keep the RTD out of direct sunlight or other non pipe sources of heat or cold that may affect their temperature sensing The foam insulator supplied helps in this regard but consider using addi tional pipe insulation for all installations exposed to extreme ambient conditions Consider mount ing the RTD under the pipe in order to keep it out of direct sunlight e In installations where RTD elements are exposed to harsh conditions such as condensation salt spray etc use CC 110 couplant compound to coat the connection between the cable and the RTD sensor Consult Installation Drawing 991TN 7 for details e Be sure to install the supply RTD Sensors see diagram on previous page in the appropriate locations e Be sure to correctly indicate where the flow is being
161. er on As soon as you apply power type the character three times The prompt fed Y8 7 8 3 978 Fd appears at the top of the screen Press the Down Arrow Note that the prompt switches to Le SEV BP wal 91 3 Press the Right Arrow and then the Down Arrows to switch the option list to I Led TT EP EA 3 4 Press lt ENT gt to clear all Saved Site Data Datalogger Data user created Pipe Data and Transducer Data 5 To restore operation press MENU to access the Installation Menu Create a new site setup or recall a stored site setup Reselect any Meter Facilities items e g RS 232 setup parameters B 9 Appendix 1010NFM 3J APPENDIX C ENGINEERING DRAWINGS Flow Computer Drawings 1010N 7 1010N 8 1010DN 7 1010DN 8 1010N 5 7 1010WX 7 1010WX 8 1010WXC5 8 1010N 5D 7 1010N 2 7 1010N 7 7 4 Channel Drawings 1010MN 7 1010MN 8 1010MWX 7 1010N 8M 7 Installation Drawing 1010 Series Single Channel Flow Computer Outline Dimensions 1010 Series Single Channel Flow Computer Installation Drawing 1010 Series Dual Channel Flow Computer Outline Dimensions 1010 Series Dual Channel Flow Computer Installation Drawing Analog Input Module Installation Drawing 1010 Series Single Dual Channel Flow Computer Outline Dimensions 1010 Series Flow Computer Outline Dimensions 1010 Series Flow Computer Installation Drawing Analog Input Module Installation Drawing I O Module Installation Wiring E
162. erial Temperature Range Max Pressure CPVC O F to 200F 15 C to 90 C 150 psig 10 3 bar Kynar PVDF OF to 275 F 15 C to 135 C 150 psig 10 3 bar Teflon PFA O F to 250 F 15 C to 120 C 100 psig 7 0 bar 316 SS size 1 40 F to 400 F 40 C to 204 C 5200 psig 350 bar 316 SS size 2 40 F to 400 F 40 C to 204 C 4200 psig 240 bar Maximum specifications may be reduced depending on the liquid and operating temperature Flow Tube Material Size amp Flow Range Ratings Material Flow Range CPVC 0 to 5 GPM 0 to 20 LPM CPVC 0 to 25 GPM 0 to 95 LPM PVDF 0 to 5 GPM 0 to 20 LPM PVDF 0 to 25 GPM 0 to 95 LPM PFA 0 to 5 GPM 0 to 20 LPM PFA 0 to 16 GPM 0 to 60 LPM 316 SS 316 SS NIe P PjA hy 0 to 10 GPM 0 to 40 LPM 0 to 30 GPM 0 to 115 LPM 6 1 3 FLOW TUBE MOUNTING LOCATION Consider the following guidelines when choosing a Flow Tube mounting location a The flow tube must be mounted horizontally with its inlet and outlet facing upward This minimizes the possibility of trapped air bubbles that could interfere with transducer signals b For the best flow profile locate the flow tube downstream from the center of the longest available straight run Make sure to locate the inlet upstream relative to the outlet DO NOT select a location immediately downstream from
163. ers for critical applications participate in our training programs Another alternative is to commission our trained professionals to start up the system for you 5 1 Section 5 1010NFM 3J 5 3 PIPE CONSIDERATIONS FOR CLAMP ON TRANSDUCER Clamp on flow transducers operate on any round pipe that conducts sound Suitable pipe materials include most metals plastics glass and mandrel wound FRP Pipes with a fine grain structure e g carbon and stainless steel conduct sound more freely than cast iron ductile iron or copper pipes Nevertheless all are usually acceptable Unsuitable pipes include concrete or other non homoge neous materials Pipe liners are acceptable if they are sonically conductive and bonded solidly to the inner wall of the pipe The system operates successfully on pipes with cement liners that are spun onto the pipe interior to exclude any air bubbles Pipes with smoothly applied bituminous and epoxy coatings are also acceptable Plastic liners are universally acceptable if they are in intimate contact with the inner wall and not merely slipped within the pipe 5 3 1 PIPE DIMENSIONS Controlotron manufactures transducer assemblies to service pipes from 0 25 to 360 in outer diam eter During the transducer install procedure the flow computer will recommend transducer sizes based on the site data that you enter Pipes with OD to Wall thickness OD W ratios greater than 10 to 1 are ideal applications Operation on p
164. es etc Highlight this item then press the Right Arrow to enable numeric entry Type desired simulated flow rate Be aware of the units prefix K M etc NOTE AnCal remains active only while you remain in this menu cell HiFlow GAL MIN Most positive expected flow rate for application adjustable LoFlow GAL MIN Most negative expected flow rate for application adjustable Vs m s This menu cell shows the current sonic velocity in m s If you move the cursor to this menu cell you will note that it switches from the usual arrow gt to a question mark This indicates that you can increase the reading by pressing the key for coarse adjustment or the 1 key for fine adjustment or reduce the reading by pressing the key for coarse adjustment or the 2 key for fine adjustment Sonic velocity Vs adjustment is a diagnostic tool intended for our technicians or experienced users only Improper use will affect the meter accuracy 2 65 Section 2 1010NFM 3J HiFlow and LoFlow The HiFlow and LoFlow menu cells allow you to enter maximum and minimum expected flow rates based on current operating conditions Under normal circumstances you should never need to change these settings It is possible however that a Controlotron customer service engineer may ask you to edit these settings during a support session In such a case a Hight Arrow at the menu cell enables numeric entry Important Note A cautio
165. es applications that require a non linear meter calibration You can enter correction factors for up to ten significant points over the entire measurement range This is accom plished by a Selecting up to 10 separate calibration points by entering a raw un calibrated flow rate b Entering a negative or positive correction for each calibration point that you select 2 48 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Like the Kc slope correction described in the previous section you locate critical flow rate points by comparing flow total data taken simultaneously from the 1010N and a reference meter whose accu racy meets the required standard Again it is important to note that you must allow both meters to accumulate flow total data for long enough to average out any differences due to flow fluctuation be tween the meter locations Compare the two flow total readings to identify up to ten separate points termed raw flow rates where there are significant deviations between System 1010N and the reference meter Calculate correction factors either negative or positive percentages for up to ten points along the flow range For example entering 0 1 for point 1 produces a negative 0 196 change in the meter output whenever the system measures the raw flow rate specified for point 1 etc The valid range for each percent correction is from 50 to 50 If you enter a value outside of this range the flow computer will set the calibration factor to the near
166. est limit Use these to match System 1010N s output with the reference meter s response curve Selected calibration points must increase in magnitude from point 1 to point 10 or the last point that you wish to calibrate NOTE You must enter the raw flow rates in ascending order To perform a MultiPoint Calibration To access the Calibrate Flow Rate option list press Move the cursor up to MultiPoint then press enr This selects the MultiPoint calibration screen which shows Point point 1 selected Indicated Rate shows current rate for point 1 Correction amount of correction applied either or percentage Press m to move to the Indicated Rate field then fto enable numeric entry Use the numeric keys to type a flow rate for point 1 then ee The highlight moves to the 96 Correction field for point 1 Press 3 to enable numeric entry Use the numeric keys to type the required 96 correction for point 1 Press en The highlight returns to the Point field To enable numeric entry press C inen type 2 for the second calibration point The cursor moves to the point 2 Indicated Rate field Use the numeric keys to type a flow rate for point 42 The value entered here must be of a greater magnitude than the value entered for point 1 Press en The cursor moves to the 96 Correction field 2 49 Section 2 1010NFM 3J To enable numeric entry press er Use the numeric
167. eter chan nel follow the instructions outlined below 1 Establish communication with the flowmeter at 9600 baud or less 2 Disable all channels select Channel Disable menu cell then Yes if they are actively mea suring flow 3 Selectthe desired default channel for download of the UniMass table In HyperTerminal type cv 0 for Channel 1 cv 1 for Channel 2 cv 2 for the virtual channel of a dual beam system or cv 4 for 4 Beam systems 4 Selectthe Send Text File command from the HyperTerminal menu and proceed to download the UniMass grid file Enable channel operation then select Table Active then Yes for the Changing Temp amp Vs table 2 3 3 HOW TO SELECT A PIPE TEMPERATURE RANGE This menu cell informs the flow computer about the expected temperatures that the transducers will be subjected to during operation The default setting 30 F to 225 F corresponds with the rated tempera ture range of our standard 991 or 1011 series transducers The other selections provide higher upper limits of 375 F and 450 F respectively If you know that the pipe temperature will exceed 250 F at the transducer mounting lo cation please use this menu cell to select the appropriate range This will allow the flow computer to restrict its transducer recommendations to the appropriate environmentally rated types To select a temperature range To access the option list press To highlight the desired range press To register y
168. eters after a fault condition interrupts operation Installation Menu The meter s overall menu structure Allows you to define all aspects of the meter s operation Interface m s Refers to an alarm function that declares the passage of a liquid interface by a comparison of the relative sonic velocities of the two liquids LAPTOT Refers to a system function that freezes the Totalizer display while the Totalizer continues to update its registers continued 5 11 Section 5 TERM 1010NFM 3J EXPLANATION Local Display Refers to the 1010N s integral display screen Menu Sub sections of the Installation Menu that you to define specific operational functions e g RS 232 Setup Menu Cell A location within a Menu where you define either a single numeric value or option list selection that supports the Sub Menu s function Certain view only menu cells show reference data appropriate to the current application NEGFLOW Totalizer mode for negative flow total only NETFLOW Totalizer mode that combines positive and negative flow totals NOTOT System function that disables the internal Totalizer Number Index Computed transducer spacing index based on the estimated sonic velocity measurement This Index cannot be overridden by installer Numeric Data Refers to a value entered into a menu cell An example would be the pipe outer diameter Numeric Entry
169. evel Cursor position is provided in the highlighted area Refer to the Available Adjustments To Spectra Graph table found in paragraph 7 12 Adjust the Noise Level cursor if required by pressing the lt gt key to increase or lt gt key to decrease NOTE A delay in response to all keys will occur This is due to the longer periodic sampling of the keyboard by the processor while performing FFT s Press the Down Arrow from Noise Level to advance to the High Limit cursor control The lt gt and key are active in this position Refer to the Available Adjustments To Spectra Graph table found in paragraph 7 12 7 6 Section 7 1010NFM 3J Press the Down Arrow from High Limit to advance to the Low Limit cursor control The lt gt and keys are active in this position Refer to the Available Adjustments To Spectra Graph table found in paragraph 7 12 Press the Down Arrow from Low Limit to advance to the Carrier FX control The lt gt and lt gt keys are active in this position Press the Down Arrow from Carrier FX to advance to the Diagnostic Data Display The lt gt and keys are active in this position To exit the Spectra Graph press the Menu key To display the Digital Flow Display press the Menu key from any Installation Menu location 7 12 AVAILABLE ADJUSTMENTS TO SPECTRA GRAPH The table below describes the available adjustments that can be made to the Spectra Grap
170. f System Performance ccccsesseecesseeeseeeseeeeeesseeeeeseseneeeeneenes 5 3 Pelro PT 5 3 Repeatability 5 3 DIILELCGD ge 5 3 Data Scatter T EREE 5 3 Data Drite eat ee 5 4 Flow Conditions 5 4 Fo dz Rates issii tatud 5 4 Flow Data Scatter and Damping esee 5 4 System 1010 Damping and Slewing Controls 5 4 Hiro caaiesielecs 5 4 SmanSleW e E m 5 5 Notes On Liquid Conditlons nonien treinta anana 5 5 Erroneous Liquid Parameter Specification eese 5 5 Liquid Compatibility nacre sanasana andanada aasan nanasa iadaan sasadan 5 5 Pippi A E E E A A A 5 5 a E A T 5 6 TWo Phase LIQUIOS iisissiscerta exkairustaxcrE n b nEx du tic E uxEl XR o6 E ErXDEI ES REDE REF PI ITA MEE 5 6 VISCOUS LIQUIDS 5 6 Temperature and Pressure Ratings eren 5 6 Overview Of System 1010N Memory Resources eene 5 6 supe Nrg ns 5 7 Sonic Velocity m s For Common Liquids 68 F ssss 5 7 Sonic Velocity For Pure Water Various Temp m s
171. flow calculation Use this adjustment if the left side of the Spectra Graph has noise that is larger in amplitude than the signal that is produced by flow The cursor may be arbitrarily placed at one half the minimum flow expected Noise Level Set Cursor This cursor appears as a horizontal line on the Spectra Graph All sig nals below this line will be excluded from the flow calculation Position the cursor approximately one quarter the height of the FFT peak 7 11 HOW TO USE SPECTRA GRAPH DATA AND CONTROLS When you first access the Spectra Graph the data shown on the top highlighted line shows Velocity in feet per second F S on the left side and the volumetric Flow Rate in the current rate units on the right side You can scroll the data shown using the Up and Down Arrows Pressing the Up Arrow changes the data in the highlight to Diagnostic Data containing from left to right Hz Doppler shift frequency in Hertz mV Signal Amplitude in millivolts FFT Pk Peak FFT magnitude and 96D FFT Percent Deviation Carefully inspect the data for Signal Amplitude and Per cent Deviation Refer to the Available Adjustments to Spectra Graph table in paragraph 7 12 and the Reflexor Diagnostic Data table found in paragraph 7 13 Press the Down Arrows to return to Veloc ity Press the Down Arrow from Flow Velocity in feet per second F S to advance to the Noise Level Set cursor control A numeric indication of the Noise L
172. format the on screen datalogger You can allow the report to scroll on the screen with or without line wrapping Selecting line wrap forces a line feed after approximately 40 characters This command is effective only after you select data items and the Datalogger has accu mulated some data To enable the on screen datalogger display To access the Display Datalogger option list press C9 Move the cursor to the desired function To invoke the function press ENT To scroll the on screen datalogger display To display one line at a time press Use key to scroll down one screen 10 lines at a time Use key to jump to 15 lines of the last screen In No Line Wrap mode use Jor to scroll one column to the left or right Use a Gh 6 To scroll 8 columns to the right or the left To get out of the display press en 2 56 Section 2 1010NFM 3J NOTE In single channel 1010 s the datalogger uses a compression scheme that precludes backward scrolling Important point about Datalogger resources and dual channel systems When logging data on both measurement channels simultaneously the Datalogger stores reports in a single common file It is important that you select Site ID to appear on each line of data so that you can always identify which channel generated report 2 10 THE I O DATA CONTROL MENU This menu becomes available after picking a Meter Type and Channel Use this menu to assign functions for the
173. g typical flow conditions If less than 100 mV check transducer type used and mounting configuration If greater than 3200 mV try in line mounting and or detune Carrier Fx FFT s sec Number of FFTs per second FFT Peak Peak FFT Amplitude Carrier Fx Transmit Frequency code 7 8 Section 7 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Shows range of flow rates detected Low Limit GAL MIN 0 00 High Limit GAL MIN 16 75 Noise Level Set 2 Doppler Freq lt Hz gt 8571 Deviation gt Signal Pk Pk mV FFTs Sec FFT Peak Carrier fx lt drive gt Application Info 7 14 DISPLAY OF F AT NO FLOW CONDITIONS It is normal for the digital display to show an F for the no flow condition since the lack of Spectra information during no flow is the same as a fault condition NOTE Selecting the Operation Adjust menu cell Zero Fault Set allows the option of indicating Zero Flow rather than a Fault see paragraph 2 5 4 for details 7 15 SELECTION OF LIQUID COMPOSITION The width of the Spectra wave shape is an indication of the depth of penetration of sonic energy into the flow stream The Deviation is a measure of the width of the Spectra and is representative of the penetration of the sonic beam into the liquid Select Slurry in the Application Data menu for better flow rate indication accuracy when the Deviation is less than 25 with typical flow conditions For Devia tions above 35 select Liquid
174. h ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION NOTE Noise Level Set Noise Filter Set to approximately one quarter the Peak FFT value for typical flow conditions High Limit Low Pass Filter Setting Set to two times the maximum flow rate Low Limit High Pass Filter Set to one half minimum flow if noise is present In most cases leave at zero Carrier Fx Transmit Frequency Adjust only under guidance of technical sup Code port staff yf Section 7 1010NFM 3J 7 13 REFLEXOR DIAGNOSTIC DATA The Diagnostic Data menu screen provides one location where all diagnostic data can be viewed Please note adjustments can not be made on this screen Adjustments can only be made on the Spectra Graph DIAGNOSTIC DATA APPLICATION INFORMATION FUNCTION EXPLANATION High Limit Low Pass Filter Setting Noise Level Set Noise Filter Setting Doppler Frequency Hz Average FFT Frequency Deviation The width of Spectra is used to determine beam penetration and calibration The selection of Slurry in Application Data is recommended for flow rate indication accuracy when the Devia tion is less than 25 For 96 Deviation above 35 the use of Liquid is recommended For applications that continuously have De viation between 25 and 35 proper selection of ei ther Liquid or Slurry can be confirmed by com parison to a known flow reference Signal Peak to Peak mV Peak to Peak demodulation signal amplitude The acceptable range is between 100 and 3200 mV durin
175. h the reference table below It provides the signal names PC termination and 1010 1020 meter termination for each type of flowmeter Also in most computer stores or online you will be able to find or you may already have a serial LapLink cable or Null Modem cable These cables can be used to communicate with the 1010P DP and 1020N systems If you purchased a 1010W model you may have received the special connector used for the RS 232 terminal in a packet included with your 1010W This will enable you to construct the appropriate cable for this meter type If you prefer to construct your own cable the following conventions apply in the table PC Refers to an IBM compatible DB 9 serial Com port 1010N Includes all models N DN MN E EXCEPT those with A1 option Termination is made to the 1010N 2 I O Data Module Flowmeter end of cable is unterminated wire 1010N With A1 Option Meters that carry A1 option have 1010N 7 module installed that houses a DB 9 connector for RS 232 communication 1010P 1020N Includes all models P DP Termination is made to the RS 232 port DB 9 connector A DB 9 Female connector is needed to mate with the meter connector 1010WP Includes all models WP WDP except energy meters Termination is made to the RS 232 port on the connector panel A special cable terminal is required and can be obtained from Controlotron Part 1015XWP 1010X Includes all models X DX Termination is made
176. he chain tension screws on top of the pipe screws up the chains hanging down and the numbered scale facing you where you have determined it would be best to mount it 4 Place the other track with the centering stud on the bottom and the lettering on the scale toward the same side as the top track directly underneath it 180 Hold in place while you wrap the chain around the pipe first onto the centering stud on the bottom track and then onto the hook under the Tensioning Screw With the chain in place count the number of links between the beginning of the chain and the centering stud and then between the centering stud and the hook They both should have the same number of links Arrange so they do and then loosely tighten Do the same with the other chain For a vertical pipe installation it will probably be much easier to tie tape or bungee cord the two tracks in place while chaining 5 Wrap a length of the mylar spacing guide around the pipe and against the end of the track assem bly Ensure that the edges on both sides align and tape to the pipe Loosen the chains enough to allow you to rotate the track assembly 90 until one track is in a 9 o clock position and the other in a 3 o clock position on the pipe horizontal pipe Tighten both chains but not too tight 6 Insert an index pin into the REF hole of the track with the tensioning screws Take one of the transducers and insert it between the track rails and to the left of the in
177. he signal processing routines In general the default damping values selected by System 1010 will provide optimal performance over a wide range of transit time applications However in extreme cases of unstable flow profile low signal levels or high aeration it may be necessary to override these default settings to permit uninterrupted and reliable flow measurement The 1010 Graph Screen includes the capability to access a set of command codes which enable a user to override a number of default setup parameters The most important parameter is the digital damping control which can be accessed by pressing number 1 or 2 on the keypad while in the graph screen mode Pressing the 1 key will cause MinDamp to appear on the command line at the lower left hand corner of the screen The number listed to the right of the command code represents the exponent in the System 1010 exponential averaging routine where the larger the number the greater the digital averaging Pressing the lt gt key will increase the damping value Likewise pressing the lt gt key will decrease the damping value To exit this mode press the 0 key on the keypad Pressing the 2 key will bring up the MaxDamp command The function of this parameter is similar to the MinDamp command described above however the two parameters interact in the following manner The MinDamp value must not exceed the MaxDamp value therefore increasing the MinDamp value
178. he transducer Also keep the transducers lifted slightly from the pipe when installing until the transducer is against the pin then push down against the pipe Remember to install the transducers with the cable connectors facing away from each other Once the transducer is in place Secure it with its clamping screw Do not overtighten NOTE Some transducers require a right angle adapter This adapter should be installed be fore placing the transducer in the tracks 3 14 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 10 Connect the transducer cable ensuring that you have observed the Upstream Downstream orien tation in respect to the cable and the input jack on the flow computer If this is a dual channel unit make sure you are connecting the cables to the correct channel input jacks 3 2 MOUNTING TEMPERATURE SENSORS In order to accurately measure temperature differential in energy flow loops Siemens Energy Flowme ters are designed to work with a pair of matched temperature sensors These are available in clamp on style 9917 or in insert thermowell style 991TW Both styles incorporate 1000 ohm platinum RTD s for high precision 1012EC SERIES CABLE 991T CLAMP ON TEMPERATURE 992EMTN MOUNTING SENSOR MATCHED PAIR REQUIRED ASSEMBLY THERMAL COUPLANT S i n CUSTOMER S PIPE ry 1 ks Ei 6 Clamp on style sensors are mounted on the surface of the monitored pipe using 992EMT series mount ing assemblies Apply a generous quantity of the
179. iary current loops makes it impractical to generate the 2 mA fault current produced by the primary 4 20 mA outputs of the meter 3 May 2002 Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J Section 1 k SE ok AUN 1 5 1 6 i 2 NNN D 1 7 3 1 7 4 Section 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 2 2 2 2 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Sect Page Getting Started 1 1 aligo feri n MAPT T A E 1 1 Important Safety Considerations eene 1 1 Flowmeter Installation Steps ccccessseccssseeeeeeseseeeeeesseneeeseneeeeeeseneeeenesnenes 1 1 The Keypad Enable Switch reir rne nn nte shann n ennnen nanna 1 2 Typical System Layout e E 1 2 Ib 1010N Keypad 1 3 K yp d Function Chart E cc 1 3 Introduction To The 1010N Menu Screens eene 1 3 Typical Installation Menu Screen ssssesseee 1 3 Explanation or the Callout sesos 1 4 How To Use The Installation Menu esses 1 4 Accessing And Leaving The Menu eere 1 5 How To Enter Data ieensuca aiesk enr rias as diosa rd uu nua x6 Glad a xL EE CER DRE EE EE NE 1 5 Selecting Items from an Option LIST ieesccesecncvedessricenvarcamedeumsendaiucuenteees 1 6 Multiple Select Option LISTS ereere a 1 7 Entering Numeric Dalai tei
180. id class parameter individually to obtain a closer match with the liquid The default liquid is Water at 68 F 20 C 2 10 Section 2 1010NFM 3J The Temperature Range menu cell allows you to specify the expected temperature range at the trans ducer mounting location The default setting 40 F to 250 F matches the standard 991 and 1011 series of transducers but not the 1011H For higher pipe temperatures selecting the proper tempera ture range allows the flow computer to recommend the appropriate transducers Use this menu to select a class of liquids and optionally edit the following liquid parameters e Estimated Vs e Viscosity e Density Specific Gravity Use this menu cell to select an upstream pipe compensation correction table APPLICATION DATA MENU STRUCTURE Liquid Class Application Data gt Siemens 2 Channel Select Liquid Class from Liquid Table 1 Channel 1 A Anomaly Diam Liquid Class Water 20C 68F y UniMass Table Temperature Range Pipe Configuration Create Edit Table 40F to 250F Fully Developed 10 Application Data The UniMass Table is used to associate the metered liquid s current temperature and sonic velocity with its specific gravity and viscosity Use this menu cell to specify the temperature range of the liquid Use this menu cell to enter the number of pipe diameters between the upstream configuration and the transducer ins
181. igitized Receive Signal Tn 55 06 A dT 3 11 BN S 72 191 A SN 1241 3 HIE I A f AAA f f ANA T y FAITS Uu y Crossover Marker TN marker 1 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION GUIDE 3 1 PREPARING TO MOUNT THE TRANSDUCERS Installing the transducers is fairly straightforward However careful planning will avoid any snags that may delay the installation Previously based on the input you fed into the meter s computer it had recommended the transducers size mounting option and spacing With the transducers at hand we are now ready to mount them But first some very important preliminary work must be done which consists of e Selecting a mounting option for your application e Selecting a location on the pipe e Preparing the pipe to accept the transducers NOTE When installing transducers do not key in the V M Version Modification label number as the Transducer Size 3 1 1 HOW TO IDENTIFY 1011 TRANSDUCERS AND MOUNTING HARDWARE 1011 series of universal transducers and mounting frames have the following color codes for easy identification GOLD siccis ansias SIZE A GREEN sirsiran SIZE D BLUE eriein SIZE B BLACK sxcescvrd sucesapeats SIZE iE RED NU M SIZE C The transducer part number located on the front face provides a more detailed identification For ex ample the Part Number 1011PPS C2 means MODEL SIZE PORTABLE STD
182. ill not be correctly formed Each line corresponds to each point Sonic velocity is first followed by temperature the input variables Then comes specific gravity followed by viscosity the output variables Do not use commas between the items only single spaces A carriage return is expected after each line EXCEPT for the last one For example line 1 of MTABLE 1 4 1510 0 30 0 1 1 2 7 shown above is read as follows 1510 0 Sonic Velocity 30 0 Temperature 1 1 Specific Gravity 2 7 Viscosity You may save this file by using a name suggested by the liquid in question Once the file is saved use HyperTerminal to send it as a simple text file to the PC serial port of the 1010 flowmeter It is suggested that a moderate data rate be used 1200 baud for this function since the meter is fairly busy computing and interpolating during the installation of the table anging Temp amp Vs Press the Right Arrow to access The Changing Temp amp Vs lookup table must be serially loaded using the HyperTerminal Send Text command This table can be generated using a utility provided by Controlotron which converts the Vs and temperature data into a uniform 10x10 grid array and formats it appropriately for serial download Below is a sample input data file for gasoline and diesel fuel that was empirically derived from sound velocity data obtained using a 1010 flowmeter installed on a fuel pipeline The task of obtaining sound velocity
183. ilous atmosphere etc the end user must ensure that only properly trained personnel are involved in its installation and operation Please do not let the size of the Installation Menu intimidate you Almost all menu cells already contain default parameters To begin operation you only need to access the menu cells that control a required parameter such as the pipe outer diameter You will see that by accepting most defaults you can set up the meter in about five minutes 1 3 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION STEPS Typical steps to complete the installation procedure Collect the site data pipe and liquid data part numbers etc Choose a mounting location for the flow computer and transducers Mount the flow computer at the selected location Prepare pipe for transducer mounting Access the Installation Menu and create a site see paragraph 1 7 3 Enter pipe parameters see paragraph 2 2 Invoke transducer install procedure see paragraph 2 4 Mount transducers on pipe and connect to flow computer see Section 3 Complete transducer install menu operation see paragraph 2 4 1 1 Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 4 THE KEYPAD ENABLE SWITCH All System 1010N models provide a keypad enable disable switch to prevent unauthorized access to the Installation Menu In addition a password entry option is available see Channel Setup The keypad enable disable switch is located inside the lockable enclosure just above the I O wiring terminal Please
184. ing T6 Output THIS ios rre eoucuet il beae tanoa 2 59 Assigning Vo OUIDHE T PIGIIDIRS oci iersn Exp emitnan rau rant nia uut 2 60 Assigning Pgen Output Functions coire tro eo pete tau Redit rebos 2 60 Pulse Output Table Pgen Wirlng uecccri nennt rte eunte cance 2 60 FRIDAY SGP 2 60 Assigning Relay 1 and 2 Functions uocis coques rate Kroatien tn petite 2 61 Relay Option ST m v 2 61 Analog Input Setup optional function eere 2 61 Setting Up the Analog Current Input orti neret 2 62 The Diagnostics Data Menu eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nnne 2 62 Diagnostic Data Menu Structure seseeseseesseeeene 2 63 Main Dlagriostlos SGteel aeuoocoei enano tnus censtenseseaccneecrcvencesxs 2 64 Main Diagnostic Menu Description scie oie tbe rater en eH bone recen 2 64 PlOW Date Menu 2 64 Flow Data Menu o xcs riet aiareccttnettansnettcercemetraeuieatinecesesaesieeeeactienies 2 65 WSO NTS cacicasentacieres 2 65 lumi and COFION Em 2 66 ANG dli M 2 66 The Application Info Menu uuiuacin orario arn tt thun uo ECC RO URS na nm iR xa 2 67 Application Info Menu MSM pesar tour eRe ere ene does EE tna demU rS 2 67 Th Liquid Data Merian ise tuc xr misa sies ox Ox RR x SERE X FRE Faux i ivan s
185. ion Info Liquid Data Site Setup Data Test Facilities Print Site Setup No Date Site Created 04 18 01 13 24 01 Diagnostic Data MAIN DIAGNOSTIC MENU DESCRIPTION Flow Data Application Info Liquid Data This menu shows flow rate total amp alarm data adjustable flow limits This menu shows current meter operating status This menu shows current Reynolds and RTD temperature readings if this system includes optional RTD Temperature measurement cap ability This menu shows current transducer setup data and signal status Site Setup Data Test Facilities This menu provides system test and recovery routines Print Site Setup This Menu cell allows you to send an ASCII dump of the current Site Data to a RS 232 port device e g a printer or laptop computer Date Site Created This menu cell shows date and time when the current site was created 2 11 2 FLOW DATA MENU This menu provides a live display of all flow related output data Siemens Quad Path SITE1 Current Flow Rate and Units Flow GAL MIN 2 26 Flow Vel F S 0 60 Total KGAL Vs m s Signal mV Valc Vaer Alarm Status AnCal GAL MIN HiFlow GAL MIN LoFlow GAL MIN Flow Data NOTE Menu shows English units i e gallons 2 64 Section 2 1010NFM 3J FLOW DATA MENU ITEMS Flow This is a real time updated flow rate display in current rate units e g GAL MIN Flow Vel
186. ion installed check the following The designation A1 should be part of the flowmeter part number For example 1010ENRE T1A1KGS 1 May 2002 Manual Addendum 1010FMA 14 1010N 2 I O Module The conventional 1010N 2 I O module provides the following e Two self powered isolated 4 20 mA current loops signals lo1 and lo2 that are assignable and spannable by the user to many flowmeter variables such as flow sonic velocity signal strength etc These self powered outputs also provide an industry standard fault indication by dropping to 2 mA if assigned to flow rate and under fault conditions Note that these outputs though isolated from the system are NOT isolated from each other e Two 0 10 Vdc outputs signals Vo1 and Vo2 that are also assignable and spannable by the user as above These are also self powered but are not isolated from the system e Two 0 5000 Hz Pgen signals Pgen1 and Pgen2 also assignable and spannable by the user These are TTL level pulses The 1010N DN class of meters has a total of six analog outputs as indicated above In addition refer to Installation Drawings 1010N 2 7 and 1010N 7 7 e Alarms Status Totalizer pulses are generally presented as relay closures as either Mercury Wetted Form 1A or Dry Reed Form C relays e Analog inputs when provided are in the form of 4 20 mA non isolated inputs e The meter also has four non isolated totalizer command lines providing Totalizer Clear and Totalizer H
187. ipes with OD W ratios of 7 to 1 or less are acceptable but may exhibit reduced stability and linearity Generally higher OD W ratios provide better stability If a pipe has a low OD W ratio you should use the smaller of the recommended transducer sizes if the flow computer recommends two transducer sizes 5 3 2 PICKING THE APPROPRIATE TRANSDUCER To ensure that you select the appropriate transducers for your application consider the pipe outer diameter temperature range and degree of precision required Decide whether you need two indepen dent flow channels or if you have to operate the system in dual path configuration for greater accuracy and flow profile aberration immunity Initial transducer size recommendations are based on your pipe outer diameter wall thickness and pipe material entries However you can override the meter recommendations to accommodate spe cific situations For example you may own a set of transducers whose size does not appear on the meter list You may be able to use transducers on a pipe size outside of their nominal pipe OD range During transducer install the flow computer recommends Spacing Indices for spacer bars and mounting tracks or Ltn actual distance required between transducers Once you mount transducers and invoke the install routine you can determine the suitability of your transducers by checking the signal strength and comparing the reported sonic velocity with the actual sonic velocity of th
188. is shows that gt Site Security Off the Meter Type is On Dual Channel C Delete Site Setup Site Name List operating with FER F Channel 1 active C Save Rename Site Site Name Entry Edit This shows that the site setup XYZ is the active site Siemens 2 Channel 1 XYZ Scroll saved Site Setup list and Enter Recall Site Setup Channel Enable Create Name Site Site Security This cell shows that site setup XYZ is stored in memory Use this menu cell to create and name a site setup Note that the cell retains the name of the most recently created site setup Delete Site Setup Save Rename Site and can be recalled This option list expands as you save more sites Use this menu cell to XYZ Channel Setup enable or disable Site Security Provide a password to enable Re enter the password to disable Use this menu cell at any time to manually save the site data Note that attempting to leave the menu after entering editing Use thi Itof any site data triggers a Save se this menu cell to free up site storage Site pop up window memory by deleting obsolete site setups Note that the cell retains the name of the automatically most recently created site setup XYZ This option list expands as you save more sites 2 1 1 HOW TO RECALL A SITE SETUP The Recall Site command allows you to reinstall the system at a former site For an original installa tion see Create Name Site for instructions on
189. ite After creating a Site Setup the assigned name appears in these places Enter Parameters Pipe Invoke Transducer Install Procedure l on Pipe Mount Transducers connect Flowmeter and l Installation Complete Transducer Operations Menu Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 8 USING FASTSTART SETUP The dual channel clamp on mode offers a choice of using FastStart Setup or Full Site Setup to create your site setup As its name implies FastStart Setup is a quick way to start up the meter FastStart inserts default settings into all applicable menu cells However these can be edited later via the Full Site Setup menu In order to use FastStart Setup e Your pipe must be included on the meter s pre set pipe table e Your liquid is water or has similar sonic characteristics FastStart setup is actually a shortcut to these two menu locations where data entry is mandatory for a successful start up e Pipe Data The Pipe Data Menu is limited to the selection of pipe pre sets only There are no provisions for manual pipe editing e Pick Install Xdcr This is the same menu as Full Menu Setup see paragraph 1 7 1 8 1 CHOOSING THE PIPE CLASS SIZE Presse to access FastStart Setup This selects Choose Pipe Class There are over sixty English and metric pipe sizes for eight different classes of pipes
190. ivate numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the Viscosity value which must be in centistokes To register the data press Enr How to Edit the Density SG Setting Use the Density SG menu cell to edit the nominal specific gravity of the selected liquid This allows the flow computer to provide a flow rate output in mass units if required This mode suits applications where the density is not only known but also fixed due to well controlled liquid temperature and chem istry The default specific gravity setting is 1 000 The flow computer uses the liquid s specific gravity to form a multiplier for the conversion of volumetric flow to mass flow Mass flow appears in selected units on the display screen Density SG as it applies to this system is defined as the ratio of the mass of this liquid to the mass of an equal volume of water at 20 C or 68 F To edit the Density SG setting To activate numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the Density SG value To register the data press e 2 3 2 UniMass TABLE Some 1010 family meters provide a feature we call UniMass These meters support a UniMass Table which associates the metered liquid s current temperature and sonic velocity Vs with its specific gravity and viscosity These variables are then used to provide mass metering and real time flow profile compensation based on Reynold s numbers For hydrocarbon liquids requiring standard vol ume compensation
191. k with the Up or Down Arrows to a new selection then press Enter to select the item CLR Clear Key Use the CLR key to erase a numeric value or clear a selection from a multiple select option list Cursor This refers to the highlighted text and the arrow cursor that you move via the arrow direction when navigating through menus or menu cells Data Entry Refers to data entered into a menu cell either numeric or option list selection Datalogger Memory Memory segment that stores data items logged during operation You can view the Datalogger contents either on screen or transmit it to an external device via the RS 232 serial port The amount of Datalogger memory depends on how many sites reside in Site Storage memory ENT Enter Key Use the ENT key to store a current numeric value or option list item Flow Computer Refers to the meter itself system refers to the meter and transducers combined Flow Tube Refers to our in line non wetted transducer assemblies suited for small under 2 lines and extremely low flow applications Graphic Screen Refers to the integral display screen Initial Makeup An internal process performed during installation where the flow computer acquires its receive signal and enhances other parameters for optimal operation at a site In process Makeup An internal process where the flow computer recovers its Initial Makeup param
192. l 2 3 How To Create Name A Site Setup eene 2 4 How To Enable Disable Site Security eee 2 4 How To Delete A Site Setup iieri ecrire cete tonat natn ne nnmnnn nnn 2 5 How To Save Rename A Site Setup ceres 2 5 Ihe Pipe Data M nU Luise neni unb esci obl aat xc Cii OR a c dao a ls eed 2 6 The Pipe Data Menu Structure uiia nre ttr Rene hte bkn EARS nF EOS 2 7 How To Select A Pipe Class iacu ora orit t tip enn die bp ena inc epi ina cen bEIn Etui 2 8 Table Of Contents 1010NFM 3J 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 220 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 6 2 4 7 2 4 8 2 4 9 2 4 10 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 5 3 2 5 4 2 6 How To Select A Pipe Slze rennen nuu excu nnne EcEsen aarian 2 8 How To Enter The Pipe OD in or MIM eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 9 How To Select A Pipe Material c eere eeu nennen ninnnnens 2 9 How To Enter The Wall Thickness eeeeeeeeeeess 2 9 Liner Material e c 2 10 Liner ThICKI885 iiri iniu Reo RE ree Lex eoe NR au Eria PaA Rasa ER ane RR RR ain 2 10 The Application Data Men cocer e nente nnn nnn sn nnus mnnn 2 10 Application Data Menu Structure
193. l 1 Select Liquid Class from Liquid Table Temperature Range 40F to 250F Pipe Configuration Fully Developed Anomaly Diams 10 Application Data Pressing the lt Right Arrow gt changes the left hand column to Select Liquid Pressing the lt Right Ar row gt again accesses the option list This expands the highlighted area to show the list contents Note that a cursor arrow points to the top item on the list Siemens 2Channel 1 Channel 1 Access Liquid Option List Select Liquid gt Water 20C 68F Estimated Vs m s Water 50C 122F Viscosity cS Water 75C 167F Density SG Water 100C 212F Water 125C 257F Water 150C 302F Water 175C 347F Water 200C 392F Water 225C 437F Water 250C 482F Acetic Acid Liquid Class The lt Up and Down Arrows gt scroll the option lists Every press moves the cursor to the next item in sequence Due to the size of display screen some option lists include more items than the display can show For example on the screen above the last option shown is Acetic Acid However this option list has more listings Continue to press the lt Down Arrow gt to see more liquid selections When you arrive at the last item on a list the next lt Down Arrow gt press brings you back to the top of the list because the option lists are of the wrap around type To select an option list item move the cursor to the item and then press the ENT key This places
194. l Test Facilities Stripchart Setup Print Site Setup No Datalogger Setup Date Site Created 04 09 0314 52 23 1 O Data Control BIE a o S E E DIM Dual Path Flow BIET o Ted em PETI e Inthe Diagnostic Data Menu highlight Path Select and select the desired transducer path Press lt ENT gt to select path e Press the Down Arrow and scroll to the Site Setup Data menu cell Press the Right Arrow to select it Manual Adjustment Procedure e Inthe Site Setup Data Menu press the Down Arrow and scroll to the HF menu cell Press the Right Arrow and a pop up Manual prompt will appear as shown below Note Press the Up Down Arrows to select Automatic if desired e Use the numerical keys to input the desired correction value Press lt ENT gt to input value Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G fx drive 29 fx drive 29 N burst length 5 N burst length 5 Ltn in G tnin G Vf max CU Adjustment Vf max CU gt Manual Vs max m s gt Manual Vs max m s 0 120 Vs min m s ve Vs min m s Tu Samples Cycle Samples Cycle HF gt 0 000 HF gt 0 000 e The new correction value will appear next to the HF menu cell as shown below 2 70 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Siemens Dual Path 4SS10G fx drive 29 N burst length 5 Ltn in 5 316 Vf max CU Vs max m s Vs min m s 1355 00 Samples Cycl
195. l Units Data Span Set Cal Stripchart Setup Datalogger Setup I O Data Control Diagnostic Data 1 4 Section 1 1010NFM 3J 1 7 1 ACCESSING AND LEAVING THE MENU Upon first turning the meter on you see a Siemens graphic This means that there is no active site setup currently stored in memory Note that this screen identifies the software version of the meter on the upper right hand corner of the display ver 3 01 00 WELCOME SITRANS FUS1010 Software Version X XX XX Make sure the keypad enable switch is in the correct position then press the lt MENU gt key to select the menu The first time you access the Installation Menu you can leave it only by saving a site or by turning the meter off After installing and activating a site use the lt MENU gt key to toggle between a graphic display screen and the last accessed menu location Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Siemens Site 1 Select Meter Type Select Meter Type Meter Type Dual Channel Flow Meter Type Single Channel Meter Facilities Dual Beam Flow Meter Facilities Ch 1 2 Flow Ch 1 2 Flow Top menu screen for dual channel system Top menu screen for single channel system When you press the lt MENU gt key the cursor arrives at the first level of the installation menu Refer to the sample screens above The left screen is from a dual channel model The right screen is from a single
196. maintain a longer connection type Menu 1000 and press lt ENT gt The optional number is the amount in minutes that the connection will be maintained Typing Menu 1000 essentially keeps the interface alive until you cancel it Data Display Mode After you complete the installation you can toggle between Installation Menu mode to Data Display mode This is the same as using the MENU key on the 1010 keypad see manual The PC key board equivalent to the MENU key is lt CNTRL gt lt L gt Note that the 1010 RS 232 interface does not support graphics Therefore when you use HyperTerminal to view the data display screens you will see the same data in alphanumeric form only as shown below You can still use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to switch between available display screens g 1010 connect HyperTerminal File Edit Yiew Call Transfer Help Site FLOW GAL MIN 7 8 This is the name of the current active site setup The 1 indicates that the measurement channel is currently active This is the current flow reading and flow units This would be a large graphic character on the 1010 screen TOTAL KGAL Us 1 32 1481_ This is the current measured liquid This is the flow sonic velocity Vs Total display Connected 10 46 36 vr100 8600 7 0 1 B 6 Appendix 1010NFM 3J Navigating Through the Installation Menu After accessing the Installation Menu you can begin to setup y
197. measured in the Location item of the 1010 menu either supply or return 3 2 5 PARALLELING RTD INPUTS FOR DUAL CHANNEL ENERGY MEASUREMENT Should you wish to measure liquid flow in the same pipe twice perhaps at the supply and return location of the line but not redundantly have to measure the temperature the following information may prove helpful e Connectterminal 2 of terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 together and terminal 3 of TB1 and TB3 You can use any available hookup wire to do this By doing this you are not shorting terminals 2 and 3 just interconnecting 2 2 and 3 3 of each terminal block e Connect terminal 2 terminal blocks of TB2 and TB4 as well as Terminal 3 of TB2 and TB4 This hookup will result in the same temperature being reported for Tr and Ts for channels 1 and 2 of the meter It probably is a judicious idea to check the temperature to ensure that they do indeed match Of course Td will be similarly identical These temperatures can be checked in Diagnostics En ergy Data e Be sure to accurately indicate where the flow is being measured in the Location item of the 1010 menu either supply or return 3 19 Section 4 1010NFM 3J 4 THE METER FACILITIES MENU AND GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN Meter Facilities functions are available immediately after pressing Ed The Meter Facilities menu provides global control that enables you to identify and activate the following functions and features of the hardware supporte
198. ment can fail if exposed to extreme temperature or vibration conditions during service storage or transportation The Diagnostic menu shows how the system interprets a problem The test functions and alarm indicators identify hidden problems auto matically If a problem seems unsolvable call our Technical Service Department or your local Siemens Ultrasonic Flow Representative for expert help Flow Computer Messages Certain actions or conditions invoke messages that may appear as a pop up window in the right hand column of a given menu cell or the highlighted prompt line at the top of the display screen The follow ing is a list of messages that you may encounter along with explanations and in some cases a recom mended action MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Memory Full Response to an attempt to save site data when data memory is full Delete an obsolete site or clear Datalogger memory to make room for the new data Memory Corrupted Memory read error occurred while accessing the active site data Chan Not Setup Response to an attempt to invoke an operation that requires a channel to be enabled Enable the channel Channel Setup 3 Channel Enable 2 Yes Note that a channel cannot be enabled until its transducers are operating Clr Active Memory Response to pressing the F4 key Use the F4 function to restore operation if a severe event e g a violent power surge disrupts system operation Clr Saved Data Response to pressing the F4 key then selec
199. moves the cursor to Line Feed 4 8 4 LINE FEED Some serial devices printers terminals etc insert a line feed automatically after they receive a carriage return character When communicating with these device types you should set the Line Feed to OFF This instructs the flow computer to send a carriage return character without adding a line feed to avoid creating an additional blank line after each carriage return Setting the Line Feed to ON tells the flow computer to insert a line feed character after each carriage return that it transmits This may be necessary to avoid the constant wrapping of transmitted data onto a single line The factory setting is NO line feed disabled Note that the 996P portable printer requires NO To enable or disable Line Feed To access the Line Feed option list press 3 Press to move the asterisk to Yes Line feed enabled or No Line feed disabled 4 14 Section 4 1010NFM 3J To store the data press ent This moves the cursor to Network ID 4 8 5 NETWORK ID The Network ID menu cell stores an identification number to facilitate host computer polling when you use this system in a network environment The Network ID number can be any value other than 0 zero The default setting zero disables the network function Note that entering a non zero Network ID number suspends all routine Datalogger activity regardless of any selected options NOTE If you are using the flo
200. mp elle fel fol fel lel el el fel lo Tat TE 1 2 8 4 5 1j 2 a 4 js C rm BLUE Se a RED CSS GREEN Se RETURN WHITE BLACK Paste BLUE RED sre GAEEN Sas SUPPLY WHITE S BLACK SHE feud p L 1012EC SERIES CABLES 1010N Dual Channel Temperature Sensor Inputs 3 2 3 NOTES ON SYSTEM 1010 ANALOG INPUT MODULES Single Channel Models e System 1010 NEMA flowmeters report input module temperature sensor connections T1 and T2 as system variables Dual Path Models e Dual Channel flowmeters report both T1 and T2 as generic variables for both channels e The Dual Channel unit uses T1 for liquid temperature for Channel 1 and T2 as liquid tempera ture for Channel 2 e The Dual Path instrument uses T1 to report liquid temperature Note that T2 is used to report ambient temperature in some Leak Detector systems e The Analog Input of temperature takes priority over the built in RTD Resistive Thermal Device measurement of temperature e Ifyou want both channels of a Dual Channel meter to sense a single RTD short TB1 2 to TB2 2 and TB1 8 to TB2 3 This allows the same voltage to be fed to both channels Once that is complete you must close the RTD current loop by connecting TB1 4 5 to TB2 4 5 Note TB5 is just the cable shield 3 18 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 3 2 4 CLAMP ON RESISTIVE TEMPERATURE DEVICE RTD INSTALLATION NOTES The Clamp On RTD sensor with which your 1010N is supplied is extremely s
201. mples will appear in the number to the right of the command As you adjust the Tn marker both Tn and Vs liquid sound velocity will change accordingly To exit this mode press the 0 key on the keypad Zero Crossover Adjustment Hot Key 4 Observe the small X mark located on the zero crossing line near the middle of the receive signal in the Graph Screen above This X indicates the central crossover which the 1010 is using to measure the transit time delta This crossover will generally be close to the peak of the receive signal with at least one well formed non aberrated receive cycle on each side of the crossover If it appears that the placement of this crossover is unsatisfactory then it can be adjusted by pressing the 4 key on the keypad which will invoke the ZCOSet command The crossover point can then be moved in either direction on the waveform using the lt gt or lt gt keys The change from the default value in receive cycles will appear in the number to the right of the command To exit this mode press the 0 key Envelope Threshold Adjustment Hot Key 5 amp 6 Pressing the lt gt key causes the graph to toggle between the default signal waveform screen and the signal envelope screen see example below This envelope screen can aid in the diagnosis of Tn errors caused by unusual receive waveform distortion Signal distortion is sometimes caused by poor transducer selection or poor pipe wall conditions
202. n n counter The integration period continues up a count of 60 You can stop the integra tion count at any time by simply pressing However it is best to let the computer integrate the readings for the entire count Siemens 2Channel 1 FLOW1 Integrating 9 Press ENT Select FlowTube 1S Install Completed Yes Empty FlowTube Set MTYmatic Zero Flow Adjust Actual Zero Install FlowTube When this routine is finished the cursor moves to Operation Adjust The flowmeter will be measuring flow Press to leave the menu A pop up window prompts you to save the site Do so by pressing e then ev Provide a site name if desired see paragraph 2 1 3 This moves you to the flow rate display screen The flowme ter is now operational 6 8 Section 6 1010NFM 3J 6 4 SPECIFICATIONS CPVC FLOW TUBE Typical values subject to change without notice Liquid Size 1 Must be compatible with CPVC under operating conditions and free of sus pended gasses or solids Size 2 Must be compatible with CPVC under operating conditions and free of sus pended gasses or solids Pressure Drop 0 28 psi 1 5 GPM 5 7 LPM flowing water at 68 F 0 24 psi 4 5 GPM 17 0 LPM flowing water at 68 F Sensitivity 0 0005 GPM 0 002 LPM 0 0015 GPM 0 0057 LPM Linearity 1 of flow for rates above 0 09 GPM 0 34 LPM 1 of flow for rates above 0 27 GPM 1 0 LPM Repeatability
203. n Vk pari nba arai acre ink Cia o Gen 1 7 Entering Alphanumeric Data onse iterato rote L tes atri tort Rea d Epp E Eee 1 8 The Meter Type Men i ananas EE En an ntn ak Ex ana uua prn E peau KDE 1 8 D alGhannel eer EE 1 9 D al PUN pc 1 9 Channel 142 and Channel 1 2 emnes 1 9 Essential Information For Users of Multi Channel 1010 s 1 10 Multi Channel Meter Setup 5 ores recti n Ra ree epe epi Piet obo reborn 1 10 Arithmetic Operation Lusso nette nnt tta rtm ite inn ld ke unu 1 10 Multi Path Operation Met M 1 10 Selecting a Meter m I 1 11 Cre ting a New Ste Setup m 1 12 Flowmeter Installation Flowchart 1 ornetur re 1 14 Using FASTSTAHT Setup risainia ten SE auo Et Hd utn ar nna A Rua sn E KNA a anA 1 15 Choosing The Pipe Class Size ceres 1 15 Picking And Installing The Transducers esee 1 16 1010WX Clamp On Liquid Flowmeters eere 1 19 The 1010N Installation Menu eruur nenne tnr nnn nann innu nh nn ne nhnnn nne 2 1 The Channel Setup Menu Laien tian ente t Soon bn i cao conten aaeain 2 2 Channel Setup Menu Structure essseseseseeeeeeneneeen 2 2 How To Recall A Site Selup uctor tie Ex bie noue tnn En DE in bupFe n amba Tax iER E CceE 2 2 How To Enable And Disable A Measurement Channe
204. n below and indicate the current ALC e g 50 This ALC number indicates the current receive signal strength and can be used for further diagnos tic purposes Siemens 2Channel 1 ForceN fx 8 m 7 SITE1 ALC 50 Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Transducer Model 1011 Universal Transducer Model 1011 Universal Transducer Size Xdcr Mount Mode Spacing Offset Number Index Spacing Method Ltn Value in Empty Pipe Set Zero Flow Adjust B3 Direct Minimum 4 Track 1012TP 0 217 Install Completed Install Channel Not Setup Channel Not Setup Transducer Size Xdcr Mount Spacing Offs Number Inde Spacing Met Ltn Value in Empty Pipe Set Zero Flow Adjust Install Completed B3 Detection Fault Press ENT 0 217 Install Channel Not Setup Channel Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr Pick Install Xdcr 2 27 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 3 To exit Force Transmit press the Left Arrow and a Detection Fault prompt will appear see above Press the Left Arrow again and the meter will return to the Pick Install Xdcr menu and highlight the Empty Pipe Set menu cell 4 To force a frequency repeat steps 1 and 2 above but press Ctrl and MENU The following typical pop up prompt will appear EIU Using the numeric keys enter the desired drive code and press ENT 5 If the Force Transmit diagnostic procedure is not used the normal Install Completed function occurs as follows
205. n on the use of upper and lower flow limits used to prevent flow mis registra tion prior to using the Reversal Zero technique Reversamatic If the negative flow rate that the meter reads in the step during which the transducers are reversed is more negative than the lower flow limit the meter will re register positive and the Reversal Zero cycle will thus be corrupted Therefore postpone the installation of upper and lower flow limits until the reversal zero procedure is executed successfully For pipes that combine large diameters with very high flow velocities it may be necessary to move the upper and lower flow limits out of the way until the reversal zero is completed Moreover pipes of this size frequently have excellent intrinsic zero performance and may not even need zeroing AnCal This menu cell allows you to enter an artificial flow rate in current rate units that will drive the meter s analog outputs totalizer output and the screen shown below You can use AnCal to check the analog outputs or as a reference source for calibrating external devices such as remote display screens or chart recorders and RTU s To test the Totalizer function leave AnCal active for enough time for an accumulation to appear on the screen below Moving the cursor from the menu cell cancels the AnCal function Siemens Dual Path SITE1 Flow Rate Simulation Control Flow GAL MIN 120 00 Flow Vel F S 4 23 The M status is Total GAL 5645 820 asserted du
206. n press ctR Note that this removes the plus sign To leave an option list press 4 5 Section 4 1010NFM 3J 4 4 THE DATALOGGER CONTROL MENU The Datalogger Setup menu in the Channel Setup menu provides the Datalogger controls for the meter s measurement channels It allows you to enable usage select data items alarm events a logging interval and a destination for your Datalogger reports While the Datalogger Setup menu is measurement channel specific this Datalogger Control menu provides global control functions This means that the settings made here apply to all measurement channels meter types operating modes etc This is possible because the meter stores logged data in a single file This is significant for dual channel systems since the logged data from both channels are combined Therefore select the Site ID item for each channel to be logged Datalogger Control allows you to select a Circular Memory mode that will over write the oldest Datalog ger data automatically when the Datalogger memory becomes full due to the data compression scheme employed Note that this is only available for dual channel systems The Est Log Time Left menu view only menu cell shows an estimate of the hours and minutes of logging time remaining This only applies to non circular datalogging Selecting Circular memory blanks this field For convenience sake the Display Datalogger command is essentially a duplicate of the menu cell in Datalogger Se
207. ncrease the possibility of reduced accuracy This applies to all flowmeters regardless of their design sophistication expense and published intrinsic accuracy These factors become critical when applications involve custody transfer tenant billing and nuclear or other safety related flows Our System 1010 Universal NEMA Flowmeters include provisions to minimize adverse flow conditions to achieve extremely high accuracy This requires closely following the instructions for proper equip ment selection use of the correct clamp on transducer or flow tube configuration and paying close attention to installation instructions If your application requires critical measurement accuracy it is not realistic to simply install the flowme ter and expect optimum performance Carefully review your piping configuration Select the best mount ing location and install the transducers or flow tube in strict accordance with the published instructions This holds true even when the system is calibrated for enhanced precision at a flow laboratory Its precision can be impaired by not closely following the programming and installation instructions We recommend that all potential installers especially critical installations participate in our training pro grams Another possible alternative is to commission our trained professionals to start up the system for you To Obtain Technical Assistance The operating program provides comprehensive diagnostics data Using
208. nd changes in a flowmeter s operating characteristics Use only the most respected flow standard to obtain a correction factor The percentage you enter must provide an accurate and consistent shift across the entire flow range anticipated for the application To obtain the Kc factor compare flow total data taken simultaneously from the 1010 and a reference meter whose accuracy meets the required standard Allow both meters to accumulate flow total data long enough to average out any differences due to flow fluctuation between the two meter locations Compare outputs of the two totalizers to determine percentage increase or decrease that is necessary to produce the best average correlation between System 1010 and the reference standard For example entering 0 29 will produce a reduction of 0 2996 in the calibration at all flow rates NOTE Always enter the or sign first To calculate Kc Ke Actual Rate 1 x 100 Hoe Indicated Rate To enter the Kc Factor To enable numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to enter the required Kc as calculated above Note that the Kc value can be negative or positive Enter the or sign first then type in the calibrated value To store the data press en Note that Kc now appears in the right hand column of the Calibrate Flow Rate menu cell with its new value Also note that this Kc value can be viewed on the site printout MultiPoint Calibration MultiPoint calibration serv
209. nductivity is sonic beam scattering due to liquid non homogene ity Thus liquids that contain gas bubbles or suspended solids are considered unsuitable applications However dissolved gasses and organic solids of a moderate viscosity usually do not cause any prob lems The accuracy of the liquid viscosity entry is important It governs the degree of Reynolds Number compensation that the flow computer applies to the final rate output Therefore flow data errors could result if you enter an inaccurate viscosity value Please note that Siemens may be able to provide the correct liquid viscosity and data for your application Siemens flow tubes are constructed from CPVC Teflon PFA Kynar PVDF or stainless steel Ensure that the liquid to be measured is compatible with the flow tube material 6 1 Section 6 1010NFM 3J 6 1 2 SELECTING THE RIGHT FLOW TUBE Select the appropriate body material Consider liquid compatibility operating temperature and pres sure These must never exceed the rating of the flow tube Consult installation drawings to determine appropriate fittings for coupling the flow tube into your piping Select the appropriate size 7ry to match as closely as possible the diameters of the pipe and the flow tube This will reduce or eliminate the potential for a noticeable pressure drop In addition the operating flow range must fall within the indicated specifications Flow Tube Pressure and Temperature Ratings Mat
210. ne Wrap or No Line Wrap by pressing DO 4 6 Section 4 1010NFM 3J To view Datalogger contents press ENT To return to Datalogger Control press en 4 4 2 OUTPUT DATALOGGER This menu cell allows you to send the Datalogger contents to an external device usually a computer or printer via the meter s RS 232 Serial I O port This command is effective only after a successful install In addition you have to enable datalogging and select data items in the Datalogger Setup menu Note This command sends the data collected by both channels of a dual channel system Therefore you should include Site ID current site setup name Date and Time in your report so that you can identify the source of each report The meter interfaces with most serial printers or personal computers Siemens offers the model 996P portable serial printer You must use the proper cabling between the flow computer and the external device In addition you must configure the RS 232 Setup correctly You should turn off the Datalogger function before you transmit an extensive printout This will avoid contaminating the printout with new Datalogger data Datalogger reports are sequential ASCII text files NOTE The meter suspends flow measurement while it transmits serial data To send Datalogger contents to the RS 232 Serial Port Check the flow computer to external device connections and your RS 232 Setup parameters see RS 232 Setup To access the Outp
211. nenene 2 86 EOW NG eects css a cee cee eee cee see eet 2 87 Detection Faull LOW SiIQMall rriei enn 2 87 MoN VAGN ees cca Lm 2 87 OOM SIGNA cctcuztececaasereisacdi cmid e mo Dina FRU SCU Mp eu CU uNNU DAE RE EEEE 2 88 Official Coupling Compound usse dos roe pepe peo delia es nk eantess 2 88 Alternative Coupling Compound seseeeeeeeeee 2 88 ideal pu noL M 2 89 Hardware Installation Guide eec 3 1 Preparing To Mount The Transducers eene 3 1 How To Identify 1011 Transducers and Mounting Hardware 3 1 Selecting A Location For Clamp On Transducers 3 1 Clamp On Transducer Mounting Modes eene 3 2 Preparing The Pipe 3 3 Reflect Mode Mounting Frames And Spacer Bar 3 4 Reflect Mode With Spacer Bar Only seen 3 5 Direct Mode Mounting Frames Spacer Bar amp Spacing Guides 3 7 Using 1012T Mounting Tracks ccrrie eren nnne nuin tanum 3 11 Installing a 1012T Mounting Track in Reflect Mode 3 11 Installing a 1012T Mounting Track in Direct Mode ssse 3 13 Mounting Temperature Sensors ccccseccssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeesseeeeeneeeees 3 15 Wiring Temperature Sensor To
212. nfiguration employed during the flow calibration install the transducers on the pipe at the above noted spacing positions in accordance with the instructions provided on the transducer installation drawings Attach the transducer cables noting that the cable marked UP attaches to the trans ducer closest to the source of flow NOTE Before proceeding further ensure that the pipe is full of liquid It is not impor tant at this point that it be flowing 1 July 2002 Manual Addendum 1010FMA 4 Flowmeter Setup The following instructions require the use of the keypad and the menu The installer should become familiar with their use before proceeding further Switch the flowmeter on Press the lt MENU gt key On multi channel flowmeters use the arrow keys to select Dual Channel Flow or Dual Beam Flow depending on the mode utilized for the wet flow calibration Use the arrow keys to select either Clamp on Flow Tube or Clamp on Spool Select Full Site Setup and use the Right Arrow to select Channel Setup then select Recall Site Setup Use the Down Arrow to scroll to the site name indicated on the Calibration Diagnos tic Data Sheet Then press lt ENT gt The meter will perform a momentary Makeup routine that will take a few seconds and then begin operation Refer to your 1010 field manual for instructions on setting zero flow Setting zero flow must be performed each time the tra
213. nment place a dot with pencil or 3 8 Section 3 1010NFM 3J chalk in the center of the tapered roller at the bottom of the frame see A below While holding also mark along the front edge of the frame with pencil or fine chalk line see B below Pipe Dot Transducer gt A Transducer Transducer Edge Line Spacer Bar Dot Transducer Spacer Bar Line ie k Spacing Guide 7 Disassemble the spacer bar and the unmounted frame Use the bar as a straight edge and with one edge against the mounted frames tapered roller center and the other crossing the dot you drew draw a line crossing the dot see B above Set the bar aside Mylar Trim material from Spacing Guide inner edge if necessary LS 3 4 Edge WRAPPING THE MYLAR SPACING GUIDE AROUND THE PIPE 8 Wrap the mylar spacing guide around the pipe so that the left edge is against the transducer edge mark see C above Arrange so that one end overlaps the other by at least three inches Trim to fit if necessary but be sure not to trim at the overlapping end in order to keep it square 9 Realign left edge of the guide with the transducer edge mark Line up both vertical edges of the guide and ensuring that it is snug around the pipe mark along the overlapping edge 10 Remove Mylar spacing guide and lay it out on a flat surface Either measure the exact distance halfway between the overlap edge and the mark at
214. ns 1010 Series Flow Tube Installation Outline 992 Series Extended Flow Tube Installation Outline PFA DFT Flow Tube Installation Drawing Dual Path Transducer Set w Mounting Frames Installation Drawing 990 Series Transducer amp Tracks Very High Temp Direct Mode Installation Drawing 990 Series Transducer amp Assembly Very High Temp Direct Mode Installation Drawing 990 Series Transducers amp Tracks Very High Temp Reflect Mode C 1 Appendix 1010NFM 3J 990TRMVH 7B 191N1S 7 191N1S 8 191N1H 7 191N1H 8 991TN 7 991TN 8 991TN 7A 991TN 8A 991TW 8 191N 7 191N 8 192CNW 7 191N1W 7 191N1W 8 CC129 7 1011FTP 8 Installation Drawing 990 Series Transducers amp Assembly Very High Temp Reflect Mode Installation Drawing 191N1S Transducer NEMA 4 Outline Dimensions 191N1S Transducer NEMA 4 Installation Drawing 191N1H Transducer Hi Temp NEMA 4 Outline Dimensions 191N1H Transducer Hi Temp NEMA 4 Installation Drawing Temperature Sensor NEMA 4 Outline Dimensions Temperature Sensor NEMA 4 Installation Drawing 990 Series Temperature Sensor NEMA 4 Outline Dimensions 990 Series Temperature Sensor NEMA 4 Installation Outline Dimensions Insert Temperature Sensor 990E System Installation Drawing 191N NEMA 4 Transducer Outline Dimensions 191N NEMA 4 Transducer Installation Drawing Submersible Cable for use with 191 Series Transducers Installation Drawing 191N1W Transducer Submersible NE
215. nsducers are installed The zero adjustment has no effect on the wet flow calibration data or the cali bration Kc factor Using the arrow keys scroll to the Data Span Set Cal menu location Verify that the Kc calibration factor matches the value indicated on the diagnostic data sheet If you are measuring a liquid other than ambient water select the Liquid Class menu cell and Down Arrow from there to Viscosity Enter the correct viscosity for the liquid you will be monitoring Setup is now complete Press the MENU key twice to view the flow rate display DO NOT utilize the Save Site command when it appears When measurements are completed simply turn off the meter DO NOT save the site This might contaminate the wet flow calibration data already stored NOTE Contact Siemens Technical Services Department if any flow calibration data is accidentally removed or overwritten 2 July 2002 Manual Addendum 1010FMA 4 3 TRANSFER INSTALL FUNCTION All 1010 flowmeter operating systems version 3 00 20 and greater include the installation facil ity called Transfer Install This function permits the transducers to be repositioned while main taining all calibration parameters and operation established during the water calibration The Transfer Install function allows the transducers to be optimally positioned for a different fluid without the need for a new Initial Makeup procedure NOTE Prior to perfo
216. nt SONTRAGTION 7 2 Section 7 1010NFM 3J 7 4 MOUNTING THE TRANSDUCERS Two mounting configurations are available Adjacent mounting locates the two transducers alongside each other using a single mounting chain or strap In Line mounting locates the two transducers axially along the pipe using two mounting chains or straps On metal pipes the Receive Transducer is always located behind the Transmit Transducer On plastic pipes the Transmit Transducer is always located behind the Receive Transducer In both cases the cable entry will be on the same end of both trans ducers unlike the transit time configurations Adjacent mounting will provide the maximum sensitivity to flow Refer to the appropriate transducer installation drawing for the 191N1S Installation Drawing 191N1S 7 C2 Transducers Connect to UP Terminal on flow computer Flow Direction Connect to DOWN Terminal on flow computer REFLEXOR MODE ADJACENT TRANSDUCER MOUNTING Connect to UP Terminal on C2 Transducers flow computer TRANSMIT a d C2 Transducers ej H AV O Flow Direction Connect to 6 A DOWN Terminal on flow computer RECEIVE Flow Direction NOTE Transducer position shown is for metal pipes REFLEXOR MODE IN LINE TRANSDUCER MOUNTING 7 3 Section 7 1010NFM 3J 7 5 CONNECTION OF TRANSDUCER CABLES Connect transducer cables between the transducers and
217. nterpretation only fx drive Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Current transit drive code fx drive N burst length Ltn in Vfmax GAL MIN Vs max m s Vs min m s Empty Samples Cycle Max Damping Min Damping HF Site Setup Data SITE SETUP MENU ITEMS Current Transmit drive code selected during Initial Makeup The drive code controls the sonic transmit signal N burst length Transmit burst duration selected during Initial Makeup To change N count press lt Right Arrow gt At equal sign enter numeric value 1 to 9 only Ltn in mm Spacing distance between the transducers It will be in inches or millimeters depending on default units Vfmax The flow velocity in selected units corresponding to one whole cycle offset between upstream and downstream receive signals Vs max m s Maximum correctly calibrated Vs for current transducer spacing Vs min m s Minimum correctly calibrated Vs for current transducer spacing Empty 96 Value of Empty Alarm Setting The meter will declare an empty status if signal strength drops below this value Samples Cycle Digital sampling rate Max Damping Maximum signal damping Use to average digital data when an unstable condition occurs Min Damping Minimum signal damping Use to average digital data when an unstable condition occurs HF Flow registration correction parameter 2 68 Section 2 1010NFM 3J
218. nu cell The aeration percentage Vaer 96 appears in the Liquid Data section of the Diagnostic Menu The digital display screen also shows the current aeration percentage NOTE Severely aerated conditions may induce meter fault The 50 default usually allows enough leeway for continued operation For intermittent faults see memory interval in the Output Control menu To set the Aeration 96 Alarm To move the cursor to activate numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the Aeration percentage setpoint To store data press e Makeup Latch A fault condition caused by an empty pipe or a transient loss of power etc could temporarily interrupt operation After recovery from the fault the meter executes an in process makeup to restore operating parameters During the makeup the meter sets a Makeup Alarm flag which clears upon completion Therefore unless you were monitoring the unit continuously you could miss the fact that an In process Makeup occurred The Makeup Alarm Latch alerts you that the system implemented a Makeup by holding the Makeup Alarm active until you reset it manually by the simultaneous keystrokes lt Fn gt 6 where n represents the measurement channel In addition if the Datalogger is active with Status Alarms selected generating a Datalogger report will reset the Makeup Alarm Latch This ensures that the Alarm does not appear on succeeding Datalogger reports A Makeup Alarm appearing on a subse quen
219. o clock or three o clock position for Reflect Mode or one trans ducer at nine o clock and one transducer at three o clock for Direct Mode Mounting on a vertical pipe is recommended only if flow is in the upward direction When mounting on a vertical pipe flowing in a downward direction make sure there is sufficient back pressure in the system to maintain a full pipe Transducer locate d Transducer located at at9 ee 3 o clock END VIEW Horizontal Plane 3 1 3 CLAMP ON TRANSDUCER MOUNTING MODES Siemens clamp on transducers support Direct or Reflect mounting modes The flow computer recom mends a mounting mode after analyzing your pipe and liquid data entries However you can install clamp on transducers in the way that best suits your application and the transducer type you pur chased Upstream Downstream SS Pipe a Transducer T FLOW 07 REFLECT MOUNT Sonic Path Pipe shown in Top View for ease in visualizing sonic path 3 2 Section 3 1010NFM 3J We recommend Reflect mount whenever possible This is the simplest way to mount the transducers Also Reflect mount resists abnormal flow profile conditions such as cross flow within the flow stream Reflect mode supports the AutoZero function which zeroes the meter automatically without stopping flow In addition Reflect mount may be the only possibility if conditions do not allow access to the opposite side of the pipe Direct mount provides a shorter sonic beam p
220. old NoTot functionality 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module Option The Expanded I O Module Option provides all of the above plus the following outputs e The four signals that drive the pulse generator outputs Pgen 1 and Pgen2 and voltage outputs Vo1 and Vo2 of the meter create four current outputs Aux lo1 Aux lo2 Aux lo3 and Aux lo4 see diagram on next page e By spanning and assigning a system variable to 0 10 volt Vo1 and Vo2 or 0 5000 Hz pulse output Pgen1 and Pgen2 the module simultaneously outputs these signals to the Expanded I O Module Option Aux outputs For a 2 Channel meter the programming assignments are as follows TYPICAL 2 CHANNEL METER EXPANDED I O OPTION CONNECTIONS CHANNEL SIGNAL METER MENU DISPLAY CH1 Pgen1 Vol Vol Pgen1 CH2 Pgen2 Vol Vo2 Pgent e Note that the four Aux Io outputs are externally powered 2 May 2002 Manual Addendum 1010FMA 14 EXPANDED I O MODULE OPTION PROGRAMMING The diagram below illustrates the Expanded I O Module Option programming for a Single Channel meter with a 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module FLOW COMPUTER INTERNAL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS TERMINAL STRIP gt lot gt lot NOTE The 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module auxiliary output signals Aux lo1 Aux lo4 geneated from Pgen1 Pgen2 Vo1 and Vo2 are mirrored output currents For example if Vo1 is a 5 Vdc signal then Aux lo3 will be 12 mA NOTE The method used to create auxil
221. om Reflect to Direct Mount may solve the problem However operation may not be possible if there is poor liquid or pipe wall sonic conductivity or extreme liquid aeration NOTE If you receive a Detection Fault message it is strongly recommended that you con tact Technical Service for further orientation Using the F4 Reset Sequence You may encounter an operating problem that blocks access to the Diagnostics Menu or the meter may operate erratically after exposure to a power transient or some other traumatic event These cases may require use of the F4 reset sequence to restore operation The F4 reset sequence operates on two levels The first FA reset deletes all the data currently in Active Memory but leaves Datalogger data and all stored Site Setups intact This is the most desirable method since all you have to do to restore operation is reload a saved Site Setup If this fails then you have to resort to the second level of the F4 sequence which allows you to clear ALL Dynamic Memory Be aware that this erases all saved Site Setups including flow calibrated sites Datalogger Data and user defined pipe and transducer tables This will require you to completely re install the system and repeat all desired default settings custom pipe tables etc The chart on the next page shows the sequence of the F4 routine 2 79 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Power On Off F4 gt Clr Active Memory LT No Yes Clr Saved Data No
222. on application conditions Two common data entry mistakes may reduce performance If you enter an incorrect liquid viscosity value you could compromise the intrinsic flow profile compensation curve Incorrectly identifying the transducers will reduce accuracy Measured sonic velocity Vs errors will usually reveal this problem and by simply returning to the appropriate menu cells entering the correct values and then repeating the transducer installation it will resolve it 5 3 6 REPEATABILITY Some applications require repeatability rather than absolute accuracy System 1010 features excellent repeatability specifications since its digital no moving parts design avoids the adverse effects of hysteresis and other wear mechanisms typical of mechanical devices 5 3 7 DATASTABILITY Two main factors influence the system s data stability Data Scatter and Drift Data Scatter Data scatter is a rapid variation in flow readings within a span of about 0 1 to 5 seconds Minimal data scatter approximately 0 01 to 0 03 ft sec is a natural by product of digital computation that extracts the extremely small difference in the up vs down sonic transit time Minimal data scatter will not influ ence the integrated flow total over periods as short as several minutes Naturally it will be a greater percentage of the reading when the meter measures extremely low flow rates Poor liquid sonic con ductivity may attenuate sonic signal to a level that incre
223. on of the required Site Setup entries and the transducer installation procedure The meter enables the measurement channel auto matically after it receives all required site data and completes the transducer install routine The Site Enable menu cell allows you to disable or enable a measurement channel after there has been a successful transducer install The system does not require your presence for routine operation If a fault condition e g an empty pipe disrupts operation the system will recover automatically after the fault clears Use Channel En able No to turn off a channel that is currently unused but active for example if the transducers have been removed for servicing To disable a channel that is operating To access the Channel Enable option list press Move the cursor to No by pressing To disable the measurement channel press enr To enable a channel To access the Channel Enable option list press Move the cursor to Yes by pressing To enable the measurement channel press ev 2 3 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 1 3 HOW TO CREATE NAME A SITE SETUP Use this command to create a new Site Setup This is the first action required for an original installa tion Create Name Site inserts system defaults in all the appropriate menu cells You can edit these defaults as necessary to suit your needs You do not have to provide a site name in order to create a new Site Setup You can create a site simply
224. on the full screen stripchart plot Five pixel reports occur between major stripchart divisions NOTE The stripchart display identifies the real time when the computer records the most recent graduation You can time stamp any graduation by counting back in graduation intervals The default interval setting is 1 second To select a Time Base To access the Time Interval option list press To store your selection press ENT 2 51 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 8 4 STRIPCHART CLEAR Use this menu cell to clear the stripchart Selecting Yes erases all current stripchart data To erase the Stripchart plot To access the Stripchart Clear option list press Move the cursor to Yes by pressing O To clear the current Stripchart plot press e 2 9 THE DATALOGGER SETUP MENU This menu becomes available after picking Meter Type and Measurement Channel The integral Datalogger records data for eventual display on Graphics Screen or for connection to an RS 232 compatible external device printer computer network etc Use Datalogger Setup to select data items and real time events for datalogger reports You can also set the logging interval operating mode and screen format The Datalogger Setup menu allows you to choose time interval based data categories or event based status alarms and to specify the interval between data reports View Datalogger reports on the display screen or transmit them via the RS 232 Serial Port
225. ond transducer is attached to the spacer at the index hole specified in Step 1 3 Temporarily position the assembly in the 9 o clock position at the location where you have determined it would be mounted Ensure that it is a smooth area without any raised spots or seams Mark a generous area around the transducers 1 2 on either side and half again the length front and back with a pencil or chalk Remove the assembly 4 Prepare the two areas you marked by de greasing the surface if needed and removing any grit corrosion rust loose paint or surface irregularities with the abrasive pipe conditioning material provided Clean the pipe of all debris and abrasive particles 5 Remove transducer from the spacer bar that was attached through the REF hole Put a mounting strap around the pipe and engage an end into the adjusting screw adjusting screw should be pointing up Apply a 1 8 inch continuous bead of couplant compound down the center the long way of the contact surface of one of the transducers see Recommended Sonic Coupling Com pounds Section 5 page 5 9 Place the transducer on the pipe center in the middle of one of the areas you have cleaned with its cable connector pointing away from the other cleaned area Holding the transducer in place slide the mounting strap over it and under the clip if there is one and tighten with a screwdriver While tightening check to ensure that the white dot under the front label is centered on the
226. operating prob lem If a Pipe Simulator Test Block Test Fails 1 Replace the transducer cables If this allows you to complete the test as described above then the cables were defective If the cables are proven to be good replace the transducers on the pipe simulator with a known good set If the system functions properly then the original transducers under test are defective Please return any defective transducers to Siemens for repair If you replace the transducers and cables and the system still fails to function correctly then it is likely that the computer has a malfunctioning circuit module If you have spare modules you may try module substitution to identify the defective module Otherwise please call our Technical Service Department for further instructions 2 84 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 12 GUIDE TO A SMOOTH INSTALLATION NOTE The following should be used in conjunction with the System 1010 Field Manual Diagnostic and Troubleshooting procedures 2 12 1 CHECKLIST FOR 1010 STARTUP amp PERFORMANCE PROGRAMMING DDDODDODODUOLDU Select appropriate meter type Clamp On Reflexor Dual Beam Flow Tube etc Select proper channel Dual or Multi Channel Systems Only Use Full Site Setup Create Site or Recall Site Program accurate Pipe Diameter Material amp Wall Thickness or choose from tables Program accurate Liner Material and Thickness if applicable Ensure Liner is well bonded Program
227. operly Use the Data Span Set Cal menu to set the range for analog outputs and setpoints for Alarm relay outputs Additionally the Calibrate Flow Rate menu allows you to apply external adjustments to the meter s intrinsic primary outputs 2 42 Section 2 1010NFM 3J THE DATA SPAN SET CAL MENU STRUCTURE Data Span Set Cal gt Span Data f Max Flow Units Min Flow Units Max Vs m s X XXx numeric entry X Xxx numeric entry X Xxx numeric entry m Pe gt Min Vs m s E X Xxx numeric entry gt gt gt gt Max S G X Xxx numeric entry Min S G X XXx numeric entry Max Viscosity cS X Xxx numeric entry Min Viscosity Max Temperature c X Xxx numeric entry Min Temperature c X Xxx numeric entry X Xxx numeric entry Set Alarm Level c f High Flow Units gt X Xxx numeric entry Low Flow Units gt X Xxx numeric entry High S G gt X Xxx numeric entry Low S G E X Xxx numeric entry High Viscosity cS X Xxx numeric entry Low Viscosity cS X Xxx numeric entry High Temperature c X xxx numeric entry Low Temperature c X Xxx numeric entry Interface Vs m s c X Xxx numeric entry Aeration 96 c X Xxx numeric entry Makeup Latch gt Off On Calibrate Flowrate gt Intrinsic Ke Numeric entry f Multipoint Point Cp xx numeric entry f Indicated Rate C x xxx numeric entry 96 Correction gt x xx
228. or transit time operation However switching to Reflexor mode will keep the meter operational under these circumstances 5 4 9 VISCOUS LIQUIDS Highly viscous liquids tend to absorb some of the energy of the sonic beam This causes a reduction of signal amplitude when compared to low viscosity liquids However most high viscosity liquids are sufficiently conductive for acceptable operation A low Valc value usually indicates low sonic conduc tivity 5 4 10 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RATINGS We rate our standard universal transducers for operation up to 250 F We offer High H temperature flow transducers rated for operation up to 375 F We also manufacture Very High VH temperature transducers for applications where the temperature exceeds 375 F but is less than 450 F Please refer to Section 6 for flow tube pressure and temperature ratings 5 5 OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM 1010N MEMORY RESOURCES System 1010N s memory resources include both Read Only Memory ROM and battery backed Ran dom Access Memory RAM The ROM memory contains the system operating instructions on line help text default data and the pipe transducer and liquid tables The flowmeter uses 1 Megabyte of RAM standard to provide three discrete storage functions Active Memory Site Storage Memory Datalogger Memory Upon creating a site the meter copies all ROM based defaults into the meter s operational database the Active Memory This provides two ad
229. ory and their frequency is con trolled by the interval that was selected for each channel Providing each site with a unique name will enable you to sort these out when analyzing the data later Arithmetic Operation The dual channel instruments provide a modality of operation which permits the user to arithmetically combine through addition or subtraction the results of the two independent measurement channels Installation of each channel is done via the dual channel menu Site Saving and Recalling automati cally recall the contributing sites While the displays for each physical channel provide you all the data flow rate totals etc that are provided via independent channel operation user Input Output is largely oriented toward the virtual channel Channel 3 Multi Path Operation In many cases the performance of an ultrasonic transit time meter can be improved by allowing it to interrogate the flow field with more than one beam Imperfect flow profile conditions such as non axial cross flow or an off center higher rate flow core which can cause a single path machine to mis report the flow rate are often remedied in this way The multi path installation is similar to arithmetic opera tion except for the fact that the virtual or output channel has pipe dimension attributes which in the arithmetic meter channel it does not This means that when you install a multi path meter pipe data must be installed in Path 1 and Path 2 Your 101
230. our flowmeter according to the instruc tions in this manual The chart below shows the PC keyboard equivalents to the 1010 keypad keys while you are in the menu 1010 Keyboard PC Keyboard Description Up Arrow Up Arrow Move up 1 menu cell or Flow Display screen Down Arrow Down Arrow Move down 1 menu cell or Flow Display screen Right Arrow Right Arrow Move right 1 menu cell or Flow Display screen Left Arrow Left Arrow Move left 1 menu cell or Flow Display screen Menu L Cntrl L Toggle between Menu and Flow Display lt Datalog gt D Cntrl D Generate Datalogger report CLR Backspace or DEL Deselect list selection ALT Up Arrow U Cntrl U Logger Display Page Advance lt gt chg sign bar shift backslash Change numeric sign Can also type key lt ENT gt lt Carriage Return gt Enter Key Digits Digits Numerals zero through 9 Divide by upper case 8 Multiply by Plus X T Minus Equals Decimal Point Terminal Mode Menu Commands In addition to Menu the following commands followed by the ENT key can be used to control the flowmeter while in Terminal Mode Note that n refers to the flowmeter Channel number For a dual channel Arithmetic site Ch1 Ch2 or Ch1 Ch2 the virtual Channel is number 3 Logger Invokes the d
231. our selection press e 2 18 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 3 4 PIPE CONFIGURATION The Pipe Configuration menu cell in the Application Data menu presents a list of descriptions of piping configurations that could affect the flow profile characteristics such as Single Elbow Examine the option list Selecting a piping configuration that closely approximates conditions at or near your mount ing location allows the flow computer to compensate for the effect of upstream piping on flow profile The number of diameters between the upstream configurations and the transducer installation can be numerically entered via the Anomaly Diams menu cell To select a Piping Configuration To access the option list press To highlight the desired piping configuration press DIDI To register selection press en The default pipe configuration Fully Developed wll cause the flowmeter to use the conventional Rey nolds Compensation Table when compensating for liquid flow profile behavior Siemens DualPath 1 Path 1 Disignate Pipe Shape Near Transducers Liquid Class Water 20C 68F UniMass Table Create Edit Table Temperature Range 40F to 250F Pipe Configuration Fully Developed Anomaly Diams 1 Elbow K Use this menu cell to select Dbl Elbow the pipe configuration that Use this menu cell to enter the number of pipe diameters between the upstream configuration and the transducer installation Dbl Elbow Valve Expan
232. ow register described in the last paragraph Assigning Relay 1 and 2 Functions System 1010N depending on the model provides at least two alarm relays Please refer to the Hard ware Installation Drawing for wiring details Relays respond to any of the alarm conditions data func tions included on the Relay Option List RELAY OPTION LIST Not Used Not Active Power Off Power Off alarm occurs when power fails S G Specific Gravity value relay trip point Hi Temperature High temperature value relay trip point Low Temperature Low temperature value relay trip point High Flow Flow rate exceeds high flow setpoint Low Flow Flow rate falls below low flow setpoint Flow Alarm Flow rate exceeds or falls below flow setpoints Fault Alarm System loses receive signal Spacing Transducer spacing needs adjusting Empty Empty pipe alarm Aeration Aeration percentage exceeds alarm setpoint Reverse Flow Flow is in negative direction BatchTot Batch Sample total advances Interface Liquid interface setpoint exceeded Pos Total Positive total volume advances by 1 digit Neg Total Negative total volume advances by 1 digit Soft Fault Fault condition memory mode active To assign functions to Relay 1 To access the Relay option list press To move the cursor to the desired Relay assignment press DD To store selection press en Repeat procedure for Relay 2 2 10 3 ANALOG INPUT SETUP optional function
233. ownload of all data stored in the datalogger Note that the datalogger data is not erased from the flowmeter memory when it is downloaded It is recommended to capture this information into a file with a csv extension which can be easily imported into MS EXCEL SITE Invokes a full site download for a single channel or multi path 1010 flowmeter SITE n Invokes a site download for channel n where n the Channel 1 2 3 4 etc DP n Commands the flowmeter to download the digitized receive signal data for Channel or Path n CLRTOT Clears the Totalizer for a single channel or multi path 1010 flowmeter CLRTOT n Clears the Totalizer for Channel n of a multi channel flowmeter Lf on Turns on the Line Feed at the end of any text string sent by the flowmeter Lf off Turns off the Line Feed at the end of any text string sent by the flowmeter Provides a list of available Terminal Mode meter commands B 7 Appendix 1010NFM 3J Transfer of Information from a 1010 1020 Flowmeter to the PC With HyperTerminal active 1 Point to Transfers and click 2 Select Capture Text 3 Select desired drive path or directory enter a file name and click the Start button 4 Use the following conventions for data file names For site data or Waveshape data filename txt For Datalogger data filename csv 5 On PC type the proper command for the data desired Logger Site or DP and then En
234. p Q Channel 2 c same as Ch 1 Channel 3 Channel 3 Setup c Channel Setup c Ch 1 2 Flow Same as Ch 1 2 Flow THE METER FACILITIES MENU Meter Facilities gt c Preferred Units c English Metric C Table Setups C Pipe Table C Create Edit Pipe t Choose Pipe Class Choose Pipe Name m Outer Diameter in Wall Thickness in Liner Material Liner Thickness c Delete Pipe C Choose Pipe Class 1 Pick Pipe Name c Transducer Type C _ 1011 Universal fL 1011H High Precision 991 Universal c Datalogger Control Ot Display Datalogger Output Datalogger f Circular Memory Est Log Time Left Clear Datalogger c Memory Control rc Data Memory Left m f Memory Map Defragment c Analog Output Trim Trim lo1 Operate Trim 4mA Trim lo2 Operate Trim 4mA Trim Vo1 Operate Trim 2V Trim Vo2 Operate Trim 2V Trim Pgen 1 Operate Trim 1Khz continued Section 5 1010NFM 3J METER FACILITIES MENU continued Meter Facilities 5 gt Analog Output Trim gt Trim Pgen 2 Operate Trim 1Khz c RTD Calibrate e RTD 1 User Cal Factory RTD 2 User Cal Factory c Clock Set Date Time RS 232 Setup e c e Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Line Feed Network ID Rts Key Time Backlight ON 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 5 min 10 min THE CLAM
235. p Use the clamping screws to hold the trans ducers in place 991 Transducers Clamping Screw Under Test Xdr Clamping Bracket TT Transducer Pipe Simulator Pinstops To mount transducers on a 996PSP Pipe Simulator 1 Using coupling compound mount the transducers on the pipe simulator as shown on the previous page Slide each transducer until it presses against a pin stop Use the clamps to hold the trans ducer in place Connect cables between each transducer and the computer connectors for the channel under test The Up and Down orientation is not important Access the Installation Menu Select Meter Type Single Dual or Quad Channel depending on meter type Select the meter channel 1 2 3 or 4 depending on the measurement channel you intend to test Select Clamp on and then Channel Setup Access Channel Path Setup menu Move highlight to Create Name Site Create a new Site Setup e g TEST1 You can now enter data without altering an existing Site Setup Select the Pipe Data Menu Referencing either the English or metric pipe simulator chart below enter the pipe parameters corresponding to the transducer size under test 996PSP PIPE SIMULATOR CHART English Part Wall Mount Letter Number Thk in Mode Index 996PSP 0 0 076 Direct A 996PSP 1 0 077 Direct 996PSP 2 0 136 Direct 996PSP 3 0 344 Direct 996PSP 4 1 000 Direct The flo
236. pected when performing a Transfer Install for liquified gases or for clamp on natural gas flow meters 3 2 Saving New Transfer Install Site 3 2 1 To save the Transfer Installed site scroll to the Channel Setup menu and press the Right Arrow Press the Right Arrow again to select the Save Rename menu cell 3 2 2 Use the numeric keys to rename the Transfer Installed site with the same site name used in Step 3 1 2 above but with a T appended to the end of the site name e g 3CS40T 3 2 3 Press lt ENT gt to store data 3 July 2002 1010FMA 14 MANUAL ADDENDUM SYSTEM 1010 EXPANDED I O OPTION For Systems Equipped With 1010N 7 Modules Manual Addendum May 2002 FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION Call 800 275 8480 Website www controlotron com 631 231 3600 E mail info ultrasonicflow siemens com Fax 631 231 3334 Or sales ultrasonicflow siemens com E mail TSG ultrasonicflow 2siemens com Copyright 2006 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Made in the USA Manual Addendum 1010FMA 14 EXPANDED I O OPTION For Systems Equipped With 1010N 7 Modules INTRODUCTION The 1010N 2 I O Module and 1010N 7 Expanded I O Module both provide current lo1 lo2 voltage V01 and Vo2 and pulse rate Pgen 1 and Pgen 2 analog outputs The Expanded I O Module Option allows users to drive as many as four additional 4 20 mA loop powered instrumentation outputs
237. pical Pick Install Xdcr menu screen Note the automatic assignment of model numbers for the transducer and mounting track plus the designation of the number index Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Key Install after mounting transducers Transducer Model 1011 Universal Note selection of Transducer Size B3 type size and Xdcr Mount Mode Reflect mounting mode M a ap iai Note selection of mounting track part Spacing Method Track 1012TP number and number Ltn Value in 0 581 index Install Completed No Empty Pipe Set Channel Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Channel Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr This example requires a Model 1012T Mounting Track to accommodate size B3 universal transduc ers Note the reported number index You will be inserting an index pin into this hole on the track rail to position one of the transducers see diagram on next page 1 Perform all required menu steps up until the point where you respond to the Install Completed prompt Note the reported number index You will be inserting index pins into this hole and the reference hole on the track rail see diagram on next page Check to ensure that you have a matched set of transducers They both should have the same S N number but marked with either an A or B e g 100A and 100B 3 11 Section 3 1010NFM 3J Transducer Chain Tension Upstream Clamping Screw Downstream Screw Transducer Transducer
238. prior to using the Reversal Zero technique Reversamatic If the negative flow rate that the meter reads in the step during which the transducers are reversed is more negative than the lower flow limit the meter will re register positive and the Reversal Zero cycle will thus be corrupted Therefore postpone the installation of upper and lower flow limits until the reversal zero procedure is executed successfully For pipes that combine large diameters with very high flow velocities it may be necessary to move the upper and lower flow limits out of the way until the reversal zero is completed Moreover pipes of this size frequently have excellent intrinsic zero performance and may not even need zeroing 2 32 Section 2 1010NFM 3J ZeroMatic optional function NOTE ZeroMatic is used in the Reflect Mode only Invoking ZeroMatic clears any existing fixed zero offset Use this menu cell to select the ZeroMatic option If conditions permit the use of the Auto Zero function then the ZeroMatic option can be used as well To select and enable the ZeroMatic option In the Pick Install Xdcr menu press D to scroll to the Zero Flow Adjust menu cell To access the Zero Flow Adjust option list press NOTE If ZeroMatic is not running the Actual Zero menu item will be displayed next to the Zero Flow Adjust menu cell Siemens 2 Channel SITE1 Conforms indicated flow to Actual Zero Transducer Model Transducer Size Xdcr Mount
239. r 2 35 5 3 Data Span Set Cal 5 15 Data Span Set Cal Menu 2 42 Data Stability 5 3 Data Drift 5 4 Data Scatter 5 3 Deadband Control 2 35 Default Zero Setting 6 8 Defragment Command 2 5 Defragmenting Memory 4 8 Deleting Pipe s From Pipe Table 4 4 Density SG 2 13 Detection Fault 2 87 Poor Signal 2 88 Detection Mode 2 73 Diagnostics Performance Verification 2 86 Optimization 2 86 Diagnostic Data 5 16 Diagnostics Data Menu 2 62 Main Screen 2 64 Menu Structure 2 63 Main Menu Description 2 64 Direct Mode Mounting Frames Spacer Bar and Spacing Guide 3 7 Aligning The Transducers 3 10 Finding The Halfway Distance 3 10 Displaying Datalogger 4 6 Display Datalogger 2 56 Enable No line Wrap Mode Scroll 2 56 Display Screen 1 3 2 2 4 16 7 5 Doppler Shift Frequency 7 5 Dual Channel 1 1 1 9 Dual Channel Clamp on 1 11 Dual Channel Flow 1 11 Dual Channel Menu Chart 5 13 Dual Path 1 9 E Editing Default Parameters 2 6 Editing The Default SmartSlew 2 35 Editing The Density SG Setting 2 13 Nominal Specific Gravity 2 13 Default Specific Gravity 2 14 Editing The Estimated Vs Liquid Sonic Velocity 2 13 Editing The Viscosity cS Setting 2 14 Index 3 Index 1010NFM 3J Empty Pipe Set Menu 2 29 Entering Alphanumeric Strings 1 8 Entering Numeric Data 1 7 Establishing The Correct Distance Between The Tracks 2 24 See also Section 3 Estimated Vs m s 2 13 Estimating Log Time Left 4 8 F Fast Fourier Transforms 7 5 Fault
240. r connectors for the channel under test The Up and Down orientation is not important 2 81 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 4 Access the Installation Menu Select Meter Type Single Dual or Quad Channel depending on meter type Select the meter channel 1 2 3 or 4 depending on which measurement channel you intend to test Select Clamp On and then Channel Setup 5 Access the Channel Path Setup menu Move the highlight to Create Name Site Create a new Site Setup e g TEST1 You can now enter data without altering an existing Site Setup 6 Select the Pipe Data Menu Referencing either the English or metric pipe simulator chart below enter the pipe data corresponding to the transducer size under test 1012TB 1 amp 2 Universal Transducer Test Block Chart English Part Wall Mount Spacing Number Thk in Mode Offset 1012TB 1 0 100 Reflect Nominal 1012TB 1 0 100 Direct Minimum 1012TB 2 0 100 Reflect Nominal 1012TB 2 0 100 Direct Minimum System Defaults 1012TB 1 amp 2 Universal Transducer Test Block Chart Metric Part Pipe OD Wall Mount Spacing Number mm Thk mm Mode Offset 1012TB1 16 5 2 54 Reflect Nominal 1012TB1 29 2 2 54 Direct Minimum 1012TB2 50 8 2 54 Reflect Nominal 11 1012TB2 88 9 2 54 Direct Minimum Use Ltn System Defaults 7 Access the Pick Install Xdcr menu Check the Transducer Size menu cell
241. r is rated suit able for hydrogen atmosphere See System Hardware description be low ONTROLOTRON FM e HAUPPAUGE NY 11788 CLASS 1 ZONE 1 AEx d ia IIB H2 f5 APPROVED EXPLOSION PROOF WITH I S OUTPUTS FOR CL I GROUPS BC D CL Il GROUPS E F G INSTALL PER CONTROLOTRON DRAWING 1010 443 A CL I DIV 2 GROUPS A B C D SUITABLE FOR CL II DIV 2 GROUPS E F G ENCL TYPE 4X IP66 RATING 250 VAC OR 36 VDC MAX 25W CAUTION DISCONNECT FROM SUPPLY BEFORE OPENING KEEP COVER TIGHT WHILE CIRCUITS ARE ALIVE CONDUIT SEALS MUST BE INSTALLED WITHIN 18 OF THE ENCLOSURE PEN COMPUTER MODEL Exia Aase VM SN MADE IN USA SYSTEM HARDWARE ENCLOSURE The System 1010WX Series flowmeters have two available case configurations Standard 1010WX Case The System 1010NWX Series flowmeter housed in a cast aluminum enclosure suitable for gas groups up to and including hydrogen Class 1 Zone 1 AEx d ia IIB H2 T5 Alternate Light Weight 1010WX Case The System 1010WX Series flowmeter housed in a lightweight cast aluminum case suitable for gas groups up to and including propane Class 1 Zone 1 AEx d ia IIB T5 1 19 Section 1 1010NFM 3J ELECTRONIC MODULES All standard 1010DN and 1010MN flowmeter modules are available in the 1010WX series See the appropriate manual section for functionality of these modules DISPLAY AND KEYPAD OPTIONS The standard 1010WX flowmete
242. r the analog span The viscosity units are centistokes with no alternatives offered Min Viscosity cS The Min Viscosity cS menu cell stores the minimum range for the analog span The viscosity units are centistokes with no alternatives offered Max Temperature The Max Temperature menu cell stores the maximum temperature range for the analog span If metric preferences are selected prior to site creation the temperature units will be in Centigrade If English preferences are selected prior to site creation the temperature units will be in Fahrenheit Min Temperature The Min Temperature menu cell stores the minimum temperature range for the analog span If metric preferences are selected prior to site creation the temperature units will be in Centigrade If English preferences are selected prior to site creation the temperature units will be in Fahrenheit 2 7 2 SET ALARM LEVELS The Alarm Setpoints menu allows you to select system alarm functions Alarms appear locally on the LCD digital display In addition you can use the Relay Setup menu to assign those functions to the system s relays You may select from high or low energy or flow rate liquid interface Vs and liquid aeration alarm functions Entry of all alarm setpoints is accomplished using the selected rate units You can enable or disable a Makeup Alarm Latch to keep the makeup alarm active until you reset it manually by an Fn 6 simultaneous key press To access the Ala
243. rameters about this model s hardware and software 4 4 PREFERRED UNITS The selection you make in this menu cell becomes the default units for all menu items and data outputs You can choose either English or metric units The factory setting is English To specify metric default units for all meter functions To access the Preferred Units option list press Move the cursor to Metric by pressing ID To register your selection press ENT 4 1 Section 4 1010NFM 3J 4 2 THE TABLE SETUPS MENU The Table Setups menu allows you to pre condition your pipe table and transducer types The edits made in Table Setups become the default settings for creating a new site Transducers marked in the Transducer Types menu will be preferentially selected when the meter recommends transducers during the automatic Pick Install Transducer routine To access the Table Setups menu press C Table Setups c Pipe Table Transducer Type 4 2 1 PIPE TABLE The factory programmed pipe table describes over sixty standard English and metric pipes The table can save you programming steps by loading all required data at once from option list selection The Pipe Table configuration is PIPE CLASS gt PIPE NAME Pipe Class presents a list of standard metric and English Pipe classifications Selecting a class e g ASA Carbon Steel conditions the Pipe Name option list to all the stored pipes within that class see Menu Chart above Selec
244. ransducer recommendations that are listed in order of priority from left to right Select the appropriate transducer size with consideration given to the computed transducer recommendations In the example below we will install the B3 transducer size After you make your transducer selection the meter automatically computes the preferred mounting mode and transducer spacing index Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Recommended Xdcrs B3 B2 Transducer Model 1611 Universal Transducer Size Select Xdcr Xdcr Mount Mode Invalid Letter Index Invalid Number Index Invalid Spacing Method Invalid Ltn Value Invalid Install Completed No Empty Pipe Set Chan Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Chan Not Setup NOTE The meter only indicates the part number of the 1011 Universal Transducer mounting track or spacer bar It does not indicate this information for other transducer types Note the Number Index value This value corresponds to the index marked on the spacer bar or mounting track The value of Ltn represents the actual distance in inches or mm between the front surfaces of the upstream and downstream transducers 1 16 Section 1 Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Transducer Hodel Empty Pipe Set Zero Flow Adjust Recommended Xdcr Mount Mode Reflect 1611 Universal Transducer Size B3 Ndcr Mount Mode Reflect Spacing Offset Hinimum Humber Index 7 Spacing Method Track 1812TP Ltn Ualue in 8 778 Install Completed Ho
245. rap Mounting Kit P N Pipe Diameter Band Sizes Qty 1012MS 1A 2 50 8mm to 7 88 2 128 2 177 8mm 1012MS 1 2 50 8mm to 13 88 2 152 2 330 2mm 1012MS 2 13 330 2mm to 24 188 2 280 2 609 6mm 1012MS 3 24 609 6mm to 48 152 2 1219 2mm 3 1 6 REFLECT MODE WITH SPACER BAR ONLY The spacer bar eliminates manual spacing measurements and provides rigidity for mounting the trans ducers while maintaining axial alignment 3 5 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 1011 Series Transducer Spring Clip Spacer Bar Spacer Bar ETE AS Number Index Reference Securing Screw Index Securing Screw Mounting Strap INSTALLATION REFLECT MOUNT WITH TRANSDUCERS AND SPACING BAR 1 Perform all required menu steps until the flow computer issues the number index and prompts you to press enr to finish the transducer install routine Stop at this point Note the number index value displayed in the Pick Install menu You will use this index to properly space the transducers Check to ensure that you have a matched set of transducers They both should have the same S N number but marked with either an A or B e g 100A and 100B 2 Assemble the transducers to the spacer bar with the cable connectors facing away from each other as shown above The spacer bar is attached to a transducer using a transducer index screw One transducer is attached using the REF hole on the spacer bar The sec
246. res and reports the aeration level as the analog output Vaer This repre sents the relative degree of aeration detected within the flow stream Its computer reports the Vaer level until it impedes operation and forces a Fault Alarm The Vaer output accommodates applications requiring an aeration indicator The Vaer also appears on the display screen The aeration percentage can be used as an alarm relay set point You can set the aeration alarm setpoint such that it trips before aeration reaches a level that impairs flow measurement NOTE Before performing the installation routine allow enough time for the liquid to flush out all air trapped in the pipe 5 5 Section 5 1010NFM 3J 5 4 7 SLURRIES High density undissolved solids e g sand slurry may cause application problems if present in suffi cient quantity to scatter the sonic beam significantly Low density solids such as organic materials coal slurries and unaerated sewage sludge are usually adequate sonic conductors and their sonic impedance is very close to most liquids Excessive mineral solids though could trigger the aeration alarm 5 4 8 TWO PHASE LIQUIDS Two phase liquids e g oil and water cause some sonic beam scattering However these usually conduct sonic beams sufficiently for proper operation unless heavy aeration is present also Two phase liquids with large quantities of different components such as sand or free gas could prove to be too attenuative f
247. ress the Right Arrow Press Down Arrow and scroll to the Pick Install Xdcr menu cell Press Right Arrow Install transducers as required refer to Section 3 for procedures NOTES e Mount the transducers using the selected mode direct or reflect Please refer to the trans ducer mounting procedures detailed in Section 3 When using a mounting track or a spacer bar in reflect mode locate the first trans ducer at the Reference Index and the second transducer at the recommended Number Index If you are mounting the transducers independently you must use the recommended distance Ltn to space the transducers You must use the proper sonic coupling compound See Recommended Sonic Coupling Compounds in Section 5 for appropriate type and part number The pipe must be completely filled with a liquid which can be either flowing or at zero flow 2 25 Section 2 1010NFM 3J After transducers are properly mounted the flow computer completes its Initial Makeup command and the Install Completed menu cell appears To access the Install Completed option list press the Right Arrow Press Down Arrow and scroll to the Install Completed menu cell and then press lt ENT gt unless otherwise directed to do so by Controlotron s Technical Service Department Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Key Install after mounting transducers Transducer Model 1011 Universal Transducer Size B3 Xdcr Mount Mode Direct
248. rformed by the flow computer The horizontal scale represents flow velocity with the higher velocities on the right and lower velocities on the left The vertical axis is relative amplitude or magnitude each bar shows the relative amplitude for a velocity range The reported flow rate is the mean value of the included Spectra Graph bars It is computed by excluding signals that are lower to the left of than the Low Limit Cursor or higher to the right of than the High Flow Cursor or lower under than the Noise Cursor Measurement Channel Meter Type ur Name Siemens 2 Channel 11 RETLEX1 I2 TS E I FENTE 96 GALSHIN Signal Amplitude High Limit Cursor Low Limit Cursor Noise Level Set Cursor Flow Velocity Range 9 EXAMPLE OF ASPECTRA DISPLAY SCREEN 7 5 Section 7 1010NFM 3J 7 10 CURSOR USE ON THE SPECTRA GRAPH CURSOR USAGE TIPS High Limit Cursor This cursor appears as a vertical line on the right side of the Spectra Graph All signals to the right of this line will be excluded from the flow calculation Use this adjustment if the right side of the Spectra Graph has noise that is larger in amplitude than the signal that is produced by flow The cursor may be arbitrarily placed at two times the maximum flow expected Low Limit Cursor This cursor appears as a vertical line on the left side of the Spectra Graph All signals to the left of this line will be excluded from the
249. right down to zero flow however the measurement of the transit time delta is dependent on the similarity or match of the electronics cables and ultrasonic transducers Consequently some flow offset or zero offset may be present in any installation To eliminate this residual zero offset Controlotron has developed several different methods to insure proper zero flow compensation The following paragraphs de scribe each method and when they should be used AutoZero When the 1011 transducers are mounted in the Reflect Mode configuration see paragraph 3 1 5 the AutoZero routine is automatically invoked at the end of the Initial Makeup Flow does not have to be stopped to perform AutoZero since only the pipe wall signal is used in determining the zero offset and not the liquid component The AutoZero routine performs a one time analysis of the pipe wall compo nent of the ultrasound signal to quantify any residual mismatch in the hardware Once the AutoZero routine is complete the system memorizes this measured zero offset and subtracts this value from the flow reading 2 30 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Actual Zero The Actual Zero function simply averages the indicated zero flow readings over a user defined time period then stores this average value in memory Under normal operation the indicated flow reading is zero compensated by simply subtracting this memorized value from the uncompensated flow reading Actual Zero is the most po
250. rm Setpoints menu press lel 2 45 Section 2 1010NFM 3J High Flow The High Flow Alarm menu cell allows you to set the HI Alarm relay trip point and the position of the HI Alarm cursor on the Stripchart Display The entered value must fall within the volumetric flow Vfo analog span for the HI Alarm cursor to appear on the Graphic Screen To set the High Flow Alarm To activate numeric entry press Use numeric keys to type the High Flow Alarm setpoint in the selected flow rate units To store data press er Low Flow The Low Flow menu cell allows you to set the LO Alarm relay trip point and position of the LO Alarm cursor on the Stripchart Display The entered value must fall within the volumetric flow Vfo analog span for the Low Alarm cursor to appear on the Graphic Screen To set the Low Flow Alarm To activate numeric entry press S Use the numeric keys to type the Low Flow alarm setpoint To store data press enr The following Alarm Relay Setpoints are set in the same way as the two previously shown examples by entering numeric values and storing the data High S G This selection sets the High S G alarm function the specific gravity of a selected liquid Low S G This selection sets the Low S G alarm function the specific gravity of a selected liquid High Viscosity cS The High Viscosity cS menu cell sets the high liquid viscosity alarm relay setpoint The viscosity units are centistokes with
251. rming Transfer Install make sure that the water calibration proce dure was performed and a saved active site exists 3 1 Transfer Install Procedure To initiate the Transfer Install function proceed as follows 3 1 1 In the Application Menu press the Right Arrow to select the Liquid Class menu cell Scroll and highlight Estimated Vs m s from the option list 3 1 2 Use the numeric keys to change the Estimated Vs to the Estimated Vs value of the customer selected liquid To enter new Estimated Vs value press lt ENT gt Proceed to the Pick Install Xdcr menu and select the same transducer mounting mode and spacing offset that was selected for the water calibration Re space the transducers to the index position indicated by the flowmeter Scroll to the Install Completed menu cell and select Transfer Install from the option list If Transfer Install does not appear in the option list then either the Estimated Vs or the transducer size was improperly entered In this case recall the water calibration site and start the procedure again at Step 3 1 1 above For MultiPath systems repeat Step 3 1 6 above for the remaining paths The flowmeter should now be operational at the new spacing location Depending on the size of the pipeline the change in the estimated sonic veloc ity Vs and the repositioning of transducers the flowmeter may not operate out of Fault even if the spool or pipe is filled with liquid This can be ex
252. ront and back with a pencil or chalk Move or revolve the assembly away from the area marked loosen straps if necessary to do this 4 Prepare the two areas you marked by de greasing the surface if needed and removing any grit corrosion rust loose paint or surface irregularities with the abrasive pipe conditioning material provided Clean the pipe of all debris and abrasive particles 5 Reposition the assembly over the center of the prepared surfaces Tighten the mounting straps to seat the assembly firmly on the pipe Do not overtighten Apply a continuous 1 8 inch bead of coupling compound to the center of the face of a transducer then slide it into the mounting frame but holding it away from making contact with the pipe until it butts up against the stop to keep from smearing couplant where it s not needed then push down onto the pipe Tighten the transducer clamping screw to hold the transducer firmly in place Repeat for the other transducer 6 Observing the upstream to downstream orientation attach the UP and DN cables to the transduc ers Attach the other ends to the flowmeter s UP and DN terminals See Engineering Drawing 1010N 7 Single Channel or 1010DN 7 Dual Channel 7 You can now press the ENT key to finish the transducer install routine The available Mounting Strap kits are listed below Each kit comes with up to two band sizes to cover its designated pipe diameter range and a spacing guide for Direct Mount St
253. rrent loop by shorting together terminals 1 and 4 of the unused TB2 temperature sensor terminal block 3 Ground the voltage sensing leads terminals 2 and 3 of TB2 by connecting them both to terminal 5 e Tighten all TB1 and TB2 terminal block screws e Replace I O Board and secure with four captive screws e Replace Access Cover and finger tighten captive thumbscrew 3 2 2 1010N SUPPLY AND RETURN CONNECTIONS Terminals for the supply and return sensor connections are located on the Analog Input Module as previously shown For other terminal locations on System 1010N Single Channel and Dual Channel units see drawings 1010N 5 7 or 1010N 5D 7 respectively For terminal locations on Multi Channel units see drawing 1010N 8M 7 WARNING Set flowmeter and instrumentation power to OFF when inserting or removing the module or when making connections to TB1 TB2 TB3 and TB4 3 17 Section 3 1010NFM 3J TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTIONS 1010N 5D ANALOG INPUT MODULE SHOWN WITH SCREW COVER AND I O MODULE 1010N 2 REMOVED TB1 TB2 T1 OR CH 1 TS T2 OR CH 1 TR SUPPLY RETURN sean ox wan ox EB Ea w 3 284 22282 a
254. rs event based data logging that operates concurrently with time interval based data logging The event based function generates a Datalogger report upon the triggering of any of the alarms This is useful for recording transient alarms e g a liquid interface or a short aeration alert 2 55 Section 2 1010NFM 3J NOTE An Alarm Event report will be generated immediately after the transition from a non alarm to an alarm event The reverse situation alarm state to non alarm state does not trigger the event based Datalogger Event based Datalogger messages conserve memory However if you use this feature to monitor a level such as Flow Alarm set the alarm threshold high enough to avoid repetitive triggering You must select Site ID Name and Time to time stamp the alarm events Note that on the Datalogger report a represents a reserved letter code space inactive alarm and a letter code represents an active alarm To select Datalogger Event items To access the Datalogger Events option list press l Move cursor to desired item by pressing J QA Py ther press enr to select it Note that a plus sign appears before the item To de select Datalogger Events To move the cursor to the item press DD renfe Note that this removes the plus sign from the item After selecting all desired items press to leave the Datalogger Events option list 2 9 5 DISPLAY DATALOGGER Use this menu cell to enable and
255. rs are not equipped with a graphic display or local keypad The local display and keypad are options that can be combined with different case enclosure configurations which include the standard case with a window the standard case without a window the lightweight case with a window and the lightweight case without a window CAUTION Consult local codes for permit needed to setup units using the graphic display and local keypad Setup must be done with cover opened 0 o e o c Q o o O O P Standard Case Enclosure with Window includ ing the 1010WX equipped with optional graphic display and local keypad Standard Case Enclosure without Window includ ing the 1010WX equipped with optional graphic display and local keypad Shown with cover opened 1 20 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 THE 1010N INSTALLATION MENU Programming System 1010N requires no special experience or training This field manual contains all the necessary information If you intend to connect this instrument to an external device then please have the instruction manual for the device available for reference The following paragraphs present a generic menu reference that applies to all configurations of 1010 NEMA meters Please refer to the Reflexor and Flow Tube sections for instructions specific to those operating modes This section contain
256. rt Contains a number of special elements that deserve mention e The spanning of the stripchart s vertical axis obeys the same user settings that define the span limits for the analog outputs If the variable pegs the numerical expression of that variable will also peg e Alarm limits or thresholds are indicated by triangular cursors shown near the stripchart bar These are also defined in the Data Span Set Cal area of the menu e Each time the stripchart is altered in a manner that can cause misinterpretation of already dis played data re spanned new interval etc a vertical bar is drawn on the stripchart Only the data to the left of the vertical bar is correctly displayed e Dueto limitations in display area certain rate or total units may be displayed with fewer characters than are needed for unambiguous interpretation Consult the 1010 s Flow and Total Units menu cells for clarification in these cases Section 4 1010NFM 3J Selected Measurement Measured Sonic Channel Velocity in m s Signal Strength Select Meter Type Site Name Dual Channel Flow Digital Average Siemens 2 Channel 1 Unit 1 im Volumetric Flow DA FLOW GAL MIN vs Alp ere 1286 63 Totalizer Mode NTOTAL HI LO NTOTAL GAL Active Alarm wee 1 Digital Flow Total o 112 38 Date amp Time Strip Chart a Data Vfo J Volumetric ry Terr rT rT roy TTTTT Flow Rate 9 26 12 45 Instantaneous Stripchart Stripchart Flow Rate Alarm
257. ry You can now use the number keys and the deci mal point key to type a new value If applicable you can use lt gt keys to change the mathematical sign of the number Press lt ENT gt to store the numeric data NOTE All Numeric Data cells provide a four function calculator via the keypad s arithmetic function keys Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Enter pipe Outer Diameter manually Select Pipe Class Manual Entry Select Pipe Size N A Pipe Material Steel Wall Thickness 0 100 Liner Material None Liner Thickness 0 000 Pipe Data Section 1 1010NFM 3J Entering Alphanumeric Strings An alphanumeric string is a series of numbers and letters and also the Quotation Mark and the Pound Sign symbol You can also use a space The meter uses these to identify a specific site setup or user modified table The 1010N keypad does not provide letter keys However when you access a menu cell that requires an alphanumeric string answer the menu cell right hand column provides an eight character entry field Press the Right Arrow to access the field This selects the first character position Note that the prompt changes to a question mark With the cursor at the first character position use the Up or Down Arrows to scroll through a single character list For example as shown below an Up Arrow at the first character position produces the letter uppercase A Press ing the Right Arrow moves the
258. s OK Cancel Apply 6 You will now see a blank terminal screen Next left click File on the top menu bar Drag the highlight down to Properties and then left click 7 Left click the Settings tab Expand the Emulation box by left clicking the Down Arrow on the right hand side Drag the highlight down to VT 100 and then left click to select it as shown below 1010 connect Properties Phone Number Settings Function arrow and ctrl keys act as Terminal keps Q Windows keys Emulation mz H Backscroll buffer lines 500 BH O Beep three times when connecting or disconnecting ASCII Setup OF Cancel 8 Next left click on the ASCII Setup button see screen above In the ASCII Sending dialog box make sure that both send line ends with line feeds and Echo Typed characters locally are UNCHECKED In the ASCII Receiving dialog box left click to place a check mark before the Append line feeds to incoming line ends dialog When your screen looks like the example below left click the OK button B 4 Appendix 1010NFM 3J ASCII Setup ASCII Sending Send line ends with ine feeds Echo typed characters locally Line delay milliseconds Character delay p milliseconds ASCII Receiving Append line feeds to incoming line ends O Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII O wrap lines that exceed terminal width 9 You are now ready
259. s a smooth area without any raised areas seams etc With a pencil or chalk mark a generous area around the frame 1 2 on either side and half again the length front and back Remove the assem bly 3 Prepare the area you marked by de greasing surface if needed and removing any grit corrosion rust loose paint or surface irregularities with the abrasive material provided 4 Put a mounting strap around the pipe and engage an end into adjusting screw screw should be pointing up Position frame in the middle of area you have cleaned and centered on the pipe with its angled end facing away from where the other frame will sit Transducer Clamping crum Screw S od Spring Clip Mounting Strap Adjusting Screw WRAPPING STRAP UNDER PIPE AND ATTACHING TO ADJUSTING SCREW 5 Slide the mounting strap over it and under the clip if there is one and tighten with a screwdriver While tightening check to ensure that the center of the tapered roller is centered on the pipe 6 Attach the second frame to the spacer bar with an index spacer screw into the index hole specified in Step 1 The angle on the frame should be facing away from the direction the length of the bar is going Now attach the free end of the spacer bar by inserting an index spacer screw through the REF hole on the spacer bar and then into the hole on the mounted frame Tighten Sight to ensure that this frame is lined up in center of pipe and while holding alig
260. s 2 9 Entering 2 10 ASA Schedule 2 10 Thickness Gauge 2 10 Z Zero Acquisition Routine 6 8 ZeroClr 2 31 Zero Fault Set Option 2 36 Zero Flow Adjust Menu 2 30 Index 11 Index 1010NFM 3J Actual Zero 2 31 AutoZero 2 30 ReversaMatic 2 31 ZeroMatic 2 31 Index 12 TRADEMARKS TradeMarks of Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc AutoZero MultiPulse Heflexor HeversaMatic SmartSlew UniMass Widebeam ZeroMatic Windows 95 98 NT 2000 XP Windows 3 x x Terminal MS Word MS Excel and HyperTerminal are a trademarks of MicroSoft Corporation Flaretek is a registered trademark of Fluroware Inc Chaska MN Swagelok is a registered trademark of Swagelok Inc Solon OH SIEMENS DUCTILE IRON PIPE Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc 155 Plant Avenue Hauppauge New York 11788 3801 Tel 1 631 231 3600 Toll Free 1 800 275 8479 Fax 1 631 231 3334 Web www controlotron com E mail info ultrasonicflow siemens com Liner Cement Single Double 72 84 56 66 1 3 96 157 i 62 80 1 39 60 02 64 40 1 67 60 06 64 20 2 00 60 20 64 82 2 3860 75 34 1 62 72 10 76 00 1 95 72 10 76 88 2 39 72 10 87 54 1 72 84 10 88 54 2 22 84 10 STAINLESS STEEL HASTELLOY C amp TITANIUM PIPE 12 750 14 000 16 000 18 000 20 000 22 000
261. s Makeup Tx Dn Fixed ALC Graph AutoZero Test Facilities To start a Test Routine To scroll the cursor to the test routine press A To access the test option list press I Press A move the asterisk to Yes To start the routine press ENT To end the routine press TEST FACILITIES COMMANDS Commands the meter to re acquire the receive signal Enables an on screen signal display To access graph parameters press Right Arrow Select Yes Press ENT Scroll and press lt ENT gt to select parameter s Press Left Arrow to return to graph and view selected parameters Tx Up Forces upstream transmission only Tx Dn Forces downstream transmission only Fixed ALC Select Yes to command amplifier to hold a constant gain TX Up Fixed ALC Fixed ALC while transmitting up only TX Dn Fixed ALC Fixed ALC while transmitting down only Graph AutoZero Waveform of the ZeroMatic signal reference For technical service diagnostics Makeup The Test Facility Makeup routine allows you to command the meter to re acquire the operating param eters established during the Initial Makeup routine invoked by the Install Completed command see paragraph 2 4 Pick Install Xdcr Menu To invoke the Makeup routine Press QA to scroll the cursor to Makeup Press oR access the test option list Press OA move the cursor to Yes Press ENT to start the makeup routine 2 72 Section 2
262. s a general description of how to enter site setup data via the 1010N Installation Menu It assumes that you have already selected a meter type as described in the Getting Started section For convenience it presents the Installation Menu in the same sequence as it appears on the menu screen Please note however that it is not necessary to program the meter sequentially The conventions used with these instructions are e When the text refers to a keypad key it will be enclosed in less than and greater than gt symbols e g MENU lt ENT gt Up Arrow etc Where a visual of the key is shown this means press this key e When the text refers to a menu or menu cell name it will be enclosed with square brackets e g Pipe Data Channel Enable etc e Each menu includes an image of its main screen and a diagram of its structure The rightmost column of the structure diagram lists the option list choices of the menu cell if applicable General Installation Menu Notes e fa power failure occurs while you are entering or editing data the entered data may not be retained in Active Memory e Although you can operate the meter immediately after completion of the site setup we recommend that you preserve your settings by saving them under a site name Site data can be saved at any time before invoking either the Recall Site Setup or the Create Rename Site commands When issued these commands overwrite all data pre
263. s moves the highlight to Choose Pipe Name To access the Pipe Name option list press cJ Scroll the option list to the pipe to be deleted by pressing To remove it from the pipe table press enr TRANSDUCER TYPE MENU During the Transducer Install procedure System 1010 analyzes the entered pipe and liquid data then automatically generates a list of the transducer sizes most suited for the application 4 4 Section 4 1010NFM 3J The Transducer Type menu allows you to place marks next to any transducers that you may want the meter to consider preferentially during its recommendation routine These transducers will be included on the recommended list which appears from on the reverse video prompt line at the top of the display screen The left most transducer on the list is the most applicable while the right most transducer on the list is the least applicable TRANSDUCER TYPE MENU STRUCTURE Transducer Type C 1011 Universal c 1011H High Precision gt 991 Universal To mark Transducers Access the Transducer Type menu by pressing Scroll the highlight by pressing to a transducer type e g 1011H High Precision then press S to access the size option list Scroll the option list by pressing and then press ENTI to mark desired transducers Note that a plus sign appears before each marked transducer If you want to clear a marked transducer move the highlight to the transducer the
264. sent in Active Memory e Wedonotrecommend that you attempt to operate the flowmeter at a new site by recalling and then editing an existing site setup Each site must have its own set of transducer install parameters even if the data from the recalled site setup is identical Always issue the Create Rename Site to begin a new site setup This will fill all the menu cells with defaults to eliminate the possibility of retaining unwanted parameters e The meter allows you to create your own personal site setup defaults After creating asite setup and editing default parameters as desired save the site using the name FASTSTRT The next time you issue the Create Name Site command your custom parameters will become the system s defaults 2 1 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 1 THE CHANNEL SETUP MENU Available after picking a meter type and a measurement technology Use this menu to manage site setups You can create recall delete and save entire site setups You can apply Site Security which permits read only access to the Installation Menu unless you enter a password The Channel Enable switch allows you to disable and enable a measurement channel Be aware that Site Name option lists only show sites that are consistent with the currently selected meter type CHANNEL SETUP MENU STRUCTURE Channel Setup c Recall Site Setup Site Name List C Channel Enable ge No Create Name Site Site Name Entry Edit f o es Th
265. sents the material e g S Steel P PVC T Teflon K Kynar In this example we will install a size 1S Flow Tube This 1011FTP 1S Stainless Steel unit uses a 5 8 Swagelok Tube Fitting Siemens 2Channel 1 FLOW1 Pick Flow Tube size and Type Select FlowTube Install Completed Empty FlowTube Set Zero Flow Adjust Install FlowTube To select size 7S press ev This moves the highlight to Install Completed 6 6 Section 6 1010NFM 3J You can complete the Installation procedure without actually mounting the flow tube at its intended location Fill the flow tube completely with liquid and connect the Up and DN cables according to the Installation Outline Drawing Complete the instructions in this section If you choose to mount the Flow Tube first please conform to the guidelines presented in this section and the Installation Drawing In any case do not proceed with these instructions until the flow tube is filled completely with liquid After filling the flow tube with liquid press Ilio access the Install Completed option list and then move the cursor to Install by pressing DID Siemens 2Channel 1 FLOW1 Key Install to start operation Select FlowTube 1S Install Completed gt Yes Empty FlowTube Set New Makeup Zero Flow Adjust Chan Not Setup Install FlowTube To invoke install routine press ET This triggers Initial Makeup an internal process that interrogates the flow
266. simple menu driven interface for site programming During the installation procedure you tell the system what you need it to do It will then verify the pipe and liquid conditions and based on your selections optimize its operation automatically However the system cannot pro tect itself from critical data entry errors that you input Its performance depends on the accuracy of the information that you provide it For normal operation the flow computer only needs a receive signal of sufficient amplitude to activate its automatic gain controlled detection circuits Severely adverse application conditions may reduce system performance or cause apparent operational failures Finding the culprit that caused this can usually also reveal an appropriate remedy Should this still present a problem call us for technical assistance 5 1 TO OBTAIN TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE Our Technical Service Group provides assistance upon request You can obtain toll free assistance from 8 30 until 5 00 o clock EST by calling 800 275 8480 In addition you can request help via e mail by contacting the Siemens Technical Service Group at TSG ultrasonicflow siemens com The meter s computer provides comprehensive diagnostics data Using this data our Engineers can analyze the system in relation to the application in detail Proper analysis will provide solutions to virtually any application problem 5 2 CONSIDERATIONS FOR CRITICAL APPLICATIONS All flowmeters depend on site
267. sitive method for zeroing the system however flow must be stopped with the line blocked if possible before invoking this function f stopping flow is not possible then an alternate zeroing method should be selected ReversaMatic This routine involves swapping the UP and Down transducers on the pipe while keeping the cables attached such that the difference in the transit time change represents the zero offset The fixed zero offset value is stored in memory in the same manner as described in Actual Zero This routine would generally be used whenever flow cannot be stopped and the transducers cannot be mounted in the Reflect Mode configuration Flow must be stable during the entire process ZeroMatic not present in MultiPulse operation When ZeroMatic is invoked the flowmeter first performs the same analysis as described above in the AutoZero routine However after this analysis is complete the flowmeter continues to interrogate the pipe wall signal and update the zero offset value under normal operation such that the flowmeter dynamically compensates for changing conditions which would normally result in zero drift ZeroMatic will only operate with the transducers mounted in the Reflect Mode configuration and is recommended for applications which experience large temperature extremes NOTE Invoking ZeroMatic will clear any existing fixed or memorized zero offset If any zero offset remains after flow is stopped an Actual Zero can be
268. some cases slightly decreased zero flow stability If the flow computer reports Use Ltn you have to measure the distance between the upstream and downstream transducers The flow computer issues the actual distance between the transducers in inches or millimeters See Ltn Please consult Section 3 for details on how to use the Ltn measure ment Note that even though using Ltn does not call for the physical use of the Number Index you can still change the Spacing Offset to influence the strength of the transmit signal System 1010 uses a pair of precisely matched transducers Therefore you can select either one for the Reference position You must connect the Up transducer cable to the transducer mounted on the upstream side of the mounting track This lets the meter display the flow direction correctly It is important that you note each transducer s serial number and its Index position during the original installation because to reinstall the flowmeter successfully you must remount each transducer in its original position Transducer pairs have matching serial numbers except for the appended letters A and B This helps you to identify each transducer To select a different Spacing Offset To access to Spacing Offset option list press To move the cursor to the desired offset press J To store selection press e 2 24 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 4 6 THE NUMBER INDEX MENU CELL Selecting the Spacing Offset allows the flo
269. ss Field Manual 1010NFM 3J August 2006 For use with Operating System Software Version 3 01 05B or later Prepared By Date Engineering Date FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION Call 800 275 8480 Website www controlotron com 631 231 3600 E mail info ultrasonicflow siemens com Fax 631 231 3334 Or sales ultrasonicflow siemens com E mail TSG ultrasonicflow siemens com Copyright 2006 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Made in the USA Printed August 2006 Manual Changes NOTE For the latest updates and revisions to this field manual go to www controlotron com downloads htm and check the Product Manual listing 1010FMA 4 MANUAL ADDENDUM SETUP PROCEDURE FOR WET FLOW CALIBRATED 1010 SYSTEMS System 1010 Uniflow Portable amp NEMA Flowmeter Systems Manual Addendum July 2002 FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION Call 800 275 8480 Website www controlotron com 631 231 3600 E mail info ultrasonicflow siemens com Fax 631 231 3334 Or sales ultrasonicflow siemens com E mail TSG ultrasonicflow siemens com Copyright 2006 Siemens Energy amp Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Made in the USA Manual Addendum 1010FMA 4 SETUP PROCEDURE FOR WET FLOW CALIBRATED 1010 SYSTEM Caution DO NOT use the field manual installation procedure to startup a wet flow calibrated system Doing so could void the calibration by corrupting es
270. ss the Down Arrow to accept the default setting To select a Totalizer Mode To access the Totalizer Mode option list press Move the cursor to the required Totalizer mode by pressing D To store selection press ev 2 6 9 BATCH SAMPLE TOTAL The meter maintains a separate totalizer register for Batching or Sampling applications Unlike the Flow Total registers you cannot access this register directly It is used for relay control only If you assign the system relay to this function a momentary 200 mS relay pulse occurs whenever the BATCHTOT register accumulates a specified liquid quantity You enter the total flow volume required to activate the relay in the Batch Sample Total menu cell The numeric entry must reflect the selected flow total units The Totalizer Display Scaling menu cell shows the applicable flow total units The sign of the Batch Sample Total determines positive or negative accumulation NOTE The Batch Sample total relay requires the same consideration for exceeding the maximum pulse rate as the TOTCNT relay see Total Resolution To enter a Batch Sample Volume To activate numeric entry press 9 Use the numeric keys to type the desired Batch Sample TOT accumulation To store data press e 2 7 THE DATA SPAN SET CAL MENU This menu becomes available after picking a Meter Type and Measurement Channel However some functions will only be active after the transducers are installed and operating pr
271. st step is to enable the DC current input port From Analog Input setup To access the lin option list press the Right Arrow twice To move the cursor down to Aux n press the Down Arrow and then ENT This enables the port to receive an input current The cursor moves to 4 mA To enable numeric entry press the Right Arrow Type a numeric value corresponding to a 4 mA input signal To store the data press ENT This moves the cursor to 20 mA To enable the numeric entry press the Right Arrow Type the numeric value corresponding to a 20 mA input signal To store the data press lt ENT gt 2 11 THE DIAGNOSTICS DATA MENU Some Diagnostic Data items require a successful transducer installation and meter initialization to become available These will report Chan Not Setup until you complete the installation procedure The Diagnostics Data menu provides real time application and setup data plus test routines for the selected channel To receive the best technical support please be prepared to report any diagnostic data item upon request Note also that these menus contain information that may only be meaningful to our technical support staff The available diagnostic data depends on the meter type and channel configuration All diagnostics are available when you select channel 1 or 2 in Dual Channel Flow Ch 1 2 Flow or Ch 1 2 Flow modes In Dual Beam Flow mode all diagnostic items are available for Pa
272. stall menu You will use this number to properly space the transducers Check to ensure that you have a matched set of transducers They both should have the same S N number but marked with either an A or B e g 100A and 100B 3 4 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 2 On a flat surface attach the spacer bar to a mounting frame so that the reference hole on the spacer bar fits over the post on the platform of the frame tighten the securing screw Slide the second mounting frame onto the other end of the spacer bar align the number index hole with the post on the platform then tighten the securing screw Ensure that the angled sides of both frames face away from each other At the mounting location place the mounting frame spacer bar assem bly on the pipe so that it rests on the top of the pipe Wrap a mounting strap around the pipe Engage the end of the mounting strap with the mounting strap adjusting screw Slide it under the spring clip if so equipped of one of the mounting frames Make sure to position it for easy access to the mounting strap adjusting screw Do the same to the other mounting frame 3 Tighten the mounting strap screw enough to take up all of the slack but not enough to prevent rotation of the assembly Rotate the assembly on the pipe to the 9 o clock position ensuring that it is a smooth area without any raised spots or seams Mark a generous area around the mounting frames 1 2 on either side and half again the length f
273. sultations Reset Date Time Shows the date and time of this meter s last F4 reset Op System P N Meter s operating system part number Checksum Operating System verifying code The Technical Services Group may request this number during consultations Code Software Compile Date Time Operating System identifier The Technical Services Group may request this number during consultations System Time Use to set system time and date Format xx xx xx XX XX XX 4 11 THE 1010 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREENS The 1010 family Graphic Display Sub System is a versatile resource which provides visual access to all system variables and conditions Depending upon your selection details of the display my vary but all elements are always clearly labeled with units and variable names You re always free to move through the displays by using the arrow keys The meter will hold the last display selected indefinitely or until the menu is selected by pressing the Menu key When you again leave the menu the last selected display will be shown upon your return After completing the Site Setup Check your local display screen to ensure that everything is operating properly The meter begins to measure flow as soon as you complete the transducer installation When you press to leave the menu you will see the hybrid digital display screen see page 4 17 Note that it includes a digital flow total numeric display and a Stripchart The StripCha
274. t TOTALIZER CONTROLS the n in Fn channel number CLEAR also clears overflow Resetting the Totalizer registers clears all total data ac cumulated during operation NOTE In Dual Beam mode the Totalizer operates only on the virtual system channel Ch 3 Therefore in this case the CLEAR trigger would be F3 1 NOTOT Totalizer Freeze Invoking the NOTOT command disables the Totalizer To talization will not resume until you repeat the Fn and Nu meric 2 key sequence When you activate NOTOT an N precedes the TOTAL symbol i e NTOTAL on the LCD Screen LAPTOT Totalizer snapshot The LAPTOT command freezes the Totalizer screen display However the flow computer will continue to up date its internal registers The flow computer will show the current total when you repeat the F1 Numeric 3 key se quence When you activate LAPTOT an L precedes the TOTAL symbol i e LTOTAL on the LCD Screen CLEAR Batch Tot Register Clears the Batch Sample totalizer register See Batch Sample Tot CLEAR Makeup Latch Clears the Makeup Latch See paragraph 2 7 The Data Span Set CAL Menu and subparagraph 2 7 1 Span Data Use the F1 key as the Lead in command for 4 Path Totalizer operations 2 37 Section 2 1010NFM 3J THE FLOW TOTAL UNITS MENU STRUCTURE Flow Total Units gt Volume Units c Flow Volume Units gt f Gallons US Liters C
275. t a particular pipe class size the relevant pipe parameters appear in the Pipe Data menu cells If a given pipe class size does not match your applica tion exactly you can still edit each individual parameter to fine tune your selection In addition the Meter Facilities section of the Installation Menu provides a pipe table editor that allows you to customize any or all of the stored pipe tables NOTE If you edit the pipe parameters after the system is operating you will have to repeat the transducer install procedure Use this menu Use this menu cell to select a Pipe cell to edit the Class from one of the meter s presets sae Siemens 2 Channel 1 ABC The Manual Entry selection default Select Pipe Class fromPipeTable _ _if SSeS rocp E p means that you enter pipe data manually leases Select Pipe Class Manual Entry After picking a pipe class eal to edit ie Select Pipe Size No Pipes lt ndi oe Bur cell ppe material Pipe OD in 0 500 sno DS NUS Pipe Material Steel Mons ead ied Use this menu cell to selecta pipe liner Use this menu Liner Thickness 0 000 material cell to edit the wall thickness Use this menu cell to edit the pipe liner thickness Pipe Data Section 2 1010NFM 3J THE PIPE DATA MENU STRUCTURE Pipe Data c Select Pipe Class Manual Entry ASA Carbon Steel ASA Plastic f Metric DN Steel Metric SGP Steel Cast Iron Table D
276. t report indicates that an In Process Makeup must have occurred since the last Datalogger report To Enable or Disable the Makeup Latch To access the Makeup Latch option list press Move the cursor to select either On or Off by pressing DIO To turn Makeup Latch On or Off press ent 2 47 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 7 3 CALIBRATE FLOW RATE The 1010 s intrinsic calibration is excellent as confirmed by numerous laboratory and field trials under diverse application conditions We thus can confidently say that in any given application the majority of conventional flowmeters can not match the system s measurement range or its linearity Some appli cations may require an output adjustment to match an official external reference The Calibrate Flow Rate menu allows you to select a calibration mode The right hand column shows the active calibration mode You can select Intrinsic factory Kc Slope Correction or Multipoint Non linear Calibration Selecting either of the external calibration modes will not eliminate the Intrinsic factory calibration You can use this menu cell to switch between Intrinsic Kc or Multipoint at any time Kc Calibration For most applications the measured flow range produces a linear meter response Therefore the Kc slope correction calibration is the preferred method since it only requires a single correction factor for all the flow rates encountered Changing the calibration can cause profou
277. tallation c Select Liquid 2 11 f 2076 Ethylene Glyclol 50 Ethylene Glyclol 27 CaCl Brine Water 13C 55F Water 20C 68F Water 50C 122F Water 75C 167F Water 100C 212F Water 125C 257F Water 150C 302F Water 175C 347F Water 200C 392F Water 225C 437F Water 250C 482F Acetic Acid Alcohol Bromine Carbon Tet Chlorine Diesel Fuel Gasoline Glycerine Kerosene MEK Oil SAE 20 Sea Water Toluene Trichloroethyl Other continued Section 2 1010NFM 3J APPLICATION DATA MENU STRUCTURE continued Application Data gt Liquid Class c Viscosity cS x xx numeric entry Density SG x xxx numeric entry UniMass Table c gt Disabled Constant Temp Create Edit Table gt Table Point New XX XXX S G XX XX Viscosity cS X XXX Accept Yes Uca Pt Clear Table gt No Yes Table Active gt Yes No Constant Vs Create Edit Table gt Table Point New Temperature XX XXX S G X XXX Viscosity cS X XXX Accept Yes Pelear Pt Clear Table gt No Yes Table Active gt Yes No Changing Temp amp Vs Table Active gt Yes No Temp Range f 40F to 250F 40F to 375F 40F to 450F Pipe Config Change to Up stream Piping Fully Developed 1 Elbow Dbl Elbow Dbl Elbow Valve Expander Reducer
278. tant temperature or single liquid applica tions with varying temperature ideal if temperature is not measured This function simply associates changes in liquid sound velocity with changing SG and Viscosity 2 15 Section 2 1010NFM 3J e Create Edit Table Point New Point Points List 1 32 You may Create or Edit up to 32 points If you need support for multiple liquid classes you may create additional identical flow sensing sites to accommodate them altering only the UniMass Table entries Then each site may be called up as needed for each liquid e Vs Vs Value This is the sonic velocity at which the S G and Viscosity were measured for this class of liquids This data may be obtained from tables of physical constants measured with your 1010 in a test cell standpipe while also measuring temperature or directly measured in the monitored process line if S G and viscosity can also be obtained e S G Specific Gravity This is the specific gravity of the process liquid at the Vs and Temperature for this table entry The specific gravity is defined as the density of the sample divided by the density of water at 20 C 68 F e Viscosity Liquid Viscosity cS This is the viscosity of the process liquid in centistoke units at the Vs and Temperature for this table entry e Clear Table Yes No Use this item to remove all table points You will need to re enter all table data if you answer Yes to this menu item e T
279. ter 6 The data should begin streaming on the HyperTerminal screen 7 Wait for EOT End OF Transmission to be displayed 8 Close the file by pointing to Transfer drag to Capture Text and click Stop button Close the Terminal or HyperTerminal Program You may now close the Terminal program The file s you have downloaded are now saved in the location you selected You may now import the file you have saved into the appropriate program i e MS word for site data or MS Excel for Datalogger or Waveshape data for graphing or analysis The datalogger contains data that has its fields separated by commas By using the file extension csv comma separated values suggested earlier the data will import directly into MS Excel without any further modification For the waveshape data the fields are separated by spaces therefore it is best to save those files as txt then use the MS Excel Import Wizard to select Space Delimiters for importation of the data Site data is downloaded in plain text and can be imported directly into MS Word B 8 Appendix 1010NFM 3J RESET PROCEDURE FOR BLIND SYSTEMS 1010N Blind systems allow you to perform a system reset via the RS 232 interface The following instructions require the flowmeter to be connected serially to a PC NOTE Custom RS 232 settings for baud rate parity and data bits may not be preserved There fore be prepared to set your communications program back to the default 9600
280. ter The following typical example explains how to set up HyperTerminal NOTE Depending upon the Windows applications being used this setup procedure may vary 1 From the Windows desktop left click on the START button 2 Holding down the left mouse button move the highlight up to Programs then across to Accesso ries Slide the highlight down to HyperTerminal then release the left mouse button 3 Within the HyperTerminal window move the mouse pointer down to Hyperterm exe and then double click the left mouse button 4 This selects the Connection Description dialog box Enter a name for your connection e g 1010N You can optionally select an icon for this connection by clicking on one of the icons displayed in the scrolling frame at the bottom of the window Click OK 5 This selects the Phone Number dialog box Move the cursor to the arrow at the right of the Connect Using field Left click on the arrow to expand the field and then move the highlight down to Direct to Com 1 or 2 depending on the port connected to the interface cable Click OK to select the Com 1 or 2 Properties Dialog box Set up your RS 232 parameters as shown in the example below Left click on the OK button B 3 Appendix 1010NFM 3J COM Properties Port Settings Bits per second 5600 Data bits 7 Parity Stop bits 1 Flow contral None Restore Default
281. ter entries provide energy metering services Use this menu cell Siemens Dual Path ABC Use this menu cell to edit the to 56 ecr a liquid Access Liquid Option List Estimated Vs ONLY if you are ee sure of a more accurate value u i ERE This will reduce the chances of data into Liquid Select Liquid Water 20C 68F Class menu cells Estimated Vs m s Viscosity cS Density SG a re spacing request for clamp on flow transducers during the install procedure Use this menu cell to edit the liquid viscosity ONLY if you are certain that the data you enter is Use this menu cell to accurate An erroneous edit the specific entry could affect meter gravity of the liquid Liquid Class calibration To select a Liquid Class To access the option list press Scroll through the list to find the closest match to the application s liquid To register selection press e How to Edit the Estimated Vs liquid sonic velocity During transducer installation the flow computer bases its initial transducer spacing recommendation on the value stored in this menu cell Estimated Vs m s allows you to review and modify if necessary the Vs value for the liquid class you selected After you install the transducers the computer will mea sure Vs directly If the displayed or edited Vs stored in this menu cell is accurate the transducers will be spaced correctly This will eliminate the need to re space the transducers after their initial inst
282. th 1 or Path 2 Some items are not available N A when you select virtual channel 1 and 2 In addition selecting virtual Channel 3 in either the 1 2 Flow or 1 2 Flow modes will limit the list to flow data only 2 62 Section 2 1010NFM 3J DIAGNOSTIC DATA MENU STRUCTURE Diagnostic Data c Flow Data c fi Flow Flow Vel F S Total Vs m s Signal mV Valc 96 Vaer 96 Alarm Status Ancal HiFlow LoFlow c Application Info TN uSec TL uSec DeltaT nSec Burst Sec 96 Accepted Last Makeup Makeup Status c Liquid Data Temp 1 Temp 2 Reynolds Specific Gravity Viscosity cP Pressure Viscosity cS c Site Setup Data fx drive N burst length Ltn in Vimax Vs max m s Vs min m s Empty Samples Cycles Max Damping Min Damping HF c Test Facilities Makeup Graph Tx Up Tx Dn Fixed ALC Tx Up Fixed ALC Tx Dn Fixed ALC Graph AutoZero c Print Site Setup No Yes c Date Site Created 2 63 XX XX XX XX XX XX Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 11 1 MAIN DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN This is the Main Diagnostics Data screen It provides menus that show Flow Application Liquid and Site Setup information The Test Facilities menu provides test control functions to optimize operation analyze application conditions and to recover system operation Siemens Dual Path ABC Real time flow related data Path Select Path Enable Flow Data Applicat
283. th the abrasive pipe conditioning material provided Clean the pipe of all debris and abrasive particles 4 Insert the index pin into the reference hole Select a transducer apply a thin band of couplant com pound to the transducer s contact surface Place the transducer between the track rails slightly behind the pin and under the clamping screw assembly Slide it forward until it butts up firmly against the reference pin 3 12 Section 3 1010NFM 3J 5 Once transducer is in place secure with the transducer clamping screw Do not overtighten Ob serve the upstream downstream orientation and connect the transducer cable to the computer s input jack If a dual channel unit make sure you connect the cable to the input jacks of the correct channel Repeat this procedure for the number index transducer Installing a 1012T Mounting Track in Direct Mode Paragraph 2 4 describes the Transducer Installation procedures that lead up to the automatic selection of transducers mounting mode and spacing method Shown is a Model 1012T mounting track to accommodate size B3 universal transducers Examine the figure below which shows a typical Pick Install Xdcr menu screen Note the automatic assignment of model numbers for the transducer and mounting track plus the designation of number index Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Key Install after mounting transducers Transducer Model 1011 Universal Transducer Size B3 Xdcr Mount Mode Direct Note selec
284. the cursor to Yes by pressing DIDI To store selection press ew Lastly re enable the channels that you disabled earlier to begin logging 4 4 A EST LOG TIME LEFT Est Log Time Left is a view only menu cell that shows an estimate of the amount of Datalogger time remaining in hours and minutes This menu cell becomes active after you enable datalogging Select ing Circular Memory and or event based datalogging see Datalogger Setup blanks the field Est Log Time Left and is based on the log interval and data selections made in the Datalogger Setup For Single Channel flowmeters this time is an estimated minimum since data compression is employed for improved storage efficiency 4 4 5 CLEAR DATALOGGER If you use the Datalogger in its default mode eventually you will use all the memory available for Datalogger storage When this occurs you will not be able to log more data until you free up the memory The Clear Datalogger command erases ALL stored Datalogger data Therefore you should evaluate the currently stored data and print any valuable information before using this command Note Saved Sites also consume datalogger RAM To clear Datalogger Data Memory To access the Clear Datalogger option list press Move the cursor to Yes by pressing To clear the memory press enr 4 5 THE MEMORY CONTROL MENU Memory Control is a reference menu that shows the amount of bytes of data memory left The data memory capacity depends on
285. the flow computer The XMIT transmit transducer is connected to the Up cable connection and RCV receive transducer is connected to the Down cable connection The correct connection orientation is important for the in line transducer con figuration It is not a factor for the adjacent configuration 7 6 SELECT REFLEXOR OPERATING MODE Select meter type as Reflexor for the channel that is to be used as Reflexor Dual channel units may have either one or both channels used in the Reflexor mode 7 7 INSTALLING REFLEXOR OPERATING MODE Access Channel Setup and Create or Recall a previous Saved Site setup If a previous Saved Site is recalled and the same transducer and location is used then no other installation steps are required Access Pipe Data and enter the required pipe data Siemens 2Channel 1 Channel 1 Choose Channel 1 Flowmeter Type Channel 1 Clamp on Channel 2 gt Reflexor Dual Channel Flow 7 8 ACCESS THE INSTALL XDCR TRANSDUCER MENU At Transducer Model press the Right Arrow and select the proper group of transducers that match the mounted transducer set For all 191N select 190 At Transducers Size select the proper size of transducer mounted For all 191N select 191 If the flow rate units are not the default units of Gallons per Minute then it is recommended to change those units now by use of the Flow Total Units menu At Flow Range press the Right Arrow and sele
286. the multimeter to read volts then connect it to the supply and return terminals of the voltage output under test Move the highlight to the port to be tested QA press then press Do move the cursor to Trim 2V Press enr This triggers a 2 00 Volts pop up window The multimeter should now be reading 2 00 Volts 4 9 Section 4 1010NFM 3J If the multimeter reading does not match use the numeric keys to type in the multimeter read ing Press ENT to register setting This adjusts the meter s DAC digital to analog con verter so that a 2 00 Volts output corresponds with 2 00 Volts on the multimeter Re check the multimeter to make sure that it is now reading 2 00 Volts 4 5 4 PGEN OUTPUT TRIM Pgen 1 amp Pgen 2 Note Can be trimmed to within 1 25 Hz of nominal To calibrate a pulse rate output Pgen1 or Pgen2 4 6 Connect a frequency counter to the supply and return terminals of the pulse rate output under test Move the highlight to the port to be tested Om press C3 then press to move the cursor to Trim 1kHz Press ENT This triggers a 1 kHz pop up window The frequency counter should now be reading 1 kHz If the frequency counter reading does not match use the numeric keys to type in the frequency counter reading Press ENT to register setting This adjusts the meter s DAC digital to analog converter so that a 1 kHz output corresponds with 1 kHz on the frequency counter R
287. the number and complexity of the site setups stored in memory and the size of the current datalogger file Capacity is also affected by the RAM option with which your 1010 is equipped with either 900k expanded or 170k standard RAM MEMORY CONTROL MENU Data Memory Left This view only menu cell shows the minimum remaining number of characters avail Data M Left 9 XXXXX ata Memory e 2 able for Datalogger and site storage When the Data logger is enabled for circular mode the meter allo Defragment c cates all of memory except for two conventional empty sites worth for datalogger use Memory Map gt Memory Map Selecting YES for this item enables a snapshot display of current memory usage In this display the asterisk indicates a used block a space indicates a free block while a dash character indicates unused filler Defragment Selecting YES for this item consolidates memory data blocks into contiguous storage collapsing the filler regions You may be able to use an additional block for site or datalogger storage as a result Use this command if you seem to be out of memory even though the Data Memory Left item indicates free capacity 4 8 Section 4 1010NFM 3J To view the amount of data memory bytes available press 4 5 1 THE ANALOG OUTPUT TRIM MENU Analog Output Trim allows you to fine tune the meter s analog voltage and current outputs using a multimeter connected to the output under test In addition
288. the report Aeration The aeration percentage recorded at the time of the report S G Specific Gravity at current operating temperature Alarms The letter codes of any alarms active at the time of the report see below Delta T uSecs The Up to Down transit time difference measured at the time of the report Temperature The instantaneous supply aand return temperatures at the time for the report Analog Inputs Any data appearing on an auxiliary input at the time of the report The Time field expands to HH MM SS when you select a logging interval of more than once per minute If you select Alarms the Datalogger logs the state of each alarm function upon generating a report A dash represents an inactive alarm A letter code represents an active alarm see next page 2 54 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Alarm Letter Codes and Descriptions v Spacing Transducer spacing may need re adjustment Et Emily crisis ues Pipe is empty R sn Hale seco irussixes Flow above High setting or below Low setting It Fault eerte Three continuous seconds without new data update usos Aeration Current aeration percentage exceeds the alarm setpoint M Memory Last valid reading for a selected interval during Fault condition Korca Makeup In Process Makeup occurred laesae Interface Liquid Vs exceeds interface alarm setpoint P issu Pig es
289. thermal couplant provided to the tip of the sensor and attach it securely to the cleaned pipe surface with the propermounting assembly Temperature mea surement anomalies resulting from variations in the ambient conditions can be minimized by insulating the pipe and sensor after installation 991TW TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR HEAD 5 eL ao 1012EC SERIES ASSEMBLY Ms CABLE THREADED PIPE FITTING SPRING LOADED THERMOWELL SENSING ELEMENT THERMAL COUPLANT 3 15 Section 3 1010NFM 3J The 991TW insert sensors are designed to be used in pipes equipped with Thermowells These are spring loaded 1 4 diameter sensors with 1 2 NPT integral connection heads available in several lengths to accommodate a range of pipe sizes Thermowells for new installations are available from Alloy Engineering Company in Bridgeport Connecticut 3 2 1 WIRING TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO THE ANALOG INPUT MODULE WARNING Set flowmeter and instrumentation power to OFF when inserting or removing the Analog Input Module or when making connections to TB1 TB2 TB3 and TB4 e Openthe 1010 NEMA flowmeter top cover by releasing the cover
290. this data our engineers can analyze your system in relation to the application usage A detailed analysis will provide solutions to virtually any adverse application problem Call our Technical Service Group for any assistance you might require Toll free assistance is available every week day from 8 30 A M to 5 00 P M EST by calling 800 275 8480 You can also request help via e mail by contacting the Technical Service Group at TSGultrasonicflow siemens com 6 3 Section 6 1010NFM 3J 6 3 HOW TO SET UP SYSTEM 1010 FOR FLOW TUBE OPERATION The example in this section shows how to set up channel 1 of a 1010 dual channel system for use with a 1011FT stainless steel Flow Tube Note that Series 1010 dual channel models allow flow tube opera tion with either measurement channel In addition all 1010 flow computers operate with both 1011FT and 992DFT series of flow tubes This example begins at the Channel Setup Menu If necessary review paragraph 1 7 3 for instructions on how to select a Meter Type and a measurement channel 6 3 1 OVERVIEW Setting up the measurement channel for Flow Tube operation consists of the following tasks Select a Meter Type in this case Dual Channel Flow Select a channel to install the flow tube e g Channel 1 Set Kc calibration slope correction indicated on Flow Tube tag Note Programmed Kc must match offset error on plastic Kc tag to get accurate flow tube readings See paragraph 2 7 3 Calibrat
291. thyl 1170 Transformer Oil 1390 Carbon Tetrachloride 938 Turpentine 1280 Diethyl Ketone 1310 SONIC VELOCITY FOR PURE WATER VARIOUS TEMP meters sec Section 5 1010NFM 3J Vps VALUES in inches second FOR SOME COMMON METALS Metal Vps in sec Metal Vps in sec Aluminum 120 000 Magnesium O 1 120 000 AL 1100 2S 121 000 Magnesium ZK 60A TS 120 000 AL 1100 0 2S0 122 000 Monel 107 000 AL 2014 14S 121 000 Molybdenum 132 000 AL 2024 T4 24ST 124 000 Nickel 118 000 AL 2117 T4 17ST 123 000 Steel 302 Cres 123 000 Brass 89 400 Steel 347 Cres 122 000 Brass Alpha 79 500 Steel 1020 128 000 Brass Half Hard 80 700 Steel 1095 126 000 Brass Naval 83 500 Steel 4150 Rc14 110 000 Bronze Phosphor 87 800 Steel 4150 Rc18 125 000 Cadmium 59 100 Steel 4150 Rc43 126 000 Carpenter 20 Steel 117 900 Steel 4340 126 000 Columbium 82 700 Tantalum 114 000 Columbium 10W 10TN 74 800 Tin 65 700 Constantan 104 000 Titanium 122 000 Copper 89 400 Titanium T1 150A 124 000 Iconel 119 000 Titanium Carbide 203 000 Iron 127 000 Tungsten 113 000 Iron Cast 110 000 Vanadium 109 000 Magnesium AM 35 122 000 Zinc 94 900 Magnesium PS 1 119 000 Zirconium 88 600 Magnesium J 1 118 000 continued 5 8 1010NFM 3J RECOMMENDED SONIC COUPLING COMPOUNDS USE CHARACTERISTICS Temporar
292. ties Graphic Screen requires significant CPU overhead The 1010 meter should not be left in this mode during normal operation where the Datalogger is the primary output or during calibration work 0 73 1469 73 1691 1929 476 4 4 4 55 06 55 06 3 11 72 1 91 1244 3 Digitized Receive Signal Crossover Marker TN marker Command Line appears here 2 73 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Entering the Diagnostic Graph Screen Before you can view the Diagnostic Graph Screen the 1010 flow channel must first be properly in stalled and operating in a non empty condition refer to the appropriate 1010 Field manual If a previ ously installed channel is in a Fault condition but not reporting Empty you can still access the Graph Screen to aid in troubleshooting the cause of the failure to measure flow To view the Graph Screen first enter the Test Facilities menu which is a submenu of the main Diag nostic Data menu e Pressing the Up Down Arrows scroll to the Graph menu item e Press the Right Arrow to enter the Graph menu and scroll to highlight the Yes item in the option list e Now press the ENT key to access the Graph Screen e To exit the Graph Screen and return to the main menu press the MENU key once Diagnostic Text Display The text to the
293. ting 6 7 SPECIFICATIONS 316 STAINLESS STEEL FLOW TUBE Typical values subject to change without notice Liquid Size 1 Must be compatible with 316SS under operating conditions and free of suspended gasses or solids Size 2 Must be compatible with 316SS under operating conditions and free of sus pended gasses or solids Pressure Drop 0 21 psi 1 6 GPM 6 0 LPM flowing water at 68 F 0 20 psi 4 5 GPM 17 0 LPM flowing water at 68 F Sensitivity 0 0005 GPM 0 002 LPM 0 0015 GPM 0 0057 LPM Linearity 1 of flow for rates above 0 1 GPM 0 38 LPM 1 of flow for rates above 0 3 GPM 1 1 LPM Repeatability 0 2 of flow for rates above 0 5 GPM 1 9 LPM 0 2 of flow for rates above 1 5 GPM 5 7 LPM Zero Stability 0 001 GPM 0 0038 LPM 0 004 GPM 0 015 LPM Accuracy Intrinsic 1 of flow over 0 13 GPM 0 57 LPM to 10 GPM 40 LPM 1 of flow over 0 4 GPM 1 5 LPM to 30 GPM 114 LPM Accuracy Flow Calibrated 0 5 of flow over 0 13 GPM 0 5 LPM to 10 GPM 38 LPM 0 5 of flow over 0 4 GPM 1 5 LPM to 30 114 LPM Connection 5 Swagelok Tube Fitting 6 10 1 Swagelok Tube Fitting Section 6 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION NOTES All Siemens Flow Tubes are supplied with integral line connections The end user must supply any adapters etc required for line connection When connecting a screwed fitting to a Kynar
294. ting No for Clr Saved Data Yes No lt EOT gt Response to a request to output datalogger data to the printer or the Graph ics screen when no datalogger data exists Set up the Datalogger Empty Pipe Press Prompt to empty the pipe during the Actual MTY procedure After emptying pipe press lt ENT gt Fill Pipe Press ENT Prompt to fill the pipe during the Actual MTY procedure After filling the pipe press ENT see paragraph 3 1 3 No Sites ENT Response while trying to recall delete a site setup when no Sites are stored Not Installed Response to an attempt to access a menu function that is not included Re space Index Upon measuring the liquid sonic velocity Vs the meter recommends re spacing the transducers to improve performance Invalid Setup During the Initial Makeup the system detects invalid transducer spacing use Direct Mount erroneous liquid pipe parameters or some other factor that prevents it from completing the Initial Makeup This may be due to one of the following An out of range data entry An invalid condition e g overlapping transducers in Reflect Mode If se lecting Direct Mode does not resolve review all site setup and transducer installation choices particularly data entered for the pipe and liquid continued 2 78 Section 2 1010NFM 3J MESSAGE DESCRIPTION In Reflect Mode the flow computer detects that the pipe wall signal may infringe upon th
295. ting a pipe by its name e g 28810 loads a description of that pipe in the remaining menu cells Note that liner data is not provided If your pipe is lined then you will be required to enter the liner material and its thickness manually To access the Pipe Table menu press PIPE TABLE MENU STRUCTURE Create Edit Pipe gt gt Choose Pipe Class c f ASA Stainless Steel ASA Carbon Steel ASA Plastic a Metric DN Steel Metric SGP Steel Cast Iron Table Ductile Iron Table Copper Tube Table Choose Pipe Name c ASA Stainless Steel ASA Carbon Steel ASA Plastic q 18810 fr 1cs40 E 1P40 28810 1CS80 1P80 3SS10 2CS40 2P40 f 4SS10 2CS80 2P80 6SS10 3CS40 3P40 8SS10 3CS80 3P80 Metric DN Steel 4CS40 4P40 TP 50DN 4CS80 4P80 continued Note The highlighted selection in the above table illustrates how to choose the ASA Stain less Steel Pipe Class and all its available Pipe Name selections All other Pipe Classes e g ASA Carbon Steel listed can be selected in the same manner 4 2 Section 4 1010NFM 3J PIPE TABLE MENU STRUCTURE continued Create Edit Pipe C Choose Pipe Name c 100 DN 6CS40 f 6P40 200 DN 6CS80 6P80 400 DN 8CS40 8P40 800 DN 8CS80 8P80 C Metric SGP Steel 10CS XS 10P XS at 20A SGP 10CS40 10P40 25A SGP 12CS STD 12P STD 32A SGP 12CS XS 12P XS 40A SGP 16CS STD 16P STD 50A SGP 16CS XS 16P XS 65A SGP 18CS STD 18P STD 80A SGP 18CS XS 18P XS 90A SGP 20CS STD 20P STD 100A
296. ting type eress ID GI To store selection press er 2 23 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 4 A REVIEWING THE SPACING METHOD The flow computer analyzes your transducer selection mounting mode and pipe size to determine the best way to install your transducers It will recommend the use of either a mounting track a spacer bar or independent mounting The flow computer will list the part number of a mounting track or spacer bar If it decides upon independent mounting it will report the distance required between the two trans ducers In this case you have to make sure that when you mount the transducers the space between them equals the length specified in the Ltn menu cell See Section 3 for details on how to accomplish this 2 4 5 HOW TO USE THE SPACING OFFSET After you select the mounting method the flow computer checks your entries for pipe size transducer type etc and then recommends a spacing offset This is the first step in establishing the correct distance between the transducers Spacer bars and mounting tracks utilize number indices labels to simplify transducer placement One transducer is located at the Reference position while the other one is located at the Number Index position The Number Index cannot be directly edited However the Spacing Offset can be changed via its option list Changing the Spacing Offset will alter the reported Number Index Maximum spacing offset provides moderately greater signal levels but in
297. tion list press 4 13 Section 4 1010NFM 3J Move the cursor to the required baud rate by pressing To store selection press enr This moves the cursor to Parity 4 8 2 PARITY Parity is a simple method to check the accuracy of an asynchronous serial data transfer The parity setting tells the meter how to format the data words it sends to an external device Parity is usually an additional bit added to each data word For example if you select EVEN the total sum of all the bits in a single data word including the parity bit will always be an even number The Parity option list includes all the standard parity settings for asynchronous serial transmission The selected parity must match the parity setting of the receiving external device Some devices ig nore parity entirely therefore the option list includes None The factory setting is None To edit the Parity Setting To access the Parity option list press Move the cursor to the required parity setting by pressing J To store the data press enr This moves the cursor to Data Bits 4 8 3 DATA BITS You can specify how many data bits the meter uses to format data words for serial transmissions The default setting is 7 Note that the 996P portable printer requires a word length of 8 To set the Data Word Length To access the Data Bits option list press To move the asterisk to the required bit setting press QA Press ENT to store data This
298. tion of track Spacing Offset Minimum P N Mount Mode and Number Index 4 Number Index Spacing Method Track 1012TP Ltn Value in 0 217 Empty Pipe Set Channel Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Channel Not Setup Pick Install Xdcr 1 Perform all required menu steps up until the point where the flow computer prompts you to press to finish the transducer install routine Note the reported number index You will be inserting an index pin into this hole and the reference hole Check to ensure that you have a matched set of transducers They both should have the same S N number but marked with either an A or B e g 100A and 100B 2 The direct mount configuration uses two track rails one for each transducer installed 180 apart on the pipe One track rail includes the tension screw while the other has a locating stud to support the chain see below and on next page Upstream Transducer Transducer Clamping Chain Tensioning Screw x Screw Number Index Pin TOP VIEW Track Rails Downstream Transducer INSTALLATION DIRECT MOUNT 180 OPPOSED WITH MOUNTING TRACK 3 13 Section 3 1010NFM 3J Center of this link is over the locating stud an equal number of links on either side of this stud ensures 180 degrees opposed installation Transducer Clamping Screw Chain Tension Screw 3 Ifthis is a horizontal pipe place the track with t
299. to set the resolution of the totalizer Use this menu cell to enter a volume accumulation for the batching or sampling totalizer relay trigger 2 6 1 FLOW VOLUME UNITS The Flow Volume Units option list allows you to select the rate units the meter uses to report volumet ric or mass flow If you select mass units the meter uses the specific gravity parameter see Applica tion Class section to convert volumetric flow to mass flow The default English Units is Gallons To select a Volumetric or Mass Unit To access the Flow Volume Units option list press To move the cursor to the required units press T To store selection press enr 2 6 2 FLOW TIME UNITS The Flow Time Units option list allows you to select a flow display time base The system default is Minutes If this suits the application press the lt Down Arrow gt to bypass this menu cell To select a Time Unit To access the Time Unit option list press To move the cursor to the required time units press DID To store the time units press e 2 39 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 6 3 FLOW DISPLAY RANGE The Display Range option list offers a choice of Autorange default or High Range The Autorange selection increases resolution automatically at low flow rates and reduces resolution at high flow rates as required to prevent data overflow If you select Hi range the meter controls its screen resolution to prevent data overflow at the highest
300. to the right lt Right Arrow gt Shifts receive window to the right waveform to the left lt CLR gt Brings waveform to the center of the screen lt ENTER gt Calls up Text Display menu items lt Left Arrow gt to return to graph lt MENU gt Exits the Graph Screen and returns to the main menu lt 1 gt MinDamp Minimum damping exponent control or to increase or decrease lt 2 gt MaxDamp Maximum damping exponent control or to increase or decrease lt 3 gt TnSet Transit time adjustment use or to move Tn marker lt 4 gt ZCOSet Zero Crossover adjustment use or to move crossover marker 5 HiSet Signal envelope threshold level use or to move threshold 6 LoSet Signal envelope threshold level use or to move threshold lt gt MaskSet Leading edge masking functions use or to alter number of samples masked 8 Hold Set Set this number higher if intermittant mis registration occurs 0 Exits the command line lt gt Toggle graph between receive waveform and envelope waveform F1 and lt gt Dumps the digitized waveform data over the RS232 port You must first leave the Graph Screen mode before invoking this command 2 77 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 2 11 7 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS The System 1010 has highly reliable circuitry and will provide trouble free operation within specified environments Even a well crafted precision instru
301. transmitting condition that can be use to search for an amplitude level ALC when Detection Fault or Low Signal alarms are present The routine forces the flowmeter to generate constant transmit bursts while reporting current receive signal strength for the user To initiate the Force Transmit function refer to the example shown below After Install is selected press ENT While the flowmeter is going through the drives see menu screen below press the ALT and MENU keys simultaneously Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Siemens 2Channel 1 SITE1 Key Install after mounting transducers Transducer Model Transducer Size Xdcr Mount Mode Spacing Offset Number Index Spacing Method Ltn Value in Install Completed 1011 Universal B3 Direct Minimum 4 Track 1012TP 0 217 Transducer Model Transducer Size Xdcr Mount Mode Spacing Offset Number Index Spacing Method Ltn Value in 1011 Universal B3 Direct Minimum 4 Track 1012TP 0 217 No Install Completed Install Channel Not Setup Empty Pipe Set Channel Not Setup Channel Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Channel Not Setup Empty Pipe Set Zero Flow Adjust Pick Install Xdcr Pick Install Xdcr NOTE The ALT and lt MENU gt keys must be pressed before the meter scans through all the drives or the selection of the detection mode and the Force Transmit function must be initiated again 2 Atypical menu screen will appear as show
302. try 1 5 O Operating System 6 1 Flow Tubes Typical Applications 6 1 Typical Industries Serviced 6 1 Operation Adjust Menu 2 34 Operation Adjust Menu Structure 2 35 Operation Adjust 5 15 6 8 Outputting Datalogger 4 7 P Parity 4 14 Password Entry Option 1 2 2 4 Percent Deviation 7 6 7 8 7 9 Pgen Output Trim Pgen 1 amp Pgen 2 4 10 Calibration 4 10 Wiring 2 60 Physical Measurement Tasks 1 11 Pick Install XDCR Menu 2 20 Pick Install XDCR Menu Structure 2 22 Pipe Class 2 6 Selecting 2 8 Pipe Configuration 2 19 Menu Structure 2 19 Index 7 Index 1010NFM 3J Selecting 2 19 Pipe Considerations For Clamp on Transducer 5 2 Pipe Data Menu 2 6 Outer Diameter Wall Thickness 2 6 2 9 Pipe Data Menu Structure 2 7 Pipe Dimensions 5 2 Pipe Material 2 9 Selecting 2 9 Pipe Outer Diameter 4 3 Selecting 2 9 4 3 Pipe Outer Dimension 2 9 Pipe Parameters 1 1 2 6 Pipe Size 2 8 Selecting 2 9 Pipe Table 4 2 Factory Settings 4 2 Accessing Menu 4 2 Pipe Temperature Range 2 18 Selecting 2 18 Pipe Wall Thickness 4 3 POSFLOW 2 36 2 42 Power Failure 2 1 Preparing The Pipe Surface 3 3 Pressure Drop Flow Tubes 6 9 Print Site Setup 5 16 Programming installation guide 2 85 R Recall Site Command 2 2 Recall Site Setup 2 1 Recommended Mounting 7 2 Reference Hole 3 6 3 8 Reflect Mode Mounting Frames and Spacer Bar 3 4 With Spacer Bar Only 3 5 Reflect Mount Installation With Mounting Track 3 12 Reflexor Mode 7 1 Adj
303. ts you can override the flow computer and use any size as long as the mounting method accommodates the pipe s diameter The flow computer shows that your selection is acceptable if it is able to calculate transducer spacing Ltn To select a Transducer Size To access the Transducer Size option list press CS To move the cursor to the desired transducer size press DIA To select the transducer press enr 2 4 5 HOW TO SELECT A TRANSDUCER MOUNT MODE The flow computer recommends the transducer mounting mode Direct or Reflect In almost all cases it will be Reflect since this is the most desirable configuration Reflect mode allows you to mount the transducers on pipes that do not permit back or side access Reflect mode provides inherent compen sation for flow profile distortion crossflow that could be the result of unfavorable application conditions such as an insufficient upstream straight run In addition Reflect mode supports the AutoZero function which sets the zero flow velocity automatically Direct mounting may produce a stronger transducer signal and requires less mounting length than Reflect mounting This can be important if the liquid or pipe material exhibits high sonic attenuation thereby preventing operation in the Reflect configuration NOTE We recommend using Direct Mount with Plastic pipes To select a Xdcr Mounting Mode To access the Xdcr Mount option list press 3 To move the cursor to the required moun
304. tup It sends Datalogger data to the graphic screen with or without line wrapping For dual channel systems with logging enabled on both channels a screen dump from menu will show data from both channels The Output Datalogger command sends data to an external device via the RS 232 serial port Data transmitted from this menu will be from both channels of a dual channel system The Clear Datalogger command erases the entire Datalogger file For dual channel systems you are cautioned not to use this command if your intention is to clear the logged data of only one channel To access the Datalogger Control Menu press DATALOGGER CONTROL MENU STRUCTURE Datalogger Control c Display Datalogger gt Off Line Wrap No Line Wrap Output Datalogger c m No Yes Circular Memory c Est Log Time Left c Clear Datalogger 4 4 1 DISPLAY DATALOGGER This menu cell allows you to send the Datalogger contents to the display screen This command is effective only after a successful install You can set the report to scroll on the screen with or without line wrap Selecting line wrap forces a line feed after approximately 40 characters In addition you have to enable datalogging and then select items in the Datalogger Setup menu Note that this com mand transmits the data from both channels To send Datalogger contents to the display screen To access the Display Datalogger option list press Scroll cursor to either Li
305. ubic Feet Cubic Meters Cubic Inches Cubic Cm Ounces U S Imperial Gal 31 0 GAL BBL 31 5 GAL BBL 42 0 GAL BBL 55 GAL Drum Acre feet Pounds Kilograms Tons Metric Tons Ft Sec Vel M Sec Vel Flow Time Units c MIN HR DAY SEC Flow Display Range gt m Autorange High Flow Display Scale c 2 mGAL MIN GAL MIN KGAL MIN Total ds Units c Same list as Flow Volume Units Totalizer Scale gt GAL 9 KGAL MGAL Total Resolution c 000X0000 ft 0000X000 00000X00 Totalizer Mode gt jj NEGFLOW NETFLOW POSFLOW Batch Sample Total c 2 38 X xxx numeric entry Section 2 1010NFM 3J Use this menu cell to select either volumetric or mass flow rate units Use this menu cell to select a time base for the flow rate SME 2 Channel 1 PLOW units Choose desired Flow rate volume units Use these menu cells Flow Volume Units Gallons lt US gt gt toset the scaling for the Use this menu cell to select a pew Time anite A flow rate and flow total range for the flow rate display Flow Displ ay S oe ERMINE outputs Screen Total Volume Units Gallons lt Totalizer Scale KGAL M Total Resolution 00000x00 Totalizer Mode NETFLOW Use this menu cell to select Batch Sample Total 0 000 either volumetric or mass flow Use this m nu cell to total units Flow Total Units select how the totalizer accumulates flow Use this menu cell
306. uctile Iron Table Copper Tube Table ASA Stainless Steel Select Pipe Size I Manual Entry 1SS10 2SS10 3SS10 4SS10 6SS10 8SS10 Metric DN Steel 50 DN 100 DN 200 DN 400 DN 800 DN Metric SGP Steel 20A SGP 25A SGP 32A SGP 40A SGP 50A SGP 65A SGP 80A SGP 90A SGP 100A SGP 125A SGP 150A SGP 175A SGP 200A SGP 225A SGP 250A SGP 300A SGP 350A SGP 400A SGP 450A SGP 500A SGP Copper Tube Table 1 type M 1 type K 1 type L 2 type M 2 type K 2 type L 4 type M 4 type K 4 type L 6 type M 6 type K 6 type L i ASA Stainless Steel ASA Carbon Steel 1CS40 1CS80 2CS40 2CS80 3CS40 3CS80 4CS40 4CS80 6CS40 6CS80 8CS40 8CS80 10CS XS 10CS40 12CS STD 12CS XS 16CS STD 16CS XS 18CS STD 18CS XS 20CS STD 20CS XS 24CS STD 24CS XS 30CS STD 30CS XS 36CS STD 36CS XS Cast Iron Table 6 cls C 10 cls C 12 cls C 16 cls C 20 cls C Set pipe parameters manually ASA Plastic 1P40 1P80 2P40 2P80 3P40 3P80 4CS40 4P80 6P40 6P80 8P40 8P80 10P XS 10P40 12P STD 12P XS 16P STD 16P XS 18P STD 18P XS 20P STD 20P XS 24P STD 24P XS 30P STD 30P XS 36P STD 36P XS Ductile Iron Table 6 cls 52 8 cls 52 10 cls 52 12 cls 52 16 cls 52 24 cls 52 Pipe OD in mm xx xx numeric entry Auto if specific pipe is selected Note The highlighted selection in the above table illustrates how to choose the ASA Stain less Steel Pipe Class and all its
307. up 1 1 Full Site Setup 2 1 Recall Site Setup 2 2 Site Setup Reference Tables 5 7 Site Storage Memory 1 10 Slope Correction 1 11 2 48 Slurries 5 6 Slurry 7 8 7 9 SmartSlew 2 35 5 5 Software Version 1 5 4 16 Sonic Coupling Compounds 5 9 Index 9 Index 1010NFM 3J CC 122 5 9 Sonic Velocities for Common Liquids 5 7 Sonic Velocity For Pure Water Various Temperature Meters sec 5 8 Spacing Guide Part Numbers 3 7 Spacing Indices 5 2 Ltn 5 2 Spacing Method Transducers see Section 3 Span Analog Output 2 59 4 9 Spectra Graph 7 5 Spectra Screen Data and Controls 7 6 Stainless Steel Flow Tube 6 10 Start Up installation guide 2 85 Strap Mounting Kit Numbers 3 5 Stripchart Elements 4 16 StripChart Setup 5 15 System 1010 Reflexor Flowmeter 7 1 System Information 4 16 Version Reset Date Time Op System P N Checksum Code System Time 4 16 System Performance 5 3 Accuracy Repeatability 5 3 T Table Setups Menu 4 2 Technical Assistance 5 1 6 3 Teflon PFA Flow Tube 6 10 Temperature and Pressure Ratings 5 6 Temperature Sensor 3 15 Mounting 3 15 Wiring to Analog Input Module 3 16 Terminology Chart For 1010 Series 5 11 Test Facilities 5 16 Test Facilities Commands 2 72 Makeup 2 72 Test Facilities Menu 2 72 The FFT Spectra Screen 7 5 The Flow Total Units Menu Structure 2 38 Time Average 5 4 Total Resolution 2 41 Total Volume Units 2 40 To Change Default 2 40 Totalizer 1 3 Totalizer Controls 2 37 Totalizer Display Modes
308. upper left hand corner of the screen represents diagnostic items which can be individu ally turned on or off to reduce unnecessary clutter on the screen This text display can be modified by pressing the lt ENT gt key and scrolling up or down through the various parameters that appear in the Graph Display menu Pressing the ENT key will select the highlighted parameter a sign appears next to selected items and pressing CLR will deselect the item Pressing the Left Arrow will return you to the graph screen with the selected parameters appearing at the top left corner of the screen The figure above is shown with all diagnostics items selected Time Base Control The digitized receive signal can be moved either to the left or right on the screen by pressing the Left or Right keypad arrows The direction of the arrow actually represents the direction in which the receive window will move thereby causing the receive signal to shift in the opposite direction on the screen e g Pressing the Left Arrow moves the signal to the right The digitized receive signal can be expanded or contracted in the time domain by pressing the lt gt or keys on the keypad This allows you to see the entire contents of the receive window or zoom in to see greater detail Pressing the CLR key once will automatically center the receive signal on the screen When zooming in on the receive signal small vertical tick marks may
309. urement depends on certain parameters that the flow computer cannot sense di rectly e g pipe dimensions or transducer placement In other words entering incorrect pipe param eters or not using the recommended spacing could result in an erroneous Vs measurement The meter is now ready to report flow Press the lt MENU gt key to display flow In cases where the actual Vs differs noticeably from the estimated Vs the computer may issue a re space command This requires that you re space the Number Index transducer at the new Number Index then press lt ENT gt again Repeat the initial makeup process You can override a re space command by simply keying the Down Arrow However after the meter completes operating you must confirm that the sonic velocity Vs of the liquid falls between the Vs max and Vs min items in Diagnostic Data Site Setup Data Therefore only consider editing the measured Vs after you remove all the primary causes for an inaccuracy Check your pipe dimensions and pipe material entries Re check the transducer spacing and part numbers Large Vs discrepancies are almost always due to erroneous pipe data or incorrect transducer placement 2 28 Section 2 1010NFM 3J To accept the Measured Vs Press eu moves the cursor to the Empty Pipe Set menu cell If you decide to edit the Measured Vs To activate numeric entry pressi Use the numeric keys to type the new Vs value in meters per second
310. ut Datalogger option list press Scroll the cursor to Yes by pressing To transmit Datalogger contents to external device via the serial port press ENT To stop printout press 4 4 3 CIRCULAR MEMORY In its default mode the Datalogger collects data until its memory becomes full At that time the flowme ter suspends data logging and cannot resume until the datalogger memory is cleared see Clear Datalogger command Multi Channel systems include Circular Memory and Single Channel systems do not Circular Memory allows the Datalogger to write over its oldest records when memory reaches full capacity If you enable Circular Memory you are assured of always collecting the most recent data But also remember that you will lose the oldest Datalogger reports Note further that invoking Circular Memory deletes the current contents of the Datalogger NOTE To avoid potential data loss the flowmeter prevents you from altering the Circular Memory setting when a channel is active To setup and enable Circular Memory The Datalogger Mode menu must have the Memory menu cell selected Datalogger items must be selected e g Site ID Date Time etc All active channels in the Channel Setup menu must be disabled To disable active channels select the Channel Enable menu cell and then No 4 7 Section 4 1010NFM 3J In the Datalogger Control menu select Circular Memory Press to access the Circular Memory option list Move
311. ute material if you do not find the material of your pipe in the pipe table You can edit each pipe parameter to achieve a closer match If you change any pipe parameters after running the Transducer Install procedure you may have to re space the transducers The Pipe Material option list provides a selection of common pipe materials The default pipe material is Steel Press Down Arrow to accept the default setting for this menu cell To select a Pipe Material To access the Pipe Material option list press To scroll to the required pipe material press T To register selection press enr 2 2 5 HOW TO ENTER THE WALL THICKNESS The wall thickness of the pipe is one of the required parameters The flow computer needs this data to generate accurate transducer size and spacing data recommendations Selecting a pipe class size inserts a wall thickness value If this data is inaccurate then use this menu cell to set the pipe s wall thickness in English or Metric data units 2 9 Section 2 1010NFM 3J NOTE Do not use ASA schedule code to specify the wall thickness You must enter actual dimensions Io enter the Pipe Wall Thickness To enable numeric entry press Use the keypad s numeric keys to type exact wall thickness use in mm To register the pipe wall thickness press er 2 2 08 LINER MATERIAL For lined pipes select a pipe liner from the material option list If the pipe liner material does not appear on th
312. vantages First RAM based operation increases performance Second this creates an immediate Site Setup based on the meter s defaults To make the meter operational you just have to enter required data e g pipe and transducer data and edit other default settings to suit your application When you program the meter all your entries are retained in the Active Memory This enables you to use the meter immediately after finishing a Site Setup You re not limited to one set of site parameters You can copy site data from Active Memory to Site Storage Memory Site Storage Memory provides permanent storage area for several inactive Site Setups The multi site storage feature allows rapid reinstallation at many locations All you have to do to reactivate an inactive Site Setup is to recall it back into to Active Memory However be aware that this action over writes ALL the data residing in the Active Memory area The Datalogger logs data collected at preset intervals during operation It uses the system RAM re sources independently of Active Memory and Site Storage Memory Therefore data movement be tween Active Memory and Site Storage memory will not affect it directly However all stored data shares 5 6 Section 5 1010NFM 3J a common RAM pool The meter allocates the actual amount of bytes available for each storage function dependent on the demands of each facility Therefore an unusually large Datalogger file may reduce the amount of
313. ve Rename Site menu cell Siemens 2Channel 1 FLOW1 Use with Care Turn Security ON or Off Recall Site Setup No Sites Channel Enable No Create Name Site FLOW1 Delete Site Setup No Sites Save Rename Site FLOW1 Channel Setup Press e to leave the Channel Setup menu Section 6 1010NFM 3J Note that the next menu down is Liquid Data This menu allows you to enter Viscosity in centistokes and the Density specific gravity data for the liquid to be measured Data entry in this menu is optional The default values are those of Water at 68 F 20 C If you choose to edit these param eters you should be aware that the viscosity of the liquid is an important factor It governs the degree of Reynolds Number compensation that the flow computer applies to the final rate output Therefore flow data errors could result if you enter inaccurate data Note that the Siemens Technical Service Group may be able to provide the viscosity data for the liquid to be measured To move the highlight to Install Flow Tube press m Press C3 to access the Install Flow Tube menu Siemens 2Channel 1 FLOW1 Pick Flow Tube size and Type Select FlowTube 1S Install Completed No Empty FlowTube Set Chan Not Setup Zero Flow Adjust Chan Not Setup Install FlowTube To access the Flow Tube option list ress Note that this list shows the currently available flow tube sizes The number is the size e g 1 The letter repre
314. w computer generates the Number Index See note below A A A A 2 83 Section 2 1010NFM 3J 996PSP PIPE SIMULATOR CHART Metric Part Wall Mount Letter Number Thk mm Mode Index 996PSP 0 1 93 Direct A 996PSP 1 1 96 Direct 996PSP 2 3 45 Direct 996PSP 3 8 74 Direct 996PSP 4 25 4 Direct The flow computer generates the Number Index See note below A A A A NOTE When using a 996PS 4 Simulator you must access the Application Data menu select Liquid Type Other then program the Estimated Vs for a value of 2100 m s Access the Pick Install Xdcr menu Access the Transducer Model menu cell Enter the Trans ducer Model option list Select 991 Universal Check the Transducer Size menu cell If necessary enter the Transducer Size option list and pick the actual transducer under test Check the Xdcr Mount Mode menu cell Adjust as necessary to match the simulator chart above Move the highlight down to Install Completed Access the option list Move the cursor to Install Press lt ENT gt to start the transducer install routine Check to make sure that the flow computer returns the Number Index listed in the chart above Next review and verify the Diagnostics data items as described previously If the computer cables and transducers are operating properly then review all site conditions to locate the
315. w computer to calculate the Number Index The Number Index establishes the spacing between a pair of transducers You cannot override this recommenda tion To complete the transducer installation you must accept the Number Index by mounting the transducer at that point on your spacer bar or mounting track Initially the flow computer bases its Number Index selection on the pipe diameter and estimated liquid sonic velocity Vs you entered in the Application Data menu When you invoke the Install Completed routine the flow computer actually measures the liquid sonic velocity Vs In some cases it may prompt you to re space the transducers to another number index 2 4 7 THE Ltn MENU CELL This view only menu cell shows the distance in inches or millimeters between the front faces of the transducers along the axis of the pipe If you are mounting the transducers without a track or spacer bar you have to space them according to this value see Section 3 for details Note that Ltn may be a negative number for direct mount on very small pipes where the transducer spacing overlaps 2 4 8 HOW TO USE INSTALL COMPLETED Use the Install Completed menu cell to inform the flow computer that you have mounted the trans ducers according to the selected mode and spacing requirements and are ready to start operation To start the Install Completed routine for an original installation Select any transit time mode e g Clamp On or Flow Tube and p
316. wmeter for a stand alone application you must keep the zero Network ID number To assign a Network ID number To enable numeric entry press Use the numeric keys to type the Network ID number To store Network ID press ev This moves the cursor to RTS Key Time 4 8 6 RTS KEY TIME During a serial transmission session you can select how long the flow computer holds its request to send line high until it receives a clear to send signal If the RTS time expires the 1010 will return its RTS line low and abort the transmission attempt Data entry units are seconds The default RTS key time is 0 2 seconds NOTE The RTS Key Time function is only provided when the meter s network ID number is non zero To set the RTS Key Time To access the RTS Key Time option list press To move the asterisk to the required RTS time press T To store the data press ev 4 9 BACKLIGHT This menu cell allows you to specify how long you want to maintain the backlighting for the LCD Graphic Display Select On for continuous illumination Press the lt Right Arrow gt to access the option list and then scroll to desired time delay before turn off Press enr to store your setting 4 10 SYSTEM INFO This menu provides general information about the flowmeter 4 15 Section 4 1010NFM 3J System Info Menu Structure Version This is the meter s operating system version number The Technical Services Group may request this number during con
317. x numeric entry cette anta eth Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 lise this menuitodefine low and high range for Define data Alarm thresholds setpoints for the alarm analog outputs relay outputs aid Span Data Use this menu cell to Set Alarm Levels ETERA enter a calibration Calibrate Flowrate Intrinsic slope factor for volumetric flow Vfo Data Span Set Cal 2 7 1 SPAN DATA The Span Data menu allows you to set 0 and 100 output limits for volumetric flow Vfo absolute flow Vfab sonic velocity Vs and other outputs see next page Each menu cell shows appropriate rate units and time base If you change flow rate units after spanning the system the computer auto matically updates the output data setup to reflect the change Span limits apply to both the analog outputs and the on screen stripchart The flow outputs operate as follows 2 43 Section 2 1010NFM 3J Vfo The minimum and maximum flow rate entries establish the Vfo span Spanned Volumetric The Max Flow menu cell sets 100 of span The Min Flow menu cell Flow Rate sets 0 of span Use signed numbers for bi directional spanning Note that negative reverse flow always is lower than positive flow whatever its absolute magnitude For example for a flow measurement range of 30 GPM to 10 GPM the 4 mA span will be 30 GPM and the 20 mA span will be 410 GPM Vfab Vfab is the absolute magnitude of the volumetric flow rate
318. xpanded I O Module Installation Drawing 1010 Series Multi Channel Flow Computer Outline Dimensions 1010 Series Multi Channel Flow Computer Installation Drawing 1010 Series Multi Channel Flow Computer Installation Drawing Multi Channel I O Module Transducer and Accessory Drawings 1011 HNFS 7 1011 HNFS 8 1011NFPS 7 1011NFPS 8 1012BN 8 1012FN 8 1012FNH 8 1012TP 7 1012THP 7 1012MS 8 1012TB 8 1012TN 7 1012TN 8 1012TNH 7 1012TNH 8 1011 FTNF 8 992DFTN 8 992DFTP T 8 1012F DB 7 990TDMVH 7A 990TDMVH 7B 990TRMVH 7A Installation 1011HNFS Series Dedicated Plastic Body Transducer Outline Dimension 1011HNFS Series Dedicated Plastic Body Transducer Installation 1011 NFPS Series Dedicated Plastic Body Transducer Outline Dimensions 1011NFPS Series Dedicated Plastic Body Transducer Outline Dimensions 1010 Series Spacer Bar Outline Dimensions 1011 Series Dedicated Transducer Mounting Frames Outline Dimensions 1011HN Series Dedicated Transducer Mounting Frames Installation Drawing 1010 Series Transducers and Mounting Tracks Installation Drawing 1010 Series Transducers and Mounting Tracks Installation Outline Adjustable Mounting Strap Installation Outline 1011 Series Test Block Installation Drawing 1010 Series Transducer amp Mounting Tracks Outline Dimensions 1012 Series Mounting Tracks Installation Drawing 1010 Series Transducer amp Mounting Tracks Outline Dimensions 1012 Series Mounting Tracks Outline Dimensio
319. y then press en ix Eu MESE appears on the menu prompt line Refill the pipe completely then press ee 2 29 Section 2 1010NFM 3J How to Use the MTYmatic Command You can repeat MTYmatic performed during the Initial Makeup to correct an inaccurate Actual MTY setting if conditions do not allow you to repeat the Actual Empty procedure NOTE Only use the MTYmatic procedure when the pipe is full To start MTYmatic To access the Empty Pipe Set option list press Move the cursor next to MT Ymatic press To invoke MTY matic press e How to Use the Set Empty Command Use Set Empty to enter a number that represents the signal strength level consistent with an empty pipe Set Empty uses non linear scaling There is no direct correlation between the number you enter and any standard amplitude unit If you set the number too low the meter may not detect a true empty pipe If you set it too high it could trigger the empty pipe alarm suspending flow measurement even though the liquid is flowing To enter an Empty Pipe Alarm Threshold To access the Empty Pipe Set option list press To move the cursor to Set Empty press Press ev The current empty threshold number appears in a pop up window Use the numeric keys to type a new Set Empty number To store the Set Empty number press e 2 4 10 ZERO FLOW ADJUST MENU Unlike turbine meters ultrasonic transit time meters provide active flow measurement
320. y and portable use on Clamp on flow transducers Temp range 40 F to 100 F Low in halogens and sulfur content Temporary and portable use for all Clamp on flow transducers Well suited for survey use Temp range 30 F to 100 F Low in halogens and sulfur content Water soluble Temporary and portable use for all Clamp on flow transducers Temp range 40 F to 300 F Low viscosity Petroleum product High temp temporary couplant to be used when setting up high temp plastic flow transducers Temp range 255 F to 450 F Resists breakdown and thinning out at high temper atures Permanent high temp couplant for plastic flow transducers Temp range 255 F to 450 F Room temperature vulcanizing silicone rubber Permanent ambient temperature couplant for plastic flow transducers Temp range 40 F to 250 F Room temperature vulcanizing silicone rubber Protective spray for providing corrosion resistance to exposed transducer and track parts Spray on liquid Excellent resistance to salt water atmosphere Temporary and long term couplant for all flow transducer types Temp range 40 F to 255 F Teflon filled grease Water resistant Long term and permanent couplant for Clamp On transducers Temp range 40 F to 450 F Silicone grease loaded with metal oxides Resists Break down and thinning at high temperatures Submersible couplant To be used on all submer
321. you can use a frequency counter to fine tune the meter s pulse rate output NOTE The current voltage and Pgen trimming will be limited by the 12 bit resolution of the meter s D A Convertor DAC To access the Analog Output Trim menu press ANALOG OUTPUT TRIM MENU STRUCTURE Analog Output Trim c lo1 lo2 gt Operate Trim 4mA c Indicated mA x xx c Vo1 Vo2 gt Operate Trim 9 2V Indicated V x xx c Pgent Pgen2 Operate Trim 1kHz Indicated Hz xxxx 4 5 2 CURRENT OUTPUT TRIM lo1 amp lo2 Note Can be trimmed to within 005 mA of nominal To calibrate a current output lo1 or lo2 Set up the multimeter to read Amps then connect it to the supply and return terminals of the current output under test Move the highlight to the port to be tested press C then press D to move the cursor to Trim 4mA Press enr This triggers a 4 00 mA pop up window The multimeter should now be reading 4 00 mA If the multimeter reading does not match use the numeric keys to type in the multi meter reading Press er to register setting This adjusts the meter s DAC digital to analog converter so that a 4mA output corresponds with 4mA on the multimeter Re check the multimeter to make sure that it is now reading 4mA 4 5 3 VOLTAGE OUTPUT TRIM Vo1 amp Vo2 Note Can be trimmed to within 0025 V of nominal To calibrate a voltage output Vo1 or Vo2 Set up
322. your selection at the top of the list and moves you out of the option list to the next menu cell Examine screen on next page The option list item Diesel Fuel has been selected Note that this appears on the right hand column and that the highlighted area moves to the next menu cell in sequence Esti mated Vs m s 1 6 Section 1 1010NFM 3J Siemens 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Access Liquid Option List Select Liquid Diesel Viscosity cS 2 00 Density SG 1 030 Multiple Select Option Lists Certain option lists allow you to make more than one selection For instance the Datalogger Data option list allows you to select any or all of the available data items for your reports You can use the lt Up and Down Arrows gt to move the cursor through the list If you press lt ENT gt to select an item a plus sign appears next to that item The cursor remains so that you can make other selections To deselect a previously selected item move cursor next to that item and press CLR Use Left Ar row gt to leave a multiple select option list Siemens 2Channel 1 1 Select Datalogger Data Datalogger Mode Site Id Date Log Time Interval Time Datalogger Events Flow Display Datalogger Average Flow Raw Flow Total Liquid Class Entering Numeric Data When a menu cell requires a numeric answer press the lt Right Arrow gt to access a number entry field an equal sign appears before current ent

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Kenmore 153.330401 Water Heater User Manual  MODEL SPC-PANEL - Pentair Water Literature  Umsetzung und Evaluation eines mit - FB3  Addition to the user manual for the AVR Transistor tester  demande de cheque-vacances - École Nationale Supérieure d  "取扱説明書"    Kathrein VGR 122    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file